null  null
SWIFT GROUP
Dunswell Road
Cottingham
East Yorkshire HU16 4JX
Tel 01482 875740
Fax 01482 840082
email [email protected]
For more information visit
www.swiftgroup.co.uk
Issued July 2016
FIND OUT MORE SWIFTGROUP.CO.UK
BROCHURE
DOWNLOADS
FIND A
DEALER
FACEBOOK AND
SWIFT-TALK.CO.UK
PRODUCT VIDEOS
SWIFTTV.CO.UK
1420403
MOTORHOME
OWNER’S SERVICE AND WARRANTY HANDBOOK
New!
ten Haaft - A GERMAN
COMPANY WITH 25 YEARS OF TRADITION
• Oyster® Premium - the „classic“ in combination
with the new „Oyster® TV“ - devices
• Perfect networking - both systems
are controlled with only one
System Remote Control*
• Everything from a single source!
• 3 years warranty
„Oyster® TV“
*System Remote Control only available for Premiumrange
®
www.oystersat-tech.co.uk
Sat-Tech Ltd.
A ten Haaft Company
Oyster Sat-Tech Ltd. . Unit 5, Hemploe Business Park Hemploe Road, Welford Northants, NN6 6HF
Tel.: 0044 1858 575 928 . Fax: 0044 1858 575 028 [email protected]
POWER YOUR
GETAWAY
Start your adventure with Yuasa
When it comes to batteries, Yuasa are number one for
high quality, reliability and performance.
Designed for caravans and motorhomes, our
maintenance free leisure range provide a long service
life and also incorporate enhanced safety features.
So the next time you’re ready to getaway, you can
rely on Yuasa to give you the freedom.
Find your nearest stockist at:
www.yuasaeurope.com
The world’s leading battery manufacturer
PREMIUM ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR MOTORHOME
The AL-KO premium motorhome accessories provide a complementary range of
products designed to suit the AMC Chassis and your Swift Motorhome. The range
now includes Cycle and Scooter Carriers, tow bars and steady legs, all designed to
offer you more flexibility and enhanced comfort when using your motorhome.
For more information and to see the complete range of products, visit our website or
email us at [email protected]
Scan with your
smart phone to
visit our website
[email protected] | www.al-ko.co.uk
Dometic
compact roof
air conditioners
FreshJet 2200 awarded
Best Buy
• Most compact rooftop
air conditioner
• Lightest
• Quietest
• Lowest starting current
• Lowest power consumption
FreshJet 2200
NOW
Available in 4
performance
levels
*In an air conditioning comparison
test by Reise Mobil International Magazine
Dometic FreshJet 1100, 1700 & 2200
• 3 performance levels for vehicles up to 5 m, 6 m
or 7 m in length
• Very low starting currents - FreshJet 2200 with Soft Start
• Air diffuser with two adjustable air flows
• LED lighting, remote control
Dometic FreshJet 3200
Ideal for vehicles of over 8 m
For a full range of rooftop or underbench air conditioners please visit:
www.dometic.co.uk/air-conditioners
Thule Excellent
Standard
Thule Excellent
Short
Thule Excellent
100% innovation. Pure design
e
2
bike
• 2 bikes
• Max. bike weight: 30kg
• Weight: 10.6kg
• Perfect for e-bikes
• Max. loading weight: 50kg
Contact us: [email protected]
Bring your life
thule.com
TRUMA AVENTA
AIR CONDITIONING
THE PERFECT ADDITION
TO YOUR MOTORHOME
For Ultimate Comfort
Fit This Roof-Mounted System
Aventa Comfort Model
*
*
*
Reverse cycle heating
Exceptional cooling performance of 2400W
Extremely light at 33kg
Aventa Eco Model
*
*
*
Powerful cooling at 1700W
Low power consumption of 2.8A
Lightest in its class at 28kg
Catch up with us on
Facebook and Twitter
STEP
INTOCONNECT
DIRECT
WHAT IS CONNECT
DIRECT?
Connect Direct is an online
system which personalises each
customers experience of owning
their motorhome. The system is
now available across the entire
range.
HOW DOES IT
WORK?
Once you have logged on and
created your profile, you will be
able to access a whole host of
information, specific to your
motorhome. In addition you will
be able to have a direct line into
the retail team, with the launch of
a live chat facility.
Should a problem occur, you
will be able to report a fault to
us directly, enabling us to react
quickly and work together with
your dealer to take the problem
away from you the owner and
resolve the issue as quickly as
possible.
Product upgrades and
notifications will be sent via
Connect Direct keeping you up
to date over the coming years.
This online system provides a
direct route for you into the Swift
Group, and enables us to provide
you with proactive Customer
Service support, enhancing your
experience.
Connect Direct is in addition
to the traditional methods of
contacting us.
The key benefits of Connect
Direct are:
•Access to information 24/7
• Ability to report faults directly
to us
•Product upgrades and
notifications
•Live chat direct into our
experienced retail team
• Upload service history
records
• Service history reminders
STEP
INTOMORE
CONTROL
At the Swift Group we’re continually looking for ways to enhance your
enjoyment of the outdoors. Swift Command is a real innovation designed
to make your touring experience even more carefree.
Swift Command technology includes a smart LCD control panel that
has enhanced control panel functions. There is also an exciting, free
downloadable ‘app’ that links to the Swift Command unit, so you can be
in control from the comfort and convenience of your mobile device.
Swift Command is now available across the entire range.
NOW FEATURING
THATCHAM CATEGORY 6
APPROVED
PRO-ACTIVE TRACKER
C
0%
LIGHTING
POWER
Track your energy use and
mange your batteries for
efficient use of your all
important power services.
M
0%
Y
0
White
Sargent Purpl
C
M
Y
71% 81% 0
Sargent Blue
C
M
Y
67% 0% 1
‘Command Tracker’ Typefac
StainlessExt - Bold
AaBbCc
SUBSCRIBE FOR ONLY
£95 PER ANNUM
LOCATION AND REMOTE FEATURES
Create just the right
ambience onboard with easily
adjustable lighting settings.
C
M
Y
99% 96% 9
Pantone® 275
Head to the Apple or Android store and search
for ‘Swift Command’.
Connect to your leisure vehicle from any where
to view its systems information and location.
Conveniently control and monitor your onboard
services when away from your vehicle.
Colours
WATER
Keep an eye on your
precious water levels so you
know in good time when to
top-up.
HEATING
Activate whilst out exploring
and enjoy the warmth when
you get back.
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for deciding to buy one of our
new motorhomes.
We are sure you will enjoy many happy hours
in it and we hope the information and hints in
this handbook will heighten your enjoyment.
The handbook has been designed to give
you a general guide to the care, use and
maintenance of your motorhome. Whether you
are a new or an experienced motorhomer the
hints will help to protect your investment.
Throughout the season, specifications and
equipment details contained within this
handbook may change. Please refer to our
online handbooks (www.swiftgroup.co.uk) for
the most up-to-date version of your handbook.
Customers should note that all motorhomes
are supplied with two handbooks, the User
Handbook which contains general information
for the use and care of your product and the
Technical Handbook, which contains technical
information, weights and dimensions of your
product.
IN TRODUCT ION
Dear owner
The information contained will answer most
of your queries, but if there are any aspects
which are not covered please consult your
appointed dealer. We would suggest you
make a note of your dealers name and contact
information below.
Dealer Name:
Sales Tel:
Telephone Number:
Service Centre Tel:
E-mail:
Parts Tel:
VIN:
First Service Due:
1
CONT E N TS
SWIFT TALK
Swift Talk
Swift Talk is the new central forum for the Swift
community online. A place for all those united
in their love of caravanning, motorhomes,
holiday homes and touring in general, to share
their experiences, meet new friends and find
out a world of information on how to enjoy
their touring lifestyle.
The site is packed full of features that actively
encourage members, not only to liaise with the
Swift Group via the forums, but also interact
with each other through publishing their own
content, uploading and sharing photos and
video, and even posting their own blogs for the
community to follow.
Swift Talk is the first place to learn about new
product launches, events and Swift Group
news, it’s also the first place customers can
go to as a quick reference to frequently asked
questions or to actively take part in the forums;
providing valuable feedback on Swift Group
products and customer service.
The new online community can even be used
to create your own groups, perfect for Owners’
Clubs, dealers and exhibitors to attract new
members, publicise and build awareness for
upcoming events, rallies and shows.
Anyone who owns, uses, or is thinking of
buying a Swift Group caravan, motorhome
or holiday home, or would just like to be part
of the growing Swift community is actively
encouraged to sign up, create their own
content, and start talking!
Just visit www.swift-talk.co.uk
and become part of a unique
online experience.
I chat on
SwiftTalk
Social Network for Caravan and Motorhome enthusiasts
www.swift-talk.co.uk
2
CONTENTS
Motorhome code .................................................................................................................... 15
Preparing for the road ............................................................................................................. 19
En-route ................................................................................................................................. 27
CO N T E NT S
Warranty ................................................................................................................................. 5
Safety & security ..................................................................................................................... 33
Arrival at site ........................................................................................................................... 47
Services ................................................................................................................................. 49
Electrics .................................................................................................................................. 71
Fitted equipment .................................................................................................................... 101
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 219
Fault Finding ........................................................................................................................... 235
Useful information ................................................................................................................... 241
3
4
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Change of ownership................................................................................................................ 9
Swift Connect Direct.................................................................................................................. 9
What to do if you require assistance ......................................................................................... 9
Supplier contacts...................................................................................................................... 10
Motorhome - annual service/inspection record ......................................................................... 11
Annual service / inspection record stamps ................................................................................ 12
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
Warranty ................................................................................................................................... 6
5
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
WARRANTY
Motorhome Warranty
All the illustrations and descriptive matter in
this handbook are intended to give a general
idea of the motorhome. Changing market and
supply situations and our policy of continuous
product development may prevent us from
maintaining the exact specifications detailed
in this handbook. We therefore reserve the
right to alter specifications as materials and
conditions demand.
Dealers are not agents of Swift Group Limited
("Swift") and have absolutely no authority
to bind the manufacturer by any express or
implied undertaking or representation.
Your Coach-built motorhome has
four warranties:
Base Vehicle Warranty – provided by Fiat
Your vehicle is a coach-built motorhome which
utilises a Fiat base vehicle. Swift takes a flat
bed chassis supplied by Fiat and adds the
coach-built habitation part of the motorhome.
Fiat provide a manufacturer's warranty for the
base vehicle as supplied to Swift by them.
For any issues with the base vehicle warranty
please contact your local Fiat dealer. This
Motorhome Warranty does not cover any
parts of your motorhome that are covered by
the Fiat manufacturer's warranty. Your base
vehicle warranty is subject to the terms and
conditions contained in the Fiat handbook
supplied with the base vehicle and the vehicle
must be serviced in accordance with Fiat's
requirements.
SuperSure Warranty – provided by Swift
For all parts or fittings of your coach-built
motorhome other than the habitation body
shell and the Fiat base vehicle, Swift will repair
(or at it's option, replace) any defective parts
or fittings for 3 years from the date of purchase
(or hire purchase) subject to conditions, terms
and exclusions below.
Body Shell Warranty – provided by Swift
Swift will repair (or at its option, replace) any
defects with the habitation body shell for
6 years from the date of purchase (or hire
purchase), subject to the conditions, terms
and exclusions below.
6
Extended Body Shell Warranty
– provided by Swift
For the first owner, Swift will repair (or at its
option, replace) any defects with the habitation
body shell for 10 years from the date of
purchase (or hire purchase), subject to the
conditions, terms and exclusions below.
The SuperSure Warranty, the Body Shell
warranty and/or the Extended Body Shell
Warranty provided by Swift do not cover any
parts of the motorhome that are covered by
the Fiat warranty.
Conditions for the SuperSure, Body Shell
and Extended Body Shell Warranties
1. You must ensure that the habitation part
of your coach-built motorhome has an
Annual Service (see clause 2 below) within
90 days before or 60 days after each
anniversary of the original date of purchase.
In order to preserve your SuperSure
Warranty the third Annual Service must,
however, be carried out before the expiry of
the 36 month period from the original date
of purchase. In order to preserve your Body
Shell Warranty, the sixth Annual Service
must be carried out before the expiry of
the 72 month period from the original date
of purchase. In order to preserve your
Extended Body Shell Warranty, the tenth
Annual Service must be carried out before
the expiry of the 120 month period from
the original date of purchase. If you have
not performed an Annual Service then Swift
will not be obliged to perform any work
under the applicable warranty. Original VAT
invoices must be retained as proof that
Annual Service have been carried out.
2. The Annual Service on the body shell and
habitation area must be carried out in
accordance with the requirements in this
handbook. You will be responsible for
any charges made for an Annual Service.
If the Annual Service is performed by an
authorised Swift Group Service Centre then
Swift warrants that the Annual Service has
been performed correctly. If the Annual
Service is performed by an unauthorised
repairer or service centre then if the
Annual Service has not been performed in
3. All new motorhomes must be registered
with Swift within 6 weeks of purchase
as new. 4. The benefit of the SuperSure and Body Shell
Warranties may be transferred to a new
owner if the motorhome is re-sold, provided
that the motorhome has been serviced in
accordance with the requirements of this
handbook, and details of the change of
ownership have been supplied to Swift
using the change of ownership form set out
in this handbook as soon as reasonably
practicable after the change.
5. The benefit of the Extended Body Shell
Warranty is non transferable to new
owners and applies only to the original
registered keeper of the vehicle.
6. If any repairs are identified as being
necessary to the body shell or habitation
areas during an Annual Service or
otherwise, Swift will only pay for Warranty
work performed by an authorised Swift
Group Service Centre. The motorhome
must be made available to an authorised
Swift Group Service Centre within 6 weeks
of the date the repair need was identified
for the work to be carried out. The cost
of transporting, towing or moving the
motorhome by any means to or from the
place of repair is the responsibility of the
owner.
7. The SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended
Body Shell Warranties only apply to
motorhomes purchased and used
primarily within the UK, which means
that the motorhome is not used for
continuous journeys outside of the UK of
longer than 90 days per journey. Please
refer to the Fiat handbook for use of the
base vehicle outside the UK.
Terms
8. The Body Shell Warranty and Extended
Body Shell Warranty covers any defect with
the panels and seams of the coachbuilt
habitation part of the motorhome. This
includes body leaks, delamination of
panels or floor, water ingress through any
permanently sealed seam joints. NB: The
Extended Body Shell Warranty is non
transferable and only applies to the
original registered owner.
9. In the first 12 months the SuperSure
Warranty will cover any defect other than
those specified in the Exclusions below.
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
accordance with the requirements in this
handbook and/or work has been performed
on your motorhome that is defective or
faulty, then Swift will not be obliged to
perform any work under this Warranty
(insofar as it relates to defective or faulty
work or defective Annual Service).
10. In the years 2 and 3 the SuperSure
Warranty will only cover any defect with the
following components:
• Electrical System: PSU, battery
charger, Smart Command and interior
lighting units (excluding bulbs).
• Water system: water heater, fresh water
tank, water pump, water gauges, taps
and shower head.
• Cooker: the cooker unit including grill,
oven, burners, igniter and flame failure
device.
• Refrigerator: gas igniter, flame failure
device, door seal condenser, gas control
valve, 12V and 230V heater elements,
gas thermostat, 230V thermostat and
230V temperature control switch.
• Cassette toilet: the casstte toilet
(excluding seals, valves and glands)
• Heating system: thermostat, motor,
switches, control unit, gas heater, flame
failure device and igniter (excluding
ducting and fittings)
• Windows: the functionality of the
opening and closing sytem (stays,
handles and catches) and a warranty
against the cracking of the acrylic.
Excludes fading.
• Upholstery: zips, seams and colour
fastness.
7
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
WARRANTY
In years 2 and 3, any defect specified in the
Exclusions will not be covered.
Exclusions
11.Swift shall not be liable under the
SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended Body
Shell Warranties for any defect related to or
arising from the following:
• The failure of a component for reasons of
fair wear and tear;
• Damage resulting from freezing, fire, overheating or accidents (whether caused by
the user or a third party);
• Misuse of any component;
• Normal deterioration, corrosion, intrusion
of foreign or harmful bodies, lack of
servicing or negligence of any person
other than Swift which causes stoppage
of or impairment to the function of any
component of the motorhome;
• Replacement of parts which have
reached the end of their effective working
life because of age and/or usage;
• Cleaning or adjustment of any
assemblies; • Cosmetic finishes to kitchen sinks, cooker
tops, vanity units, shower trays; and/or
• Routine maintenance items which are part
of the annual service including lubricants,
rubber gas hose, the cleaning of the
heater and fridge flues, the replacement
of gas jets, the resealing and/or
replacement of shower room sealant, and
the adjustment and lubrication of locks.
12. In addition to the exclusions above,
in years 2 and 3 of the SuperSure
Warranty Period, Swift Group Limited shall
not be liable under this Warranty for any
defects related to:
• Any audio equipment;
8
• Any microwave; and/or
• Any television
• Wall and Roof GRP sheeting material:
after 24 months from date of purchase.
13. Swift shall also not be liable under the
SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended
Body Shell Warranties if the Motorhome
has been neglected, misused, modified
or used for hire or reward or if the
identification marks (chassis/VIN numbers)
have been removed or defaced. The
motorhome will be deemed to have been
neglected if it has not been serviced and
maintained as stated in this handbook or
any repairs being identified as necessary
at an Annual Service or by a Swift Group
Service Centre have not been carried out
in a reasonable time.
You have legal rights under UK law
governing the sale of consumer goods.
This Warranty does not affect your
legal rights.
The name and address of the Warranty
provider is:
Swift Group Limited, Dunswell Road,
Cottingham, East Yorkshire, HU16 4JX
To make a claim under this Warranty, contact
the Swift Group Service Centre which supplied
your motorhome. Alternatively, details of your
nearest authorised Swift Group Service Centre
can be obtained by contacting the Swift Group
Customer Service Department on
01482 875740, or enquiring on the website
www.swiftgroup.co.uk ASSISTANCE
You can transfer the remainder of any 3 year
'Supersure' warranty' and the 6 year 'Body
Shell' warranty, details of how to do this can
be found at the rear of this handbook.
The 'Extended 10 Year Body Shell Warranty' is
non transferable.
For Swift Connect Direct
customers
You have access to a new online system which
is for all Swift models. A password will be
issued to you, to enable you to interact with
us.
To access the system, called 'Swift Connect
Direct', your initial log in details will be emailed
to you once your supplying dealer has
registered your ownership with us.
Please log in and create your own profile.
Should you have issues with accessing Swift
Connect Direct, please contact our Customer
Services Team.
What to do if you
require assistance
Should you have an enquiry or require
assistance with a problem, we hope that this
guide will be of assistance to you.
If you have a problem, or enquiry with
regards to your new motorhome, please
follow these steps:
1. Check the Owners Handbook, paying
particular attention to the fault finding
advice at the back of the book.
2. Contact your supplying dealer
for assistance.
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
Change of ownership
If you need to contact the Swift Group,
please be aware of the following:
1. When contacting Swift Customer Service,
please quote your name, postcode and VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number). This can be
found at the bottom of the front windscreen,
on the plate on the front cross member
within the engine compartment and on the
Swift manufacturers plate situated on the
bulkhead directly behind the front driver/
passenger seat.
2. In most instances, the Customer Service
Team will involve your dealer in resolving the
issue you are experiencing.
3. Check our website www.swiftgroup.
co.uk and enter the Owners section which
provides answers to frequently asked
questions and how to contact us.
4. If you are contacting the company by
email, letter or fax, the Customer Service
Team will respond to you within five
working days from the date of receiving the
correspondence.
5. If you are calling the Customer Service
Team, please avoid where possible,
Mondays and lunch times.
6. Please be aware that the Swift Group
cannot send parts direct from the factory.
In all cases, without exception, your dealer
must place the order for you.
9
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
SUPPLIER CONTACTS
Supplier contacts
A number of Swift Group suppliers manage their own Technical and Warranty related queries.
Where a customer has a question relating to a product manufactured by a company listed below,
we would advise that the first contact should be directly with them.
Sargent Electrical Services
Unit 39, Tokenspire Business Park, Beverley,
East Yorkshire, HU17 0TB
Phone: 01482 678981
Fax: 01482 678987
E-mail: [email protected]
AL-KO Kober Limited
South Warwickshire Business Park
Kineton Road, Southam,
Warwickshire, CV47 0AL
Fax: 01926 818562
Email: [email protected]
Truma UK Ltd.
Park lane, Dove Valley Park,
South Derbyshire, DE65 5BG
Phone: 01283 586020
Fax: 01283 586029
[email protected]
Thetford Ltd.
Unit 6, Brookfields Way,
Manvers,Rotherham, S63 5DL
Phone: 0844 997 1960
www.thetford-europe.com
Email: [email protected]
Alde International (UK) Ltd
Huxley Close, Park Farm South,
Wellingborough, Northants NN8 6AB
Phone: 01933 677765
Fax: 01933 674975
Email: [email protected]
Dometic (UK) Ltd
Dometic House, The Brewery,
Blandford St Mary, Dorset, DT11 9LS
Phone: 0844 626 0133
Email: [email protected]
10
SERVICE INSPECTION
1. Damp and lamination test.
In order to comply with the warranty, you must
have your motorhome inspected and serviced
at least once per year.
3. Corner steadies.
We highly recommend that you have your
Motorhome serviced by a Swift Group
Approved Service Centre who have direct
access to our online Customer Service
system, Connect. This system provides them
with the ability to order approved parts and
ensure that any product upgrades which
may be available for your Motorhome can be
offered to you and carried out as part of the
service. In the unfortunate event that an issue
requires attention under warranty then Swift
Group Approved Service Centres are able to
submit a warranty claim to the Swift Group
for processing, and deal with the issue for
you from start to finish. All of our Swift Group
Approved Service Centres are provided with
up to date technical information and have
access to current repair methods giving you
peace of mind that any defect has been
repaired effectively.
It is important that the Owner’s Handbook
is stamped on the appropriate page by the
authorised Swift Group Service Centre. Failure
to do this will invalidate the warranty and the
transfer of the warranty on the change of
ownership.
2. Chassis and chassis to body security.
4. Motorhome step.
5. Road lights, wiring and reflectors.
6. Internal lights and 12V DC system.
7. Water heater - gas and 230V AC (if fitted).
8. Hob, grill and oven.
9. Refrigerator 230V AC, 12V DC and gas.
10. Gas system.
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
Motorhomes - annual service/
inspection record
11. Water pump, taps and water system.
12. Mains 230V AC system.
13. Windows and fittings.
14. Smoke alarm and battery.
15. Carbon Monoxide detector and Battery
16. Roof lights.
17. Furniture hinges/stays etc.
18. Exterior locks and hinges.
19. All internal vents.
20. Seals.
21. Blinds and fly screens (if fitted).
22. Blown air heating and gas fire systems
23. Drop down bed operation
The inspection should take approximately two
to four hours and will cover the areas dealt
with in the annual service check list. Any areas
requiring service and/or maintenance will be
highlighted by your dealer and we recommend
that you authorise any necessary work to be
carried out.
Note: It is essential, to validate the warranty,
that an annual inspection be carried out by
an authorised Swift Group Service Centre
covering the items listed.
11
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
SERVICE INSPECTION
12
Annual service / inspection record stamps
1st service
DATE:
Motorhome model:
DEALER’S STAMP
Year:
Chassis VIN:
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
2nd service
3rd service
DATE:
DATE:
DEALER’S STAMP
DEALER’S STAMP
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
4th service
5th service
DATE:
DATE:
DEALER’S STAMP
DEALER’S STAMP
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
6th service
7th service
DATE:
DATE:
DEALER’S STAMP
DEALER’S STAMP
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
9th service
DATE:
DATE:
DEALER’S STAMP
DEALER’S STAMP
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
10th service
11th service
DATE:
DATE:
DEALER’S STAMP
DEALER’S STAMP
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
8th service
13
14
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
MOTORHOME CODE
The Country code......................................................................................................................18
The Coastal code......................................................................................................................18
MO TORHOME CODE
Code of conduct.......................................................................................................................16
15
MOT ORHOME C O D E
CODE OF CONDUCT
Code of conduct
Camp sites
Arrivals
Report to reception immediately on arrival.
Vehicle Movement
Keep to roadways unless otherwise directed.
Adhere to speed limits. Note that these
are generally 10 mph. (Remember that the
stopping distance on grass is considerably
greater than on tarmac.)
Only a person in possession of a current
driving licence may drive on the site.
Park correctly as advised on your pitch. Where
possible leave 20 feet of free space around
your vehicle.
Use of Site Appliances
Use the electrical mains hook-up in the correct
manner and with caution.
Ensure that all fresh water taps/connections
are turned off after use.
Have care and consideration when using all
facilities (toilets and showers etc) and leave
clean and tidy. Young children should be
supervised.
Waste Disposal
If the vehicle is not fitted with a waste water
tank, a suitable receptacle should be placed
below all waste water outlet pipes. Do not let
these containers overflow. Dispose of all waste
water where instructed. Empty effluent from
chemical toilets where instructed.
To avoid possible damage to sewage
purification works, only approved chemical
fluids must be used. Under no circumstances
should coal tar, phenol or caustic-based fluids
be used.
Disposable nappies and similar bulky items
must not be put into chemical closet emptying
points but should be wrapped in a polythene
bag and placed in the container provided. Place
all litter in containers marked for the purpose.
16
Noise
Do not make excessive noise.
Children should be restrained from making
excessive noise.
Flying kites and model aircraft and the use of
items like catapults or air-guns, as well as ball
games, should not be permitted among, or
close to other vehicles.
Musical instruments, record players, radios
and televisions should not be used to the
inconvenience of other people on the site.
Open and close doors quietly.
Power generators must be adequately silenced
and used with consideration.
Dogs and other Pets
All dogs and other pets should be kept under
control.
Unless permission has been granted, no
animal should be allowed loose on the site and
leads must not exceed 10ft.
No animals should be allowed in the shower/
toilet blocks.
Do not let dogs foul the site.
Fire Precautions
Adhere to and take note of fire precautions
noting the whereabouts of the fire points.
! WARNING: Provide one dry powder
fire extinguisher of an approved type or
complying with EN3-7, of at least 1kg
capacity, by the main exterior door and a fire
blanket next to the cooker.
Familiarise yourself with the operating
instructions on your fire extinguisher and the
local fire precaution arrangements.
When using a dry powder extinguisher it is
suggested that the motorhome be evacuated
until the powder has settled, to avoid
inhalation.
PARKING/DRIVING
Open fires are not allowed.
Awnings and Tents
Driving
Before moving off, elevated rooflights and
aerials should be lowered and correctly
secured, and top hinged windows closed.
Likewise all doors and access lockers for
gas containers and chemical toilets must be
properly secured.
Awnings and tents should only be used when
permission has been obtained.
Exterior steps should be properly retracted
and secured.
When on grass and staying for more than a
few days, the ground sheet and/or side flaps
of awnings should be periodically raised in
order to avoid damage to the ground.
When the vehicle is in motion it is compulsory
for all front seat passengers and rear seat
passengers to wear seat belts, where fitted.
Departure
Leave the pitch clean and tidy.
On leaving, check out with reception paying
the required fees.
Wild camping
Camping away from licensed sites, without the
permission from the land owner or his agents,
is not allowed in the United Kingdom.
When permission has been granted, all
aspects of this Code should be adhered to.
When using a motorhome on either the public
highway or private roads the Highway Code
should be complied with and full consideration
given to other road users.
In the event of a motorhome travelling slowly
the driver of the motorhome should, where
possible, pull over in order to let other traffic
pass.
! WARNING: When refuelling or on a ferry
ensure the gas system is fully isolated at
source.
On no account should:
Handbooks (chassis & converter)
a. L
itter be disposed of other than in the
receptacles provided.
Before using a motorhome all aspects of
the handbooks, produced by the chassis
manufacturer and the converter, must be read
and adhered to.
b. W
ater be allowed to escape from the
vehicle.
c. C
hemical toilets be emptied except into the
disposal places agreed with the land owner.
d. Washing
or similar be hung outside the
vehicle.
MO TORHOME CODE
Unless permission has been granted,
barbecues should not be used. If permission
is given, consideration should be given to the
annoyance that can be caused to other users
of the site.
The separate chassis manufacturer handbook
refers to your motorhome chassis and base
vehicle including care and maintenance.
Parking
Motorhomes should only be parked in
approved places.
When using the facilities of a motorhome, care
and consideration should be given to those
around them.
17
MOT ORHOME C O D E
COUNTRY/COASTAL CODE
Environment
Care and consideration should be taken to
protect the environment.
Shellfish can take years to grow and fines
can be imposed for not observing national
regulations.
Observe the Country and Coastal Codes.
Do not pull up seaweeds unnecessarily.
The Country code
Make your visit instructive - not destructive.
Enjoy the countryside but respect its life and
work.
More people than ever before are exploring
the countryside, interested in farming, plant
life, bird watching or just observing the general
wildlife. Whatever your interest, there is a lot to
learn, but please observe the following code:
1. Guard against all risk of fires. Hay and
heathland catch alight easily and once
ablaze are very difficult to put out.
Remember: fire spreads quickly.
2. Fasten all gates.
3. Keep your dog under proper control.
4. Keep to the paths across farm land.
5. Avoid damaging fences, hedges and walls.
6. Leave no litter.
7. Safeguard water supplies.
8. Protect wildlife, wild plants and trees.
9. Go carefully on country roads.
10. Respect the life of the countryside.
The Coastal code
As our coastlines are increasingly used for
recreation and education, the following
suggestions are made to enable us to enjoy
our inheritance and preserve it for posterity.
Disturbance may mean DEATH.
Do not trample about, or move rocks
unnecessarily.
Do not frighten seals or seabirds.
Do not spill detergents, solvents or fuel from
boats as these can kill marine life.
When sailing, moderate your speed - the wash
from a fast boat can destroy banks and nests.
18
Live molluscs and crustaceans need not
be collected as souvenirs - dead shells can
usually be found.
Look at material - don’t remove it. Take notes
and photographs, not specimens.
Observe by-laws and be considerate to others.
National Trust property and Country Parks
have regulations to protect the wildlife. Follow
these and the Country and Coastal Codes.
PREPARING FOR THE ROAD
Motorhome terms..................................................................................................................... 20
Loading of vehicle..................................................................................................................... 21
Large storage areas.................................................................................................................. 22
Roof loading............................................................................................................................. 22
Tyres........................................................................................................................................ 22
Dedicated travelling passenger seating..................................................................................... 23
Child seats............................................................................................................................... 23
Three point seat belts............................................................................................................... 24
Driving licence.......................................................................................................................... 24
P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D
Before moving off..................................................................................................................... 20
Vehicle classifications............................................................................................................... 25
Advice on towing...................................................................................................................... 25
European Touring..................................................................................................................... 26
19
PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D
BEFORE MOVING OFF
Before moving off
Check:
• gas cylinders are correctly positioned,
secured and turned off unless using en-route
heating.
• all gas operated appliances have been
isolated, except the en-route heating system
if fitted.
• loose articles including bed and luton ladders
are stowed securely. Do not stow tins,
bottles or heavy items in overhead lockers.
• all lockers and cupboard doors are closed
and secured.
• tables are stored or locked in their
transit position.
• fridge is on 12V operation and door lock
is set.
• 230V mains input socket flap is
securely closed.
• all drain taps are closed
• tyre pressures and wheel nuts.
• rear corner steadies (if fitted) are raised.
• exterior roof rack ladder is raised and
secured.
• all windows/doors/rooflights are closed and
secured.
• TV aerial is lowered and locked into position
(where fitted).
• exterior step (where fitted) is retracted
/folded in.
• Ensure exterior service locker is closed and
locked (where fitted).
• Drop down bed is in upper stowed position.
Special attention must be taken to ensure
all top hinged windows as well as the Luton
windows, Skyviews and rooflights are closed
when in transit. All units should be fully
closed and latched to prevent damage. The
motorhome exterior door should also be
locked.
20
! WARNING: Large and/or voluminous
items should be stored securely before
travelling.
! WARNING: Vehicles over 3m high have
a maximum vehicle height label affixed
to the drivers sunblind. When planning
your route take your vehicle height into
consideration.
Central locking (if fitted)
The central locking will not activate unless
the cab doors are closed. It will however
activate with the habitation door open. The
habitation door lock will then engage when
the door is closed leading to the possibility
of being locked out of the vehicle, if the
keys are left inside. It is therefore essential
that the habitation door is closed before
the central locking is activated. To open
the habitation door when locked, pull the
internal door handle twice.
Motorhome terms
Mass in Running Order:
The mass of the motorhome equipped to
the motorhome manufacturers standard
specification, as stated by the manufacturer.
The MRO comprises the ex-works weight of
the motorhome, including the driver, 90% fuel
capacity, 1 x LPG gas cylinder @10kg and
standard fixtures & fittings in compliance with
European Regulation No. 1230/2012 (Masses
& Dimensions)
Note: The mass of the motorhome in
running order contains provision for the
masses of liquids, gas etc. (see Mass in
Running Order in the Technical Section).
Part of this provision can also be utilised as
additional payload, if for example, you wish
to travel with no gas cylinders.
Note: If you travel with water in the fresh
water tank or waste tank, the payload will be
reduced accordingly
Note: Quoted MRO is subject to tolerance,
due to weight variation of materials used in
Motorhome construction.
LOADING VEHICLE
Nose weight of Towed Trailers:
The maximum allowable weight to be put into
the motorhome whilst it is being driven. This is
made up of 4 sections:
The static mass of the trailer towing device on
the rear of the towing vehicle.
Personal effects, conventional load, optional
equipment and essential habitation equipment.
1. When measuring the noseweight it is
important that the trailer is loaded.
The Maximum User Payload is the difference
between the Maximum Technically Permissible
Laden Mass and the Mass in Running Order.
2. The trailer is intended to be towed slightly
nose heavy. The nose weight can be
adjusted by distribution of the load. The
nose weight should be approximately 7% of
the actual laden weight (but not greater than
the hitch capacity) and at the same time suit
the motorhome requirements.
Personal Effects:
Those items which a user can choose to carry
in a motorhome and which are not included
as Essential Habitation Equipment or Optional
equipment.
Conventional Load:
A mass allowance for each designated
passenger seat.
Optional Equipment:
Items made available by the manufacturer over
and above the standard specification of the
motorhome.
Essential Habitation:
A mass allowance for liquids in systems not
accounted for within the MRO.
Maximum Technically Permissible
Laden Mass:
The maximum weight for which the
motorhome is designed for normal use when
being driven on a road, laden.
This mass takes into account specific
operating conditions including factors such as
the strength of materials, loading capacity of
tyres etc.
! WARNING: Under no circumstances
should the axle loadings or the Maximum
Technically Permissible Laden Mass of the
motorhome be exceeded.
Notes:
P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D
Maximum User Payload:
See ‘Advice on Towing’ page 25.
Loading of vehicle
! WARNING: The driver is responsible for
arranging the loads so that they comply with
the technical weight limits of the specific
motorhome model.
Correct weight distribution is an important
factor in ensuring your vehicle is well balanced
and easy to drive. It is therefore necessary to
load your motorhome carefully making sure
all heavy articles are evenly distributed and
are preferably placed in the lower lockers or
bed boxes.
! WARNING: The two longitudinal
bars fitted to the roof are there for styling
purposes and should not be used for load
carrying unless cross bars are fitted.
! WARNING: Do not travel with televisions
or microwaves in overhead lockers unless
the appliance was supplied fitted to your
motorhome by the manufacturer.
Although it is essential to ensure that the
total weight of your motorhome does not
exceed the stipulated Maximum Technically
Permissible Laden Mass, (MTPLM), it is
important to remember that the front and rear
axles also have individual maximum weights
which must not be exceeded.
21
PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D
STORAGE/ROOF LOADING
See your Technical Handbook for MTPLM and
maximum axle loads.
Note: To ensure adequate road holding the
load on the front axle, under all conditions,
must not be less than 40% or more than
70% of the total weight.
Ensure you distribute the payload equally on
each side of the vehicle to avoid an imbalance.
These weights, together with the MTPLM, can
be found on the Statutory plate adhered to the
bulkhead behind the right hand cab seat.
Note: Please take care to ensure you have
allowed for the masses of all the items you
intend to carry in your motorhome e.g.
passengers, optional equipment, essential
habitational equipment and personal effects
such as clothing, food, pets, bicycles,
sailboards, sports equipment etc.
Large storage areas
The large storage areas provided in some
motorhome layouts are designed solely for
the purpose of carrying personal possessions,
these areas must not be used;
• as a habitation area (eg living, sleeping
or cooking).
• to carry passengers, animals or livestock.
• for the installation (or use) of any LPG gas
operated appliances, (unless supplied fitted
by the manufacturer).
• for carrying LPG gas bottle cylinders.
• to carry any flammable liquids, unless
properly stored, sealed and secured.
Some motorhome roofs can be fitted with a
roof rack (optional).
A maximum load of 50kgs can be evenly
distributed on the roof rack system.
This figure MUST NOT be exceeded.
Note: When loading the roof rack, make
sure the load is spread evenly and do not
allow sharp objects to come into contact
with the roof surface.
Note: Ensure items loaded on the roof rack
do not act as a sail (i.e. deck chairs).
! WARNING: Do not apply excessive load
to the rear suspension of your motorhome
or allow the vehicle to reverse with the roof
rack access ladder in the down position,
touching the ground. This may cause
excessive strain on the ladder fixing points.
The flat roof areas, up to the over cab section,
are capable of withstanding an average
person’s weight (13 stone or 82.5kg).
Note: Do not walk on the over cab section.
! WARNING: The roof may become
slippery in adverse conditions, wipe dry
before attempting to walk on roof section.
Extreme care should be taken to avoid
falling from the vehicle.
! WARNING: When walking on the roof,
deck type shoes should be worn – not
leather sole
• for the operation of an electrical generator.
Tyres
• in such a way that the load exceeds the
MTPLM and maximum axle loads.
If a wheel or tyre fitted to a wheel is changed
any replacement must be of the same type of
construction and size.
Care must be taken to ensure that exterior
doors are closed, locked and that all
possessions are properly stored and secured
before setting off on any journey.
22
Roof loading
The law requires that the tyres and pressures
must be suitable for the use to which they are
being put. The minimum tread depth must be
1.6mm throughout a continuous band
SEATBELTS
Please refer to base vehicle manufacturer’s
handbook (Fiat or AL-KO AMC conversion
handbook) for tyre pressure information.
This may also be displayed in the driver’s or
passenger's door aperture.
Motorhome Tyre Specifications
You should note that your Motorhome is fitted
with “Camper Tyres”. Camper tyres meet a
specific “CP” (Camping Pneu) standard for
tyres on Motorhomes. The Camper tyres on
a Motorhome (unlike a commercial van) are
designed to carry a significantly higher load
for the majority of their life and even when
stationery for greater periods of time unlike a
van which typically loads and unloads.
As a result Camper tyres have stiffened side
walls to withstand the increased payloads and
pressure on them, this extra reinforcement
also gives better vehicle stability on the rear
with the heavier rear axle loads typical on a
Motorhome. The tyres are also designed to
improve mileage (wear) and offer better grip
off road.
When replacing your tyres we only recommend
the fitment of CP or Camper Tyres.
Tyre Pressures
The motorhome tyre pressures noted in the
Technical book are the pressures stated by
Fiat for your vehicle calculated in a fully laden
condition. If you are not running fully laden,
reduced pressures could be used but please
seek clarification from the Tyre manufacture.
Dedicated travelling
passenger seating
Seat belts are fitted to all travelling seats.
Travelling seats are designated by the
manufacturer and vary according to the
layout you have purchased. Each seat is
homologated i.e. tested to all relevant safety
requirements. NEVER travel in or attempt to
install a seatbelt to a non-designated seat.
! WARNING: Side facing seats are
designed for habitational use only, not for
use when the vehicle is in motion.
Seat belts and legislation
Designated driver and passenger seats are
fitted with seat belts and MUST be worn.
Children, aged up to 3 years of age, must
wear an appropriate child restraint suitable for
their age and weight. Children from 3 years of
age and up to 135cm (4’5”) in height, or 12
years of age, whichever is reached first must
use a restraint suitable for their age.
P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D
comprising the centre three-quarters of the
breadth of the tread and around the
circumference of the tyre.
Children over 135cm (4’5”) in height or aged
12 or 13 years must wear a seat belt.
Note: It is the legal responsibility of the driver
To ensure children aged up to 14 years old are
suitably restrained. For passengers aged 14
and over, it is their responsibility (not the driver)
that a seat belt is worn.
Fig 1
Designated passenger seats within the
habitational compartment of your motorhome
are identified (fig. 1). Seat belts are fitted
for your safety and must be worn unless a
‘Certificate of Exemption from Compulsory
Seat Belt Wearing’ is held. This Certificate
must be produced if asked for by the Police –
seat belt offences can result in a fine.
Child seats
Choosing/Buying
Go to a reputable retailer such as Halford’s,
Mothercare, Toys R Us, John Lewis etc. Most
reputable retailers will have trained child seat
advisers on site and will offer a fitting service.
Ask the advisor to fit various seats to the
vehicle. Once a correctly fitting seat has been
installed, satisfy yourself on its suitability for
your child and the vehicle before buying as it is
23
PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D
DRIVING LICENCE
important to use a correctly fitting seat in your
motorhome.
! WARNING: The child seat you use in
This section refers to the seat belts located in
the habitation area of your motorhome.
your car may not be suitable for mounting
on a motorhome seat.
Fastening the seat belt:
Choose the right seat for your child’s height
and weight.
Releasing the seat belt:
Ensure it has an official approval mark (usually
the United Nations ‘E’ mark). The current UN
standards is Regulation 44.04
Never fit or use a second hand car seat. It
could have been damaged and may not meet
modern standards. The fitting instructions may
also be missing.
Positioning/ Fitting
Dependant upon the child seat type, the most
suitable position for the child seat to be fitted
may be the front passenger seat of the cab
(NOTE airbag advice below) or the window
seat of the forward facing rear seat, the isle
seat in the rear is NOT a recommended
position, advice should always be taken from
the retailer on the suitability and security of the
seat in the motorhome.
Insert tongue into buckle; a positive ‘click’
indicates correct assembly.
Press the red release button, the tongue will
be ejected from the buckle.
• The belt is designed for use by one person
and must not be put around a child seated
on a person’s lap.
• The belt is suitable for restraining most child
seats and boosters.
• The belt should at all times be adjusted and
used in accordance with the instructions. No
excessive slackness should be present.
• Once installed the diagonal should pass
across the centre of the shoulder and the
buckle should lie just on or below the hip.
• Avoid twisting the webbing during use.
Webbing must not be allowed to chafe
against sharp edges.
Read and follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions for fitting the seat.
• Do not make alterations or additions to
the belt.
All Swift Motor homes are fitted with inertia reel
seat belts, however, the child seat must be
tight in the adult seat. Push all your weight into
the child seat as you tighten the belt.
• Belts that have been cut, frayed, damaged or
stressed through impact should be replaced.
After impact the motorhome anchorage
points should also be checked.
Keep a copy of the child seat fitting instruction
in the motorhome for easy reference.
• To clean use warm soapy water only.
Any doubts, ask an advisor to show you how
to correctly install the seat.
Airbag
Never fit a rear-facing child restraint in a seat
with an active airbag in front of it.
Forward-facing child restraints should be positioned as far back from the airbag as possible.
Check the base vehicle handbook.
24
Three point seat belts
• Periodic inspection of the installation will
ensure reliability of the seat belt.
Driving licence
Licences issued to drivers who passed their
car driving test before 1st January 1997
include categories B+E and C1+E which gives
them entitlement to drive motor vehicles up to
7500kg MTPLM.
Drivers who passed their test on or after this
date have category B entitlement only, which
restricts the entitlement to motor vehicles
with up to 8 passenger seats and an MTPLM
of up to 3500kg with trailers up to 750kg
TOWING ADVICE
Drivers who passed their test on or after
the 1st January 1997 will need to take an
additional test(s) to gain the B+E and C1+E
entitlement.
A number of Swift Group motorhomes have
an MTPLM greater than 3500kg, therefore
you must check you have the correct driving
licence entitlement for the vehicle you drive.
Vehicle classifications
Motorhomes up to 3500kg MTPLM are P/LGV
(Private Light Goods Vehicles), motorhomes
with an MTPLM over 3500kg and up to
7500kg are P/HGV (Private Heavy Goods
Vehicles). These are used for vehicle excise
duty (road tax) classifications.
Advice on towing
The towing capability of each motorhome
differs depending on the specific chassis and
engine types, (see ‘Towing Capabilities’ in your
specification handbook).
This takes account of the maximum front and
rear axle loadings as well as the minimum
front axle loading in two conditions, MRO and
MTPLM condition.
Towing in these, and any other condition
requires sensible loading and distribution of
payloads to ensure the requirements of the
towing capability table are met.
When towing, the demands on both the
vehicle and driver increase. A trailer reduces
manoeuvrability, the ability to climb hills,
acceleration and braking capacity and makes
the vehicle handle and corner differently.
It will also increase the fuel consumption of
the vehicle.
Always brake in good time. Special care must
be taken when descending gradients. Change
down before going down a steep hill so the
engine can act as a brake. Ensure that the
towing vehicle tyre pressures are correct and
adjusted for full load conditions and that the
trailer tyre pressures are as recommended by
the trailer manufacturer. Regularly check the
operation of trailer brakes and lights.
For maximum stability, when loading the trailer
ensure that the loads are properly secured
during transit. Position loads so that most of
the weight is placed close to the floor and,
where possible, immediately above or close
to the axle(s). Where the load can be divided
between trailer and tow vehicle, loading
more weight into the vehicle will generally
improve the stability of the combination.
After loading the trailer, check that the nose
weight and axle loads are in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations,
also check the rear and front axle loads on
the motorhome. When calculating the laden
weight of the trailer, remember to include the
weight of the trailer PLUS THE LOAD.
P RE PA RING FOR T HE ROA D
MTPLM (4250kg combined) or larger trailers
providing the combination of the trailer and
towing vehicle does not exceed 3500kg and
the MTPLM of the trailer does not exceed the
unladen weight of the towing vehicle.
Note: Towing regulations vary from country
to country. It is very important to ensure
that national regulations governing towing
weights and speed limits are observed
(refer to the relevant national motoring
organisation for information). The stated
maximum permissible towing weights refer
to the vehicle’s design limitations and NOT
to any specific territorial restrictions.
Notes:
1. Do not exceed the motorhome gross vehicle
train weight.
2. Do not exceed the maximum front & rear
axle loads on the motorhome.
3. Ensure the motorhome front axle load is
never less than 40% or more than 70% of
the total weight.
4. Motorhomes with an MTPLM up to 3500kg
which have European Type approval can
only be fitted with a type approved towbar
complying to 94/20/EC or ECE R55.
5. The limit for towing an un-braked trailer
is 750kg (based on VIN plate not actual
weight), this applies to a towed car.
25
PRE PA RING FOR T HE R O A D
6. A car dolly with a car with a GVW over
750kg in place is considered as two trailers, these are legal for use for recovery
but under the Road Traffic Regulations Act
1984 the combination is limited to 40 mph
on motorways and dual carriageways and
20 mph elsewhere. A car dolly is not legal
for transportation (there is a very specific
difference between recovery and transportation. Recovery is defined as the removal of a
broken down vehicle to a place of safety).
7. The maximum permitted vehicle combination length is 18.75m, however any combination must ensure compliance with the
turning circle requirements of Construction
and Use regulations 1986 & 97/27/EC.
European Touring
Please note there are a number of
requirements placed on a driver when driving
on European roads. Carrying a warning
triangle, high visibility jacket, first aid kit
and spare bulb is now compulsory in many
EU states but some EU countries are now
introducing further regulations such as carrying
a breathalyser kit and not being able to use
satellite navigation systems with speed camera
warnings.
We would advise customers to check on the
many web-sites available to ensure you are
carrying the correct equipment when touring in
those EU countries.
26
EN ROUTE
Removal of spare wheel on ALKO conversion ...........................................................................28
Removal of FIAT spare wheel ...................................................................................................29
E N ROUT E
Cruise Control...........................................................................................................................28
Fix & go repair kit ...................................................................................................................... 30
27
E N ROUTE
CRUISE CONTROL / SPARE WHEEL
Cruise control
The driver of the vehicle should always remain
seated and in control of the vehicle when
cruise control has been engaged. Never leave
the driving seat for any reason when the
vehicle is underway.
Removal
a. Spare wheel in the stowed position
(Fig. 1).
b. Remove the securing pins (a) from the
supports (b) at each side of the spare wheel
carrier frame (c) (Fig. 2).
Removal of spare wheel on ALKO
conversion:
c. Lift the wheel carrier frame (c) slightly and
move the frame supports (b) forward and
clear of the carrier frame (Fig. 3).
! WARNING: Exercise care when lowering
d. Lower the carrier frame and wheel to the
ground (Fig. 4).
the wheel and frame due to its weight.
e. Remove the spare wheel.
Replacement
Replacement is a reversal of the removal
procedure. Ensure the securing pins (a) are
correctly located in the frame supports (b).
a
Fig.1
Fig.2
b
Fig.3
c
Fig. 4
28
SPARE WHEEL
E N ROUT E
Removal of Fiat spare wheel:
a.the ground should be flat and
adequately firm.
b. turn the engine off and engage
the handbrake.
c. engage first gear or reverse.
Removal
Fig. 3
a. w
heel restraining device screw (fig 1) – rear
right side of vehicle
b. u
se the extension and wrench provided to
operate the wheel restraining device screw
(fig 2).
c. w
hen the wheel is fully lowered (fig 3) and
the restraining device screw can turn no
more, use the wrench to pull the wheel out
(fig 4).
Fig. 4
d. loosen the knob and remove the support to
release the wheel (fig 5 & 6).
Fig. 5
Fig. 1
Fig. 6
Replacement
Fig. 2
Replacement is a reversal of the removal
procedure.
! WARNING: Exercise care when handling
the wheel due to its weight.
29
E N ROUTE
FIX & GO REPAIR KIT
Fix & Go Repair Kit (if fitted)
CAUTION: Before use please read the user
instructions supplied with your Fit & Go
repair kit.
The Fix & Go automatic quick tyre repair kit
is positioned at the front of the vehicle
passenger compartment and includes Fig. A:
Fig.A
• Bottle A containing sealer and fitted with:
– a transparent filler pipe B;
– a black pressure restoring pipe E;
– sticker C bearing the notice “max. 80
km/h”, to be placed in a position visible to
the driver (on the instrument panel) after
fixing the tyre;
• Instruction brochure (see fig. b), to be used
for prompt and correct use of the quick
tyre repair kit and then to be handed to the
personnel charged with handling the tyre
treated with the tyre repair kit;
• A compressor D complete with pressure
gauge and connectors; a pair of protective
gloves located in the side compartment of
the compressor;
• Adaptors for inflating different elements
CAUTION: Give the instruction booklet to
the tyre repair workshop personnel.
CAUTION: Punctures on the sides of the
tyre cannot be repaired. Do not use the
quick tyre repair kit if the damage is due to
running with flat tyre.
CAUTION: If the wheel rim has been
damaged (bent so as to cause air to leak),
the wheel cannot be repaired. Do not
remove the foreign body (screws or nails)
from the tyre.
30
CAUTION: Punctures caused by foreign
bodies can be repaired if the damage does
not exceed 4 mm on the tread and on the
shoulder of the tyre.
Important Information:
The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit is
effective at external temperatures of between
-20 °C and +50 °C. The sealant has an expiry
date.
CAUTION: The bottle contains ethylene
glycol. It contains latex that might cause
allergic reactions. It is harmful if swallowed.
It is irritant for the eyes. It may cause
sensitisation if inhaled or on contact.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
In the event of contact, wash immediately
with plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting
if swallowed. Rinse your mouth and drink
plenty of water. Call a doctor immediately.
Keep out of the reach of children.
The product must not be used by
asthmatics. Do not breathe in the vapours
during insertion and suction. Call a doctor
immediately if allergic reactions are noted.
Store the bottle in its proper compartment,
away from sources of heat. The sealant has
an expiry date. Replace the bottle.
Bottle Replacement Procedure
• Pull the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve
cap, take out the filler hose A fig. C and
tighten the ring nut B on the tyre valve;
• Insert the plug E Fig. C in the nearest 12V
power socket and start the engine.
Turn the selector D Fig. D anti-clockwise
to the repair position. Activate the kit by
pressing the on/off switch. Inflate the tyre
to the pressure specified in the "Inflation
pressure" paragraph, in the "Technical Data"
chapter;
For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to
check the pressure reading on the pressure
gauge F Fig. D with the compressor off and
without moving the centre selector.
To replace the bottle, proceed as follows:
E N ROUT E
Inflation Procedure
Fig. F
• press button A fig. F to release the part;
• fit the new bottle and press until it is
automatically engaged.
CAUTION: Punctures caused by foreign
bodies can be repaired if the damage does
not exceed 4 mm on the tread and on the
shoulder of the tyre.
Fig.B
CAUTION: Replace the bottle containing
the sealant after the expiry date. Dispose of
the bottle and the sealant properly.
Have the sealing fluid and the bottle
disposed of in compliance with national and
local regulations.
31
E N ROUTE
EN ROUTE
32
SAFETY AND SECURITY
Model - SI 601 Smoke Alarm Operation................................................................................... 34
Alarm test................................................................................................................................. 35
Fire extinguisher....................................................................................................................... 36
Escape paths .......................................................................................................................... 36
Children ................................................................................................................................... 36
Ventilation ................................................................................................................................ 37
Security.................................................................................................................................... 37
Swift Command Tracker by Sargent......................................................................................... 37
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Fire........................................................................................................................................... 34
CO Alarm ................................................................................................................................ 39
33
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
FIRE AND FIRE ALARM
Fire
Note: Your attention is drawn to the notice
affixed inside the wardrobe advising on fire
precaution, ventilation and what to do in
case of fire.
In case of fire
1. Get everyone out of the motorhome as
quickly as possible using whichever exit is
the quickest, including windows. Do not
stop to collect any personal items.
2. Raise the Alarm. Call the Fire Brigade.
3. Turn off the gas supply valve if it is safe to
do so.
4. Turn off the electricity supply at
supply point.
Model- SI 601 smoke alarm
operation
Normal condition
The red LED on the front should flash once
every 40 seconds to show the alarm is active.
Low Battery Condition
! WARNING: Your smoke alarm requires
a battery with a sufficient capacity of power
to operate correctly. This must also be
correctly installed.
Should your smoke alarm enter a low battery
condition, the unit will emit an audible ‘chirp’
once every 40 seconds. When this occurs you
must replace the battery immediately. Your
smoke alarm will continue to warn of this low
battery condition for at least 7 days, however,
failure to change the battery after this time
would mean your smoke alarm has insufficient
power to alert you in a real fire situation.
34
Battery replacement
! WARNING: Only the following batteries
can be used for replacement. Use of a
battery other than those recommended
below may have a detrimental effect on
the detector’s operation. Use of a lithium
(long-life) battery could provide power for 10
years under normal operating conditions,
meaning there is no need for an annual
battery change.
Note: The alarm cover can not be installed
without a battery fitted.
Note: Upon delivery the battery may be
fitted with a protective cover. Please ensure
this is removed before use.
Carbon-Zinc type:
Eveready Energizer 1222;
Gold Peak 16045 (UL).
Alkaline Type:
Energizer 522; Duracell MN 1604; Duracell 9V
Ultra; Energizer 9V Ultra+; Gold Peak 1604A.
Lithium (long life) type:
Ultralife U9VL
1. Remove the alarm from its mounting plate
by turning anti-clockwise
FIRE ALARM
3. Replace the alarm on its mounting plate,
lining up the large central vent on the front
of the alarm, with the ‘X’ that is moulded
into the plastic on the mounting plate
(if unsure see page 13 of the alarm user
manual). Ensure the unit is securely fitted.
Alarm test
1. Press the test button in the centre and
release.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
2. Remove the existing battery and replace
with a new battery from the list on this page,
making sure that the positive and negative
connections are in the correct position. If
unsure see the alarm user manual.
2. The unit will emit a loud (85dB at 3 meters)
alarm for around 5 seconds and stop
automatically.
3. The red LED on your alarm will flash rapidly
during the audible signal.
4. Test your alarm as explained in the next
section ‘Alarm Test’.
35
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
FIRE ALARM
Note: The test button accurately tests
the alarm’s smoke sensing circuit, there is
no need to test your alarm with smoke. If
your smoke alarm fails to give an audible
test signal, please refer immediately to the
troubleshooting guide at the end of the user
manual supplied.
! WARNING: Test your smoke alarm at
least once per week.
Your smoke alarm has been designed to be as
maintenance - free as possible and although
the unit requires only battery maintenance for
its entire life, there are several things you must
do to keep it working properly.
! WARNING: our smoke alarm is a sealed
electrical device and no attempt should be
made to open the case. Attempting to open
the case will invalidate your Warranty.
Cleaning
As a minimum your smoke alarm should be
cleaned once every 3 months using your
vacuum cleaner fitted with the soft brush
attachment.
! WARNING: The electronic test button
provides a full test of the unit’s functionality.
DO NOT try to test the alarm with a naked
flame, as this may present a potential fire
hazard.
! WARNING: Never use portable cooking
or heating equipment other than electric
heaters that are not of the direct radiant
type, as it is a fire and asphyxiation hazard.
! WARNING: Appliances such as cookers
must not be used for heating.
Fire Extinguisher
It is recommended that a dry powder fire
extinguisher be carried inside your motorhome
at all times.
When using a dry powder extinguisher it is
suggested that the motorhome be evacuated
until the powder has settled, to avoid
inhalation.
A fat pan fire should not have a fire
extinguisher aimed at it. It should be
smothered with a fire blanket.
! WARNING: Provide one dry powder
fire extinguisher of an approved type or
complying with EN3-7 or ISO 7165, of at
least 1kg capacity, by the main exterior door
and a fire blanket next to the cooker.
Familiarise yourself with the instructions
on your fire extinguisher and the local fire
precaution arrangements.
Escape paths
! WARNING: Your smoke alarm may
false alarm when it is being cleaned using a
vacuum cleaner.
! WARNING: Do not use solvents or
cleaners on your smoke alarm, as they may
cause damage to the sensor or circuitry. The
unit can be wiped with a slightly damp cloth.
36
It is important that you do not block escape
paths to emergency exits with obstructions
or hazards.
Children
Do not leave children alone in the motorhome
in any event. Keep potentially dangerous
items out of reach, as at home e.g. matches,
medicine etc.
VENTILAT ION / SECURITY /
SWIFT COMMAND TRACKER
All motorhomes comply with BS EN 721. The
ventilation points on your motorhome are fixed
points of ventilation which are required by the
European Standards.
All motorhomes have ventilation at high level
and low level which have been calculated to
suit the individual needs of your motorhome.
High level ventilation is achieved by means of
the roof lights and washroom roof ventilators
(where applicable). The low level ventilators are
positioned under sink units.
Under no circumstances must these vents be
blocked or obstructed in any manner as this
could lead to insufficient fresh air. In this case
the confined atmosphere becomes depleted of
oxygen which could lead to dangerous levels
of carbon dioxide (CO2) build up leading to the
risk of asphyxiation.
The risks of carbon monoxide (CO) build
up, which is a colourless, odourless and
tasteless gas, will also be reduced with
ventilation. Carbon monoxide is produced
from incomplete combustion and should the
CO detector be activated the cause of the
incomplete combustion must be investigated
prior to reusing the appliance in question.
It is advised that fixed ventilation points
are checked and cleaned (if necessary) on
a regular basis using a small brush and a
domestic vacuum cleaner.
Additional night time ventilation is obtained
by releasing the window catches and placing
them in the second groove. Note the windows
are not sealed from rain in this position.
As the ventilation levels are calculated to suit
each model requirements no modifications
should be made which may result in reduced
ventilation levels.
! WARNING: Do not obstruct ventilation.
Security
Motorhome theft:
The theft of a motorhome can occur in
the most unlikely circumstances; from a
motorway service area or even an owner's
driveway. Secure all windows and doors
when your motorhome is unoccupied even if
only for a short length of time.
VIN (Vehicle identification Number)
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Ventilation
Record your motorhome VIN which can be
found on the lower edge of the base vehicle
front windscreen and the plate located on the
front cross member under the bonnet.
Make a note of these numbers in the space
provided at the front of this handbook and
make a separate note of the numbers to keep
safe at home.
Additional security
Consider fitting any device which might deter
intrusion by thieves. Customers are advised
to identify their motorhome with a method
for subsequent identification if other forms of
identification have been altered or removed.
Free crime prevention advice about securing
your motorhome, protecting your valuables,
property marking either at home or whilst
on site, can be obtained from the Crime
Prevention Officer through your local Police
station.
Swift Command Tracker
by Sargent
A Swift Command Tracker is built in to your
vehicle and forms part of the Swift Command
system.
The unit is Thatcham Category 6 certified and
is monitored by an approved monitoring centre
which operates 24 hours a day 7 days a week
and provides European coverage and direct
police liaison.
This system is ready for use, all you need to
do is purchase a tracking subscription by
visiting www.swiftcommand.co.uk or calling
Sargent on 01482 881655.
The subscription cost is £95 per year
including VAT.
37
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
SWIFT COMMAND TRACKER
For more information please visit
www.swiftcommand.co.uk
Operation
The Swift Command Tracker is easy to
operate as it is controlled by the vehicle
systems.
In a caravan the tracker is armed when the
Stinger 310 / 350 Alarm System is armed. It is
disarmed when the alarm is disarmed.
If the caravan doesn’t have an alarm system
fitted, a simple numeric keypad is used to arm
/ disarm the tracker. Enter your code followed
by the ON button to arm the tracker.
Enter your code followed by the OFF button to
disarm the tracker.
In a motorhome the tracker is armed /
disarmed by the ignition key.
When the ignition is turned off the tracker is
armed. When the ignition is turned on the
tracker is disarmed.
Event of a Theft
If the vehicle is moved whilst the tracker is
armed the geo-fence monitoring will trigger a
theft event.
In addition to the above, in a caravan with the
Stinger 310 / 350 Alarm System fitted, if the
alarm is triggered by internal movement or
caravan tilting the alarm monitoring will also
trigger a theft event.
The monitoring station will now contact you
to confirm the theft or false alarm. You will be
required to confirm your identity against the
information you provided when you
subscribed.
If a genuine theft is confirmed the monitoring
station will liaise with the police and keep you
informed of progress.
Note; during a theft event to comply with
legislation you will not be able to manually
locate your vehicle using the Swift Command
locate feature.
38
Contact
Before contacting any of the following please
ensure you know your caravan or motorhome
serial number. For caravans this is the last 10
digits if the CRIS number (like SWG0123456).
For motorhomes this is the unique MH number
(like MH01234).
The Swift Command Tracker monitoring
station can be contacted on 0345 6027302.
The stations operates 24 yours a day 7 days
a week.
Sargent customer support can be contacted
on 01482 678981 or via [email protected]
swiftcommand.co.uk
Telephone lines are manned during normal
office hours.
Swift customer support can be contacted on
01482 875740 during normal office hours.
Precautions
The Swift Command Tracker monitors the
leisure battery supply and if the voltage falls
below a set level or the battery is removed this
will trigger a fault event.
If you plan to remove your battery for
maintenance or external charging please
contact the monitoring station BEFORE
removing the battery.
If you lose an alarm key fob you need to
contact Sargent for a replacement and follow
their instructions to remove the ‘lost’ fob from
the system.
If you lose an ignition key you will need to visit
a Fiat dealer for key replacement and removal
of the ‘lost’ key.
CO ALARM
Fireangel CO-9D Carbon Monoxide Alarm
! WARNING: Please read the full user
instructions provided.
Carbon monoxide
Known as the silent killer, Carbon Monoxide is
an invisible, odourless and tasteless gas.
What are the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning?
Early symptoms of carbon monoxide (CO)
poisoning can mimic many common ailments
and may easily be confused with flu or simple
tiredness. Symptoms to look out for include:
• tiredness
• drowsiness
• headaches
• giddiness
• nausea
• vomiting
• pains in the chest
• breathlessness
• stomach pains
• erratic behaviour
• visual problems
suffering the effects of carbon monoxide
poisoning (headache, nausea), and
advise that carbon monoxide poisoning is
suspected.
• Do not use the appliance again until it has
been checked by an expert. In the case of
gas appliances the engineer must be Gas
Safe registered.
Power Pack Activation
See diagram below
Your detector comes complete with an
integrated power pack that will provide power
for its entire operational life. To activate the
power pack you need to pull the disabling
tab (see image). This will in turn pull out the
metal disabling clip, which is attached to the
end of the tab, from the disabling socket
which is situated on the underside of the
detector. Retain the disabling tab for future
use by taping it to page 22 of the CO-9D user
manual.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
CO alarm
When the detector is activated the screen
will display all of the icons, then after a few
seconds will show the current CO level.
The power indicator LED below the
symbol will also flash green once every minute
to indicate that the detector is receiving power
from the power pack and is fully operational.
A
symbol will also flash briefly on the LCD
screen approximately once every minute.
Anyone with these symptoms should
immediately turn off all appliances and
seek medical attention.
What to do during an alarm
• Keep calm and open the doors and windows
to ventilate the caravan.
• Stop using all fuel burning appliances and
ensure, if possible, that they are turned off.
• Evacuate the caravan leaving the doors and
windows open.
• Do not re-enter the caravan until the alarm
has stopped. When exposed to fresh air it
can take up to 10 minutes for the sensor to
clear and the alarm to stop depending on the
level of carbon monoxide detected.
• Get medical help immediately for anyone
Test the sounder, power pack and circuitry by
pushing the centre of the Test/Mode button
briefly to confirm that the detector is operating properly. The sounder will sound as soon
as the button is pressed, and the Alarm LED
will illuminate red indicating that the sounder
is working and the power pack is providing
power to the unit. You'll notice that the display
will switch to temperature mode, this is explained later in the manual, press button again
to return to the CO display. This test for the
sounder, power pack and circuitry should be
39
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
CO ALARM
performed on a weekly basis. This should be
continued for the lifetime of the product.
! WARNING: Prolonged exposure to the
sounder in close proximity to your ears may
damage your hearing.
Under normal operating conditions, the power
pack will last for the lifetime of the product i.e 7
years. The detector will not protect against the
risk of carbon monoxide poisoning when the
power pack has drained.
! WARNING: Prolonged exposure to
extreme high or low temperatures may
reduce the life of the power pack.
Power Pack Deactivation
Your CO-9D is portable making it ideal for
taking with you on holiday. You will need to
deactivate your detector when travelling or
even when storing e.g when decorating.
Fitting is reverse of removal. To deactivate the
detector the two ends of the metal clip must
be inserted into the corresponding holes in the
disabling socket located on the underside of
the detector (see image). You can ensure that
the product is disabled by pressing the test
button- If there is no sound from the sounder
then the clip has been fitted correctly.
Note: If the disabling tab is no longer
available then the clip can be replicated by
opening out a thin metal paper clip into a
U-shape.
Operating Features
Standby Mode
The alarm can display two views when in
normal standby mode, the current level of CO
or the current room temperature in degrees
centigrade (ºC). When the alarm is showing the
current CO Level you will see something similar
to the following.
40
FireAngel's unique digital read out displays
the amount of CO that the sensor is detecting
shown in parts per million (PPM). It is designed
to indicate levels from 10PPM to 999PPM.
Note: Ambient background levels between
0PPM and 10PPM will show as 0PPM
When the alarm is showing the current
temperature you will see something similar to
the following.
In both modes you will notice a
symbol
appear briefly in the top left hand corner of the
screen once every minute. This is an additional
indication to show you that the alarm is operating as well as the flashing green LED.
To switch between CO and temperature view,
simply press the Test/Mode button briefly. The
unit will also sound when pressing the button
to switch between the two display modes.
You will also notice that when switching
between modes the display will change
slightly, this is because the alarm is displaying
the Peak Level CO reading that it has recorded
in the last 4 weeks, please see the following
peak level reading feature section for further
description.
Note: If the alarm is in temperature view and
detects CO it will automatically switch back
to CO display mode.
Power pack, sounder and circuitary test
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Pressing the Test/Mode button will also test
the power pack, sounder and circuitry of
the alarm. The unit will sound and the alarm
LED below
will illuminate red. You should
perform this test once per week.
Peak Level Reading feature.
The alarm will record the highest reading of
CO that it has detected in the last 4 weeks.
This information is useful if your alarm has
sounded so you can see the highest level of
CO detected during that time. It is also useful
to check periodically to see if a readable level
of CO has been detected for a short time, but
not long enough to trigger a full alarm. The
peak level reading is shown briefly every time
you press the Test/Mode button and will look
something like the image below.
Note: We suggest the use of an incense
stick or cigarette as the way in which
these products burn produces a readable
localised amount of CO. A readable level
of carbon monoxide will not be given off
by other sources of smoke, for example an
extinguished candle or match.
Step 1: If the alarm is wall mounted unhook it
from the fixing screws.
Note: It is possible and quite normal for the
peak level to remain at 0ppm, i.e. this simply
means that the alarm has not detected any
CO in the last 4 weeks.
The Peak Level reading will be reset to 0ppm
whenever a Sensor Test is carried out. (See
the next section for Sensor Test).
Sensor Testing
! CAUTION: Sensor testing should only
be performed by a responsible adult.
This test should only be performed once a
month. Excessive testing will shorten the life
of the power pack.
Step 2: Hold the Test/Mode button down
until the spanner icon appears in the
bottom left hand corner of the screen
and the bar graph ‘scans’ from left
to right. This indicates the alarm is in
sensor test mode where the sampling
rate of the sensor has increased and
the alarm can be tested using a known
source of CO.
Step 3: Light an incense stick or cigarette
using a match or lighter. Extinguish the
lighter, or put out the match and place
it into a dish of water.
Step 4: Hold the incense stick or burning
cigarette 15cm (6 inches) below the
detector, so that the smoke goes
into the holes at the bottom of the
detector. As the smoke gets into the
alarm the display will show the amount
of CO being detected. When the level
of CO in the sensor reaches 50ppm
the alarm will sound a single alarm
cycle, this confirms that the sensor is
working correctly and is the end of the
sensor test. The alarm will return to
normal standby mode.
41
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
CO ALARM
Step 5: P
ut out the incense stick or cigarette
by placing it into a dish of water.
Ensure that all flames have been
extinguished.
Note: If the level of CO in the sensor doesn’t
reach 50ppm then the Sensor Test mode
will time out and finish automatically after
3 minutes. Even if the level doesn’t reach
50ppm, as long as the display shows a
reading of CO then you can be confident
that the alarm is working correctly. If you
have any questions about testing the sensor
please contact the FireAngel technical
support team
Understanding the Product's
Indicators
Digital Display
The LCD screen has many icons with one or
more being shown at any one time.
Bar Graph to show early build up of CO.
To understand the role of the product
indicators please refer to section ‘Carbon
Monoxide and how it can affect your family’
on page 3 of the CO-9D User Manual. The
alarm has a bar graph which mimics the way
CO levels build up in the blood stream. The
response times of the alarm are determined by
the European Standard BS EN 50291:2001 so
the alarm will only sound when it has detected
CO for a prescribed length of time, the higher
the level of CO the quicker the alarm must
sound. However with FireAngel’s CO-9D
there is an early visual warning that CO is
present. When CO is first detected the alarm
indicates it’s presence by displaying the level
on the screen in parts per million (ppm). If CO
continues to be present additional bars will
42
appear on the graph. When the graph is full
(i.e. the 6th segment is shown the unit will
sound a loud audible alarm (85 dB at 1m
(3 feet)) and the Alarm LED below the
symbol on the front of the detector will flash
red once every second.
The Alarm will sound
• Between 60 and 90 minutes when exposed
to a minimum of 50ppm of CO.
• Between 10 and 40 minutes when exposed
to a minimum of 100ppm of CO.
• Within 3 minutes when exposed to a
minimum of 300ppm of CO.
Alarm silence
It is possible to temporarily silence the
alarm up to two times if the level of CO that
triggered the alarm is less than 200ppm. After
ventilating the property you can temporarily
silence the alarm by pressing the Test/Mode
button, the alarm will stop and the silence
mode symbol will appear on the screen. The
silence mode will last for up to 3 minutes. If the
CO level remains too high the alarm will trigger
again or if the level of CO rises above 200ppm
then the detector will automatically re-enter
alarm mode. If the level of CO has fallen to a
satisfactory level the silence mode icon will
disappear, the unit will exit alarm mode and
the segments of the bar graph will slowly
disappear as the CO in the sensor clears.
Alarm in absence:
If the Peak level reading symbol is
showing on the screen but there is no full
alarm sound and you are not pressing the
test button, then your detector is warning
that it has detected Carbon Monoxide in your
absence. Immediately vacate the premises and
seek medical attention for anyone suffering the
effects of CO poisoning (headache, nausea).
Error signal
The unit continuously checks the settings of its sensor and circuitry. If any of these
settings
are found to be incorrect, the detector will emit
a single chirp once per minute and the display
will show “Err” for error and an error code,cycling between “Err”and the particular
error code.
Low power pack signal
If the power pack becomes low then the detector will emit a single chirp once per minute
and the low power pack icon will flash on the
screen.
! IMPORTANT: A single chirp once per
minute together with an error signal 14 or
low power pack warning does NOT mean
that the detector has detected carbon
monoxide.
If you experience an error condition or low
power pack warning and the product is still
within warranty then contact FireAngel
technical support.
If the product is no longer in warranty replace
immediately!
! IMPORTANT: The selected power pack
was chosen to provide power beyond the
lifetime of the product, in particular the
sensor (under normal operating conditions).
The operational life of the sensor is seven
years, for this reason, the detector should
be replaced after seven years from the date
of installation.
FireAngel Technical Support Line
9.00am – 5.00pm, Monday – Friday
Telephone: 0800 141 2561
(1-800 523171 in EIRE)
Maintenance
Your detector will alert you to potentially
hazardous CO concentrations in your
motorhome when maintained properly. To
maintain your FireAngel detector in proper
working order, and to ensure that the sensor
will last for the lifetime of the product, it is
recommended that you:
• Test the sounder, power pack and circuitry
of your detector at least once per week by
pressing the Test/Reset button briefly (see
above).
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Treat this as a serious warning. Call a qualified
technician and have the problem investigated
and rectified immediately.
• Perform the Sensor Test once every month
(See p39).
• Keep the detector free of dust by gently
vacuuming the case with a soft brush
attachment once per month.
To prevent the possibility of contaminating the
sensor in your detector and thus affecting its
reliability:
• Never use cleaning solutions on your
detector. Simply wipe with a slightly damp
cloth.
• Do not paint the detector.
• Do not spray aerosols on or near the
detector.
• Do not use any solvent based products near
the detector.
• Move the detector to a safe location and
store in a plastic bag before painting, wall
papering, or performing any other activities
using substances that emit strong fumes.
Remember to remove it from the bag and
replace the detector when these activities are
finished.
Failure of any test should be reported to the
Fireangel Technical Support Team. Do not
attempt to repair your CO detector. Do not
remove any screws or open the main casing
of your detector. Any attempt to do so may
cause malfunction and will invalidate the
warranty.
e-mail: [email protected]
43
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
CO ALARM
What to do in the event of an
alarm
! WARNING: A loud alarm is a warning
that unusually high and potentially lethal
levels of carbon monoxide are present.
Never ignore this alarm, further exposure
can be fatal. Immediately check residents for
symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning,
and contact the proper authorities to resolve
all CO problems.
NEVER IGNORE ANY ALARM.
Please carefully review this owner’s manual to
ensure that you know what actions to take in
the event of an alarm.
What to do during an alarm
Within 3 minutes when exposed to a minimum
of 300ppm of CO.
• Keep calm and open the doors and windows
to ventilate the property.
• Stop using all fuel burning appliances and
ensure, if possible, that they are turned off
• Evacuate the motorhome leaving the doors
and windows open.
• Do not re-enter the motorhome until the
alarm has stopped. When exposed to
fresh air it can take up to 10 minutes for
the sensor to clear and the alarm to stop
depending on the level of carbon monoxide
detected.
• Get medical help immediately for anyone
suffering the effects of carbon monoxide
poisoning (headache, nausea), and
advise that carbon monoxide poisoning is
suspected.
• Do not use the appliance again until it has
been checked by an expert. In the case of
gas appliances the engineer must be gas
safe registered.
44
Note: If the level of CO in the sensor doesn’t
reach 50ppm then the Sensor Test mode
will time out and finish automatically after
3 minutes. Even if the level doesn’t reach
50ppm, as long as the display shows a
reading of CO then you can be confident
that the alarm is working correctly. If you
have any questions about testing the sensor
please contact the technical support team
Disposal
Waste electrical products should not
be disposed of with regular household
waste. Please recycle where facilities exist.
Check with your local authority, retailer or
manufacturer for recycling/disposal advice
as regional variations apply. The power pack
should be deactivated before disposal. To
do this, insert the two ends of the metal clip
on the end of the disabling tab back in to
the socket located on the underside of the
detector. If the disabling tab is no longer
available then the clip can be replicated by
opening out a thin metal paperclip into a
U-shape. You can also return your carbon
monoxide detector to Fireangel for disposal.
For return address contact Fireangel Technical
Support. Please include a note confirming the
product is being returned for disposal.
Technical Information
Detector Specifications: Model CO-9D
Sensor Type: Electrochemical
Sensor Life: 7 Years
Alarm Sound Level: 85dB at 1 metre (3 feet)
Power Pack Life: 7 years (Life of product)
Temperature Range: -10ºC (14ºF) to 40ºC
(104ºF)
Operating Humidity Range: 30 - 90% RH
Weight: 120 grams (4.23oz)
Certified to: BS EN 50291:2001
This FireAngel carbon monoxide detector is
designed to continuously monitor for CO. Its
response times meet the requirements of BSI
standard BS EN 50291:2001.
OPEN - DO NOT BURN
! WARNING: APPARATUS
CONFORMING TO THIS STANDARD
MAY NOT PROTECT PEOPLE WHO ARE AT
SPECIAL RISK FROM CARBON MONOXIDE
EXPOSURE BY REASON OF AGE,
PREGNANCY OR MEDICAL CONDITION.
IF IN DOUBT, CONSULT YOUR DOCTOR.
A CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR IS
NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR A SMOKE
ALARM OR A COMBUSTIBLE GAS
DETECTOR.
REPLACE UNIT AFTER 7 YEARS OF
OPERATION.
7 Year Warranty
FireAngel Ltd warrants to the original
purchaser that its enclosed carbon monoxide
alarm be free from defects in materials and
workmanship under normal residential use and
service for a period of 7 (seven) years from
the date of purchase. Provided it is returned
with postage paid and proof of purchase date,
FireAngel Ltd hereby warrants that during the 7
(seven) year period commencing from the date
of purchase FireAngel Ltd, at its discretion,
agrees to replace the unit free of charge. The
warranty on any replacement CO-9D alarm,
will last for the remainder of the period of
the original warranty in respect of the alarm
originally purchased – that is from the date
of original purchase and not from the date of
receipt of the replacement product. FireAngel
Ltd reserves the right to offer an alternative
product similar to that being replaced if the
original model is no longer available or in
stock. This warranty applies to the original
retail purchaser from the date of original retail
purchase and is not transferable. Proof of
purchase is required.
This warranty does not cover damage resulting
from accident, misuse, disassembly, abuse
or lack of reasonable care of the product, or
applications not in accordance with the user
manual. It does not cover events and conditions outside of FireAngel Ltd’s control, such
as Acts of God (fire, severe weather etc.). It
does not apply to retail stores, service centres
or any distributors or agents. FireAngel Ltd will
not recognise any changes to this warranty by
third parties.
FireAngel Ltd shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages caused by the
breach of any expressed or implied warranty.
Except to the extent prohibited by applicable
law, any implied warranty of merchantability
or fitness for a particular purpose is limited in
duration for 7 (seven) years.
This warranty does not affect your statutory
rights. Except for death or personal injury,
FireAngel Ltd shall not be liable for any loss of
use, damage, cost or expense relating to this
product or for any indirect, or consequentia
loss, damages or costs incurred by you or any
other user of this product.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
! WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
45
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
SAFETY AND SECURITY
46
ARRIVAL AT SITE
A RRIVA L AT S IT E
Positioning the motorhome.........................................................................................................48
47
A RRIVA L AT SITE
POSITIONING THE MOTORHOME
Positioning the motorhome
Note: Check and observe site regulations.
Keep to roadways unless otherwise directed.
Adhere to speed limits. Note that these are
generally 10mph.
(Remember that the stopping distance on
grass is considerably greater than on tarmac.)
Only a person in possession of a current
driving licence may drive on the site.
Selecting a pitch
Do not pitch in such a position that your
motorhome will obstruct others coming in.
Try to choose an area which is dry, reasonably
level and preferably with a hard base.
If you have no alternative but to pitch on a
slope try to ensure that you are facing down
the slope, for when you leave.
Levelling the motorhome
Levelling must be carried out in both directions
for the refrigerator and other equipment to
function correctly. Stepped levelling boards
(Fig. A) or proprietary ramps are ideal for this
purpose. Levelling pads or boards should be
used under the steadies where the ground is
soft or uneven.
Fig. A Stepped levelling board
48
Fig. A Winding the corner steady
Lower the rear corner steadies (if fitted) until
they are in firm contact with the ground (Fig.
A). DO NOT use the steadies as a jack, they
are only a means of stabilising the rear of the
motorhome. Levelling pads or boards should
be used under the steadies where the ground
is soft or uneven.
Awnings and Tents
Awnings and tents should only be used when
permission has been obtained. When on
grass and staying for more than a few days
the ground sheet and/or side flaps of awnings
should be periodically raised in order to avoid
damage to the ground.
SERVICES
Pressure switches................................................................................................................... 55
Pressure switch adjustment..................................................................................................... 55
SE RVICE S
Water System ......................................................................................................................... 50
Pressure switch troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 56
Water level sensor & cleaning.................................................................................................. 57
Water faults............................................................................................................................. 58
Gas schematic drawings......................................................................................................... 60
Gas ........................................................................................................................................ 61
Types of gas ........................................................................................................................... 62
En-route heating...................................................................................................................... 63
Gas safety advice ................................................................................................................... 64
Gas Fault Finding .................................................................................................................... 66
Electrical system ..................................................................................................................... 67
Overseas connection .............................................................................................................. 67
230V mains electrical equipment power consumption ............................................................ 68
Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet .......................................................... 69
Typical appliance consumption figures ................................................................................... 70
49
S E RVICE S
WATER SYSTEM
Water system - Introduction
All Swift Group motorhome water systems
have been designed around a pump fitted
within the motorhome. This pump draws water
from an under floor or internal water tank,
to provide water pressure within the water
system, whenever it is switched on and water
is available.
The schematic below shows the basic
configuration of the water system:
When power is supplied to the pump, it will
draw water from the water tank, and pump
it to the motorhome taps, shower and water
heater.
The pump is fitted with its own pressure
switch, and the pump will continue to pump
water, until the pressure of water on the output
of the pump reaches a pre-set level. For this
pressure to be achieved, the taps must be
closed.
When the taps are opened, water will leave
the tap via the spout, and the pressure in the
pipes between the pump and the taps will
reduce. Because of this reduction in pressure,
the pressure switch on the pump will switch
back on and the pump will again run to pump
more water.
Close to the pump, the water under pressure
is split into two paths:
50
1. Through blue water pipes routed directly to
the cold connection of each tap.
2. To the water heater.
Water from the pump enters the bottom of the
water heater. Once the water fills the water
heater (typically 10 litres), water then leaves the
water heater via a connection at the top of that
water heater. This water, which is still under
pressure, then routes to the hot connection of
each tap via the red pipes.
To winterise the system please see
separate details later in this handbook.
WATER SYSTEM
1. All fittings, including the holding tank, water
pipes, taps and connections are of food
quality material (to BS6920) and therefore,
should not affect the quality of the water
used. It is recommended however, that the
system is flushed through twice before it is
used for the first time, and always cleaned/
flushed after it has stood unused for a
period of time (eg over the winter period).
Care has been taken (using smooth bore
pipes etc) to eliminate as many water traps
as possible.
2. When filling the fresh water system
remember to check that the water source
is suitable for use as drinking water and, if
you are using a hose pipe or water carrier,
that it is also made from nontoxic materials
(preferably food quality material).
3. Depending on specification level, the fresh
water tank may be drained either by a
handle within a seat or other storage space,
or by using a furniture mounted switch to
open an electrically operated valve.
The handle operated valve can be seen in
the image 'Kon Tiki drain valve' below.
The furniture mounted switch will be printed
with a graphic similar to that shown in the
image 'Fresh tank drain valve switch', and
will normally be fitted to the furniture above
the entrance door.
For the handle operated valve, 90deg of
movement is required to alternate between
'open' and 'closed'. For the electrically
operated 12v power is switched on at the
control panel, and then press and hold
(for a few seconds) the top of the switch to
close the valve, or press and hold the bottom
of the switch to open the valve.
SE RVICE S
Fresh water system
Escape fresh water tank showing
central cleaning hatch
Kon-Tiki Drain valve
Fresh and Waste tank drain switch
51
S E RVICE S
WATER SYSTEM
! WARNING: The fresh water system is
pressurised by a pump which will continue
to operate until it senses a pre-set pressure
in the system.
If the fresh water tank is completely empty
the pump will be unable to pressurise the
system and will operate continuously. In this
situation it is essential that, in order to avoid
damage to the pump, it is switched off using
the pump isolator switch on the distribution
panel until such time as the water tank has
been filled.
Tank heaters
Depending on specification, your motorhome
may be fitted with 12v tank heaters, designed
to prevent or reduce instances of freezing
water in fitted water tanks.
If tank heaters are fitted, they can be turned
on via the control panel feature of the Swift
Command panel above the entrance door (see
page 72/73). Turn this feature on when the
external temperatures are low, and the tank
heaters will then turn on and off automatically.
Lockable water filler inlet
Fresh Water Tank
Your motorhome is fitted with a water tank
filled from the outside via a lockable water filler
cap. When filling, use a hose manufactured
from non toxic material, to prevent tainting of
the water. Remember, if the water heater has
been drained it will require 10 litre (0.2 gal) of
water to fill it.
External 12v Fill Socket
Depending on specification your motorhome
may be fitted with an external 12v socket
which can be used to attach an external 12v
tank filling pump.
52
Before heating each tank the system will check
that the water level in each tank is at the 1/4
level or higher (the heaters will not operate
if the tank is 'empty'). If the water level is
appropriate, the heaters will then switch on.
The fresh and waste water tank heaters can
operate independently, for instance use of
frost protect feature while the fresh tank
is full, but waste tank is empty, would only
result in the operation of the fresh tank heater.
Please note that the heating elements use
a 12V supply, and if used without a mains
hook up and charger operating, then leisure
battery power consumption will be increased
(see consumption table on page 68 for more
information.)
PRIMING & CLEANING WATER SYSTEM
Cleaning water system
1. Close the water tank drain valve or re-fit the
drain bung. (Model specific)
Clean the water system at the start and end of
the season with sterilising fluid.
2. Fill the water tank with water.
Sterilising
3. Close the water heater drain valve
(see boiler instructions in the fitted
equipment section)
When cleaning the water system at the start
or the end of the season it is advisable to use
a suitable sterilising fluid available from your
motorhome dealer. The fluid must be suitable
for use with stainless steel components
4. Open all the taps except the shower tap.
Mixer taps should be opened in the central
position so that both the hot and cold pipes
are purged of air. Ensure the tap spouts are
over the sinks.
5. Turn on the pump using the button on
the control panel (See pump button in
paragraph 2.5 of the Electrics section).
6. Turn each tap off in turn as and when the
air is expelled and the water runs smoothly
from each tap. Move the mixer taps to hot
and then cold to check that the air is out of
both the hot and cold pipes before turning
them off.
SE RVICE S
Priming the Water System
Flush the system thoroughly to remove the
effective fluid traces.
When water is first introduced, or the water
supply in the internal tank, runs out, air will
be present in the pipework. It is important
that every tap is run to remove any air in the
system before, for instance, the shower is
used. Air left in pipework local to a tap can
act as an accumulator and affect the ratio of
hot and cold water flowing from other taps or
shower mixers in the system.
7. Whilst holding the shower head down
towards the shower drain, open the shower
tap and shower head tap until all the air is
expelled and the water runs smoothly.
Turn the shower taps off.
8. Top up the fresh tank with water.
Please note that priming the system will
automatically fill the water heater with water.
Please ensure all taps are fully turned off when
not in use (except when winterising).
Note: All tanks are fitted with a breather
which acts as an overflow. Overfilling a tank
will result in water being expelled from the
overflow outside the vehicle.
53
S E RVICE S
CLEANING WATER SYSTEM
System care
Allowing water to freeze in the system may
result in damage to the pump and plumbing
system.
Non-Toxic antifreeze for potable water may be
used with Truma pumps. Follow manufacturers
recommendations.
Do not use automotive antifreeze to winterize
potable water systems.
These solutions are highly toxic and may
cause serious injury or death if ingested.
Sanitising
The water systems, and in particular storage
tanks, in motorhomes are susceptible to
contamination by bacteria if care is not taken
with their use and cleaning. The symptoms
caused by bacterial contamination are not
purely limited to gastro-intestinal diseases, but
may also manifest themselves as ear, nose,
throat, eye or skin infections. It is therefore
important that you carry out the following
procedure prior to using the motorhome each
time, even if you boil or filter all water you use
for drinking.
Separate Water Containers
1. All water remaining in the container
should be disposed of so that the container
is empty.
2. The outside of the container should be
thoroughly cleansed and washed down to
remove any dirt, dust or other contaminant.
Water at a suitably hot temperature
containing an appropriate detergent is
recommended for this purpose.
3. Water should be put in the container, swirled
around, then emptied out.
4. The container should then be totally filled
with water containing an appropriate
sterilant solution and allowed to stand for
the recommended contact time.
5. The solution should be emptied from
the container.
6. The opening of the container should be
cleaned thoroughly with an appropriate
prepared wipe impregnated with
a sterilant.
54
7. The container should be inverted whilst
stored overnight (if possible).
8. The container must be filled with mains
water only and mains water only should be
used for the above cleaning procedure.
9. On no account should garden hoses be
used to fill water tanks.
For Systems:
1. Drain down the system (open all taps to
allow air in, enabling the system to
drain quickly).
2. Remove any water filters fitted, and replace
with a short length of hose or empty
filter cartridge (this will ensure the filter is
not affected by the disinfectant/ sterilant
solution).
3. Fill the water system with a disinfectant/
sterilant solution (check that the solution at
full strength appears at all taps/showers).
Allow to stand for the recommended period
of time.
4. Drain the system completely.
5. Thoroughly clean the outside of all taps/
connectors with a cloth soaked in the
disinfectant/sterilant.
6. Flush the system through with clean drinking
water until no traces of disinfectant/sterilant
can be detected at any tap.
Suitable sterilising chemicals are available
from your motorhome dealer, accessory
shop, chemist or home-brew shops. It is not,
however, recommended to use bleach or
sodium metabisulphite.
Sterilising
Do not use products that contain aggressive
agents for sterlising the water system. Always
use products designed for stainless steel tanks
available from your motorhome dealer.
Note: Never use the water heating system
when disinfectant/sterilising fluid is present.
Doing so may damage the system.
PRESSURE SWITCH
Pressure switch adjustment
2. In order to eliminate unpleasant odours as
much as possible, only smooth bore pipes
are used.
• All of the Truma/Flo-Jet pumps used by Swift
are pre-set at 25psi - 31psi.
owever, should the waste water tank be
H
overfilled, it is possible the waste water will
backfill the drain pipes until it eventually
appears in the shower base. In order to
prevent this, please take note of part 3.
3. The waste water gauge shows levels of
the tank in quarter increments, and it is
recommended that the waste water tank
level is checked on a daily basis, emptying
the tank when required. The tank can be
drained by using either a handle within
a bed or storage space, or, by using a
furniture mounted switch.
Pressure Switch Adjustment, Truma/Flo-Jet
pump. (Normally Grey upper section with
White lower section/valve housing)
• To further adjust the pressure switch setting,
a cover cap must be first be removed from
the end of the pump to reveal a pressure
adjusting screw, as shown in the photos.
A maximum of 1/4 turn clockwise or
anti-clockwise, from the factory setting, is
advised. Turning the screw clockwise 1/4
turn will increase the pressure switch cut-out
pressure, turning the screw anti-clockwise
will reduce the pressure setting.
• Please note a second screw mounted
below the cover cap is set in position with
threadlock, this should not be disturbed.
The manual/handle operated drain valve will
take the same appearance as that shown for
the fresh water tank, on page 51. If a furniture
mounted switch is fitted, it will be printed
with a graphics similar to the image 'waste
drain valve switch, below, and will usually be
positioned on the furniture above the entrance
door.
Waste tank drain switch
See page 51 fresh tank details for further
information
Pressure switch
The purpose of a pressure switch is to monitor
the pressure on the outlet side of the pump.
When a tap is closed, and the pump continues
to run, there is an increase of pressure in the
system, and when that pressure reaches a
pre-set limit, the pressure switch will turn the
pump off.
SE RVICE S
Waste water system
1. The waste water holding tank is secured
underneath the chassis of your motorhome
and is gravity fed.
Cover cap
Pressure switch
adjusting screw
The pump may have to be removed to gain
access to the adjusting screw. Drain the water
system before removing the pump.
To remove the pump pull the blue taps at right
angles to the pipe work and lift the pump out.
55
S E RVICE S
PRESSURE SWITCH TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Pump will not start, when the tap
is opened:
• Check fuse(s).
• Check power source(s), and ensure there is
sufficient voltage to run the pump.
• Ensure 'pump' LED is illuminated.
• Check for leaks on the high pressure side of
the pump.
• Ensure water system has been primed
correctly, as per the handbook, and there are
no air-locks present.
• Using a multi-meter, ensure there is power
at the pump. If not, refer to your dealer as
there maybe damaged cabling or a fault with
the fusebox.
• Ensure the pump is securely mounted.
• Is the pump hot? If so, allow to cool
before retrying.
• The pressure switch may need adjusting.
(See pressure switch paragraph in this
section for how to do this)
• Has the vehicle been stored over winter?
was it correctly winterised? If no, the pump
may have frozen, causing permanent
damage.
• The pressure switch may need adjusting.
(See pressure switch paragraph in this
section for how to do this)
Pump runs, but will not pressurise system
(i.e. no or little water being discharged
from taps) - Not Pulsing:
• Ensure that there is water in the fresh
water tank.
• Check in-line filter is free from debris and
correctly fitted.
• Ensure water system has been primed
correctly, (see priming the water system
page 53), and there are no air-locks present.
• Ensure there are no restrictions in
the plumbing.
• Using a multi-meter, ensure there is power
at the pump. If not, refer to your dealer as
there maybe damaged cabling or a fault with
the fusebox.
• Ensure the inlet side of the pump is
watertight and not allowing air into
the system.
• Using a multimeter check that the voltage is
between 10 and 14.5 volts. If not, refer to
your dealer.
56
Pump continues to run (for more than 5
seconds) after taps are closed or pump
turns on for no reason:
• Ensure the piping on the high pressure side
of the pump is in good condition (not blowing
or deforming).
Noisy or rough operation
• Check for leaks on the high pressure and low
pressure side of the pump.
• Ensure that all pipes (especially those
within 150mm of the pump) are not touching
any furniture.
• Ensure the pump is securley mounted
Pump rapidly cycles (switches on or
off) or water pulses from taps, including
temperature pulsing:
• Check for leaks on the high pressure and low
pressure side of the pump.
• Ensure there are no restrictions in the
plumbing
• The pressure switch may need adjusting.
(See pressure switch paragraph in this
section for how to do this)
WATER LEVEL SENSOR & CLEANING
Principle
The sensor, fitted to Swift Group motorhomes
are pre-fitted to water tanks, and link to the
control unit, via a pre-fitted wiring harness.
The sensors, which consist of a number of
stainless steel rods or probes, at different
lengths, are immersed in the fresh or waste
water, and use the conductivity of water,
between the probes, to provide a reading to
the control unit.
SE RVICE S
Water level sensor & cleaning
The sensors are 'digital', in that while the
conductivity (resistance) value can vary, the
fusebox will register any conductivity between
the reference probe and the various different
length probes, indicating water present.
Normally, even if the rods are dirty, and
providing the rods have not bridged by a
foreign object, a circuit will still be delivered
back to the control unit and a water level
displayed.
Sensor cleaning
The first step, in case of fault diagnosis, is
to clean the sensor rods. False water level
readings at the control unit can be caused
by calcium build-up or foreign objects within
the tank bridging the probes. (Especially with
waste tanks).
To clean sensor:
! WARNING: Only use food safe plastic
mesh scourers, which are suitable for
domestic use, for cleaning the sensor studs.
1. Remove the sensor from the tank
2. Check the probes for build up of
contamination
3. Use clean soapy water
4. Place scourer in water to dampen
5. Apply scourer to the sensor probes with
limited pressure
6. Rub sensor probes removing contamination
7. Swill sensor probes with fresh clean water
8. Replace sensor into tank.
57
S E RVICE S
WATER FAULTS
Water
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Water not
flowing from
any tap when
operated but
pump runs
Freshwater tank empty
Check
Pump wired in reverse
Check wiring, refer to pump manufacturers
instructions
Pipe inlet or outlet pipe
disconnected
Check connections
Pump pipes restricted
by kinking
Check pipes run
Blockage in pump inlet or
outlet pipe
Check, starting inside freshwater tank
Blocked pump filter
Dismantle and clean filter. See pump
manufactures instructions.
Air leak in suction line
to pump
Check condition of pipe and pipe joints
between the water tank and the pump.
Frozen pipes
Pump does
not run
Water flows
from cold tap
but not from
hot
58
Pump incorrectly wired
Refer to pump manufacturers instructions
Pump fuse blown
Check wiring connection and then replace with
fuse of correct rating
Battery disconnected
Check connections
Pump seized or overheated
Refer to pump manufacturers servicing
instructions
Pressure pump sensing
switch may have failed
Refer to pump manufacturers servicing
instructions
Contacts may be faulty
Check contacts in plug and socket are clean
and making contact
Wiring connections may
be faulty
Check wiring connections
Blockage in hot pipeline
Disconnect pipes and inspect
Heater inlet or outlet pipes
kinked preventing flow
Check and re-route if necessary.
Hot tap failed or blocked
Disconnect and inspect
Heater non-return valve
jammed
Seek service attention
WATER FAULTS
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Water flows
from hot
tap but has
reduced flow
from cold
Cold water pipe kinked
preventing flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Blockage in cold pipe line
Disconnect pipes after 1st connector and
check up to tap
Cold tap not connected
Refer to installation instructions
Cold tap failed or blocked
Disconnect and inspect
Battery condition low
causing pump to
run slowly
Check battery state of charge,
refer to electrical supply note
If new taps have been fitted
they may be restricting flow
Disconnect and check that they have at least
1/4” (6.3mm) bore
Pump needs servicing
Refer to pump servicing instructions
Partially blocked pump filter
or in-line filter, if fitted
Dismantle and clean if necessary
Pump outlet pipe kinked
restricting flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Water leak
Check all water connections
Reduced flow
from either tap
Pipe kinking restricting flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Bore size difference in taps
Use taps of equal bore size
If pump motor
runs steadily
and will not
stop
Battery voltage may be
too low (below 10.5 volts)
Check that there is water in the container
Adjust switch and/or re-charge battery
Check all connections in pipework
Reduced flow
from both hot
and cold taps
SE RVICE S
Water
59
60
Gas Cylinder
BBQ (when fitted)
Typical gas schematic drawing with
Combi or Alde Boiler
Regulator
Alde or Truma
heating Appliance
Manifold
Fridge
Hob/Grill/Oven
Or
Hob and Grill
Oven / Hob
S E RVICE S
GAS SCHE MATIC
GAS
General information
Gas Cylinders
Bottled Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) is the
most convenient portable source of fuel for
your vehicle.
The gas cylinder, cooking and heating
appliances should be isolated when travelling
unless your motorhome is fitted with en-route
heating.
Regularly check flexible gas hose, joints and
connections for tightness. Finally make sure
that each gas appliance is working efficiently
to the recommendations of the appliance
manufacturers.
The LPG system should be inspected annually
by a competent person.
Only use gas cylinders that are located within
their dedicated position within the gas bottle
housing, never extend the hose - hose lengths
must not exceed 400mm.
Your vehicle is supplied with a wall mounted
gas regulator plumbed inside the gas bottle
compartment. The regulator and all appliances
work at a harmonised 30mb pressure, which
work with Butane and Propane gas.
Pressure regulation system in this vehicle has
a fixed working pressure of 30 mbar with a
flow rate of 1.5 kg/H and complies with the
requirements of EN 12864 annex D.
We do not recommend the use of an inline
LPG BBQ with the 1.5kg/H regulator when
other LPG appliances are in use.
time. If you are in any doubt please consult
your dealer for advice. To use point proceed
as follows:
1. Fit male tail connector from despatch kit
to your barbeque or appliance ensuring a
gas tight joint. The work should be carried
out by a competent person; if in any doubt
consult your dealer.
SE RVICE S
Gas
2. Open box lid by pulling tab on bottom edge
and lifting, while pressing on centre of flap.
3. Insert tail connector on appliance into
female coupling, twist to engage and lock.
4. Open gas locker on motorhome, ensure gas
bottle tap is open and supply is connected
to regulator.
5. Light and operate appliance to its
instructions.
Please note that you cannot open the gas
supply until the nozzle has been inserted. In
the interest of safety all external hose lengths
should be kept to a minimum and attachments
secured correctly.
! WARNING: Care should be taken when
using the external barbeque point. Never
barbeque next to an awning or tent.
! WARNING: The motorhome barbeque
point should only be used as an outlet point
for gas, never connect a gas bottle direct to
the outlet.
! WARNING: Unless en-route heating is in
use the LPG cylinder valve should be closed
when driving.
Motorhomes with external barbeque point
Models equipped with an external barbeque
point can be used to power any gas appliance
suitable for the gas used in the motorhome,
at the working pressure shown on the label in
the barbeque outlet box. Please note when
using the outlet that the fitted regulator will
allow a maximum of 1.5kg per hour of gas to
be taken from the gas bottle. Therefore the
consumption of gas from both the appliances
within the motorhome and the appliance
connected to the barbeque point cannot
exceed a total of 1.5kg per hour at any one
Gas Hoses
High-pressure hoses or pigtails as they
are called must be used with the new style
regulator.
High-pressure hoses incorporate a safety shut
off valve for the use of the en-route heating
system.
LPG cylinder i.e. Propane, Butane, BP and
Camping Gaz cylinders all have unique bottle
adaptor connections.
61
S E RVICE S
GAS
It is important to check you have the correct
hose and adaptor to suit your gas cylinders.
Push on hoses are no longer permitted under
the latest regulations.
The new high-pressure hoses have threaded
connections and must be securely attached to
the regulator and to the gas cylinder.
The hose connection to the pressure regulator
relies upon a sealing washer(s) to maintain a
gas tight joint, and it is essential to check that
the washer is present, sound and correctly
positioned prior to making the connection.
The gas cylinder connection relies on a metal
seating or bull nose connection to obtain a
gas tight joint, therefore it is essential that the
mating surfaces are clean and undamaged.
In no case should a damaged valve or
connection be used.
Ensure that there is a constant rise in the
flexible gas hose between the gas cylinder
outlet and the regulator elbow.
! WARNING: Inspect flexible gas hose(s)
regularly for deterioration and renew as
necessary with the approved type, in any
case no later than 5 years after the date of
manufacture marked on the hose.
When replacing the en-route hose ensure
the new hose incorporates a safety shut off
valve (Hose rupture protection).
! WARNING: Ensure that the high
pressure hose is not excessively twisted or
under stress when connected to the LPG
cylinders and regulator.
! WARNING: Always ensure the gas
supply is isolated at the LPG cylinder (and
not at the regulator) whilst the vehicle is in
storage for any period. It is important to
ensure that the high pressure gas hose has
a continuous rise from the bottle cylinder to
the regulation to allow any condensate to fall
back into the gas bottle cylinder.
Cylinder compartment
62
All cylinder compartments have four plastic
mouldings per cylinder position fitted to the
floor of the compartment that are designed to
fit both steel and BP Gas Light cylinders. Two
straps are provided for retaining the bodies of
the cylinders at mid to high level.
Types of gas
Propane
Propane is supplied in red, or partly red
cylinders which have a female left hand
threaded connector.
Scandinavian countries use the same
connector.
Germany and Austria supply propane with a
male connection.
Propane will work at temperatures as low as
-40°C and is therefore suitable for all winter
motorhoming.
Note: Swift recommend that 6kg CalorLite
propane cylinders are used. However the
cylinder compartments can also house
various cylinders dependant on model.
Escape 1 x 6kg +1 x 13kg
Rio 2 x 6kg
Bessacarr/Bolero/ Kon Tiki 2 x 13kg
Bessacarr 424 - 2 x 6kg
Butane
Butane is supplied in the U.K. in green or
blue cylinders.
All these have a male left hand thread
EXCEPT for Camping Gaz which has a special
female right hand thread and Calor 7kg and
15kg and aluminium bottles which have a
special clip-on connection.
Continental cylinders usually have a male left
hand thread similar to but not identical with
U.K. butane.
Butane is only suitable for use at temperatures
down to 2°C but will not work below that.
Note: A hose suitable for use with propane
has been supplied with your motorhome.
For en-route systems only.
EN-ROUTE HEATING
• Press the hose-break safety device
Swift Group motorhomes are equipped with
an LPG en-route heating system. The en-route
heating system is installed with additional
safety features.
Check the hose connection to the cylinder
valve for leaks.
! WARNING: When re-fuelling your
motorhome, switch off the heater and close
the cylinder valve.
Safety features
• MonoControl CS regulator incorporating a
crash sensor which stops the gas flow in the
event of the motorhome being involved in a
traffic collision.
• Gas flow monitor
• Hose rupture protection is installed.
The full system is Homologated in compliance
with UN ECE regulation 122
Operating instructions
Priming the gas system
• Open the cylinder’s valve. (1)
• Firmly press the hose rupture protection
(green button) on the high pressure hose. (2)
If necessary (e.g. if the regulator has been
knocked when replacing a LPG cylinder) press
the green reset button on the regulator. (3)
SE RVICE S
En-route heating
! WARNING: To ensure the safe working
of the en-route heating any replacement
high pressure hoses must be of the same
type as originally fitted. They must have the
safety valve to ensure that the gas does not
leak out in the event of damage to the gas
pipe work in the event of a traffic collision.
! WARNING: When travelling using the
en-route system all other LPG appliance
shut off valves must be in the closed
position including the fridge, cooker, water
heater etc.
Note: It is dangerous and illegal to operate
other LPG appliances whilst travelling
Note: Service and repairs must only be
carried out by a competent service engineer.
! WARNING: When leaving the
motorhome for any period of time or storage
always turn off the gas at the gas cylinder.
• Start the gas-burning devices if desired.
Note: The regulator should be replaced no
more than ten years after manufacture.
Changing a gas cylinder
Please use the correct size spanner for the gas
hose connectors as this will prevent damage
to the screw fittings and ensure that the fitting
is tightened sufficiently.
• Turn off all gas appliances
• Close the empty gas cylinder’s valve
• Remove the high pressure hose from the
gas cylinder.
• Attach the high pressure hose to the full gas
cylinder.
• Open the full cylinder’s valve.
63
S E RVICE S
GAS SAFETY ADVICE
Gas safety advice
! WARNING: If you smell gas or suspect
a leak or in the event of a fire and if it is
safe to do so, isolate the gas appliances
and turn off the gas bottles at the regulator.
Evacuate the motorhome and ventilate.
Seek professional advice as to the cause of
the leak.
Facts about LPG
• LPG is not poisonous.
• Bi-products are harmless.
• There is danger if all air and oxygen
were excluded.
• (Ventilation holes must be kept clear at
all times).
• LPG has been given a smell by the
manufacturers in order to identify leaks.
Awning Spaces LPG Appliance Exhaust
There is no danger of pollution of an enclosed
awning space by the LPG exhaust from a
refrigerator venting into it, as awning spaces
are generally well ventilated.
Space heaters may produce sufficient exhaust
to pollute the awning space, if it is totally
enclosed, from a general comfort, smell and
hygiene point of view. In the extreme case
there could be a build up of carbon dioxide to
a dangerous level.
Motorhome owners are advised to allow some
fresh air circulation in the awning space when
such appliances are in use.
General Safety Notes
In the event of leaks in the gas system or if
there is a smell of gas:
• Extinguish all naked flames.
• Do not smoke.
• Switch off the appliance and gas cylinder.
• Open the windows.
• Do not operate any electrical switches.
• Have the entire system checked by
an expert.
64
Precautions
a. Never look for a leak with a match.
Always use a soap solution or its equivalent
when testing connections. Do not operate
any electrical apparatus whatsoever,
especially light switches. If the leak is
not obvious, the motorhome should
be evacuated and qualified personnel
consulted.
b. Avoid naked lights when connecting or
changing a cylinder.
c. Check the flexible hose frequently.
d. The gas is heavier than air and therefore
sinks to the lowest point.
e. Keep bottle gas containers outside (and
protected against frost). If they must be
kept inside make sure they are well away
from heat.
! WARNING: Do not use appliances with
a different working pressure to 30mbar.
! WARNING: Maintain adequate
spacing of combustible materials from
sources of heat.
! WARNING: Do not use independent
portable gas appliances inside the vehicle.
Cookers shall not be used as heaters.
! WARNING: A BBQ point inlet valve, if
fitted, must only be used for the connection
of portable LPG appliances.
Always read individual appliance
instructions
! WARNING: If in doubt, ask!
GAS SAFETY ADVICE
Thermal insulation heating
Ensure that the gas regulator hose is correctly
connected to the gas cylinder in gas bottle
compartment and that the hose connection
is tight.
Your motorhome has been designed to
achieve a thermal insulation and heating level
for specific climatic conditions when tested
according to the procedure in EN1646-1.
See the motorhome technical book for
the classification of your motorhome.
Gas cylinders must be fully located, seated at
the base of the bottles and restrained by the
straps provided in the dedicated compartment
position. Straps are positioned to suit 6kg, 7kg
and 13kg bottles.
! WARNING: If using cylinders other
All Swift Group motorhomes achieve a
Grade 3 classification.
The classifications are as follows:
Grade 1
than those recommended, the user must
ensure these are adequately supported,
ventilation openings must not be obstructed
and the cylinders must not cause damage
to other fixtures and fittings located in the
compartment.
Open ended gas hoses must always be protected from dirt and insects.
Before turning on the gas supply at the regulator, ensure that all gas operated equipment in
the motorhome is turned off.
All gas equipment is supplied through a Gas
Manifold System which has individual isolation
taps for each appliance (Fig A), as follows:
ON
Fig. A
SE RVICE S
Connection
A motorhome with an average thermal
transmittance (u) that does not exceed
1.7w/(m2k).
Grade 2
A motorhome with an average thermal
transmittance (u) that does not exceed
1.7w/(m2k) and which can achieve an average
temperature difference of at least 20°C
between inside and outside temperatures
when the outside temperature is 0°C.
Grade 3
A motorhome with an average thermal
transmittance (u) that does not exceed
1.2w/(m2k) and which can achieve an average
temperature difference of at least 35°C
between inside and outside temperatures
when the outside temperature is -15°C.
OFF
RED - W
ater Heater /
Combination boiler
BLUE - Fridge
GREEN - Oven
Flue installations
All flue installations should be inspected
once a year throughout their length for
corrosion. Flues should be replaced if any
sign of perforation is found. Ensure that the
replacement is of an approved type.
65
S E RVICE S
GAS FAULTS
Gas
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Hob does
not light
No gas
Check level of gas in cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to hob manufacturers instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to oven manufacturers instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Over gassed
Air in pipe
Turn off appliance, wait 2 minutes and try again
Purge system
No gas
Check level of gas in cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to fridge manufacturers instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to water heater manufacturers
instructions
Oven does
not light
BBQ
Fridge does
not light
Combination
Heater does
not light
66
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
On departure from the campsite
General Information
• Switch off supply from the site, disconnect
the cable at both ends.
It is strongly advised that the mains installation
is inspected periodically to ensure safe
use. The IET (BS7671) wiring regulations
recommend that mains installations in
motorhomes are re-inspected every 3 years
or annually if the van is used frequently. The
National Caravan Council lists the qualifications
necessary to perform this inspection, but an
NICEIC approved contractor is probably the
first choice.
On arrival at the campsite
• Switch off RCD.
Note: Never use a mains supply lead whilst
coiled. Always uncoil the full length before
connecting to the supply and remember to
protect the cable from traffic.
! WARNING: Current consumption in the
motorhome must not exceed 16 amps or
the pitch permitted maximum if this is less
than 16 amps.
• Check the suitability of the supply,
is it AC or DC, is the voltage and frequency
correct.
Overseas connection
• Ensure that there is a proper earth
(3 pin socket outlet).
• Connection to a mains voltage overseas
requires particular attention.
• If in doubt consult site staff.
• Overseas supplies can be of
reverse polarity.
• Make sure that the supply from the site is
switched off.
• Make sure that the charger switch on the
PSU is switched off.
• Lift the cover on the electricity inlet on the
motorhome, and insert the connector on the
flexible supply cable.
• At the site supply point, connect the other
end of the supply cable to this using the
socket provided.
• Switch on the main switch at the site
supply point.
Note: It is good practice to test the RCD
(Residual Current Device) in the PSU before
switching on. There is a test button on the
RCD to test the lever, put the lever in the up
position (on) before testing.
SE RVICE S
The electrical system
• Reverse polarity results in equipment not
necessarily being isolated when turned off,
reverse polarity indicator on the PSU will light
in the event of reverse polarity.
• The only sure way to make equipment safe is
to unplug it.
• It is useful to have a means of checking
polarity when overseas.
• If it can be achieved then connect live to live,
and neutral to neutral to achieve full electrical
protection.
! WARNING: Never allow modifications
of electrical or LPG systems and appliances
except by qualified persons.
Note: As with the RCD it is good practice
to check the Miniture Circuit Breaker (MCB)
in the PSU. Switch all to the on position
(lever up). If any do not stay up then there
is a fault.
67
S E RVICE S
230V ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
230V mains electrical equipment
power consumption
Please note: It is possible that the 230v
mains electrical equipment may not all operate
simultaneously. A typical UK site mains hook
up point provides a maximum output of 10
amps and on some continental sites the
available output may be as low as 5 amps. If
your loading exceeds the site supply it may
trip the site circuit breaker. Please check the
available mains supply with your site operator.
Similarly loadings on each circuit breaker within
the motorhome should be observed. A label
positioned close to the MCB’s (Miniture Circuit
Breakers will identify which appliances within
the motorhome are fed from which MCB.
Consulting the typical appliance consumption
figures table in conjunction with this label, will
give an indication of which appliances can,
and cannot, (site supply allowing), be operated
simultaneously.
68
EARTH GREEN & YELLOW
EARTH
BROWN
LIVE
EARTH
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
SOCKET TUBES
LIVE
EARTH
LIVE
BLUE
NEUTRAL
EARTH
YELLOW & GREEN
BROWN
LIVE
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
MOTORHOME MAINS INLET
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
PINS
FLEXIBLE 3 CORE CABLE 2.5mm2
SE RVICE S
The legal length of the mains inlet cable is 25 ± 2 metres. When in use it must be fully uncoiled and protected from traffic.
EARTH
GREEN &YELLOW
BLUE
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
EARTH
YELLOW & GREEN
BLUE
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
BROWN
LIVE
CABLE COUPLER
NEUTRAL BLACK
NEUTRAL
LIVE RED
FIXED WIRING
EARTH
NEUTRAL
EARTH GREEN & YELLOW
LIVE
LIVE
VIEW OF
PINS
NEUTRAL BLUE
RED
LIVE
VIEW OF
SOCKET TUBES
LIVE BROWN
FLEXIBLE WIRING
EARTH
GREEN &YELLOW
BLACK
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
PITCH SUPPLY
OUTLET
Wiring of connecting cable and motorhome mains inlet
CONNECTING CABLE WIRING
69
70
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not applicable
12v LED lights
(each, depending on size of light)
Water tank frost element (Winter pack)
Powered bed mechanism
2W - 86W
Max 240W
Max 20 amp
2.5 amp
0.05 amp - 0.5 amp
Max 10 amp
0.2 amp - 7.2 amp
Not Applicable
(cooling fan) 1.2 amp
(cooling fan) 1.2 amp
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
0.4w - 6.1W
Max 120W
1.0 amp
1.1 amp (avg)
1.1 amp (avg)
Not Applicable
(cooling fan) 14.4W
30 W
Amperes
Only when driving
(cooling fan) 14.4W
12 W
13 W
13 W
12V
Watts
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
125 g/h/146 g/h
117 g/h
Not Applicable
70-161 g/h
Not Applicable
245-460 g/h
480 g/h
320 g/h
16 g/h
LP GAS
Grams/hour
item or appliance is operating - ie. a light is illuminated, or a heating system is providing space heating or water heating. Appliances which feature LCD
or illuminated control panels can have a low current consumption when in stand by mode, or have a constant low current draw in the background to run
their displays and electronics systems - these figures are typically 0.4 amps or less, for each applicable item. These electronic items can in most cases be
switched off individually, or, use of the System Shutdown button on the power supply unit isolates all of these items.
Note: These are approximate figures for guidance only, and are subject to changes in specification. The figures show energy consumption when an
Not Applicable
Powered skylight
3.0 amp
Omnivent
690W
Not Applicable
Battery Charger
Oven
3.5/3.7 amp
Not Applicable
800/850 W
Grill
Cooker - Electric Hotplate
5.5 amp
4.6/9.1/13.7 amp
3.9/7.8 amp
3.9/7.8 amp
0.8 amp
Amperes
Not Applicable
1270 W
Microwave (factory fit)
Cooker - Hob burners
1050/2100/3150 W
900/1800 W
230V
Alde Heating System
900/1800 W
Truma Combi 6kW Heating system
190 W
Watts
Truma Combi 4kW Heating system
Dometic Refrigerator
Appliances
Typical appliance consumption figures
S E RVICE S
TYPICAL APPLIANCE CONSUMPTION
ELECTRICS
Control Panel System Operation.............................................................................................. 74
Swift Command technical information ..................................................................................... 77
Swift Command Alde heating controls .................................................................................... 83
E L E CT RICS
Swift Command power control system.................................................................................... 72
Swift Command Truma Combi CP+ controls .......................................................................... 84
Swift Command system warnings ........................................................................................... 86
Swift Command remote access .............................................................................................. 89
Motorhome Battery ................................................................................................................ 92
Solar panel connection point .................................................................................................. 94
Accessory Harnessing ............................................................................................................ 95
Generator usage ..................................................................................................................... 96
Habitation relay........................................................................................................................ 96
Fault finding............................................................................................................................. 97
Cab Radio - timer setting......................................................................................................... 100
71
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
Fig 1
1. Introduction
2. Using the System
This section of the handbook will guide you
through the operation of the electrical system.
2.1 Power Supply Unit - Component
Layout (see image above)
The PSU is located in the bed box or is
mounted into furniture.
Further technical details are contained in
section 3 or in the supporting technical manual
available from www.sargentltd.co.uk
For the safe operation of all electrical
equipment within your Leisure Vehicle it is
important that you read and fully understand
these instructions. If you are unsure of any
point please contact your dealer / distributor
for advice before use.
The system has a number of key components
that you will need to be familiar with before
attempting to use the system, these are:
• The EC601 & EC651 Power Supply Unit
(PSU) - a combined mains consumer unit
and 12V controller located in the bed box or
upper locker. (Fig 1)
• The EC620 Control Panel (CP) - a remotely
located user control panel used to turn
circuits on and off and to display battery,
water tank and other system information.
This panel uses simple straightforward
controls and reliable data communication to
the PSU. (Fig 2)
• The PX300 Intelligent Battery charger 300W
72
2.2 Activating the System
The EC600 system has a shutdown feature
that can be used when the vehicle is in
storage. This allows the leisure electronics
to be turned off when not required to save
battery power. When in the off state the alarm
and tracking system supplies are still active, all
other supplies are turned off.
Before using the system please ensure the
system shutdown switch is in the on position
(button in).
2.3 Connecting to the Mains 230V supply
and Safety checks
For your safety it is IMPORTANT that you
follow these connections instructions each
time your Leisure Vehicle is connected to a
mains supply. This section assumes that the
system is complete and that a Leisure battery
has been installed (see 3.4).
A) Ensure suitability of the Mains Supply.
Your Leisure Vehicle should only be
connected to an approved supply that meets
the requirements of BS7671 or relevant
H) Check operation of equipment.
It is now safe to operate the 12V and 230V
equipment.
E L E CT RICS
harmonised standards. In most cases the
site warden will hold information regarding
suitability of supply. If using a generator you
also need to comply with the requirements /
instructions supplied with the generator.
Please note that some electronic generators
may not be compatible with your leisure
system. Further generator operational
information is contained elsewhere in this
manual.
B) Switch the PSU internal Power
Converter OFF.
Locate the green ‘Charger’ power switch on
the PSU and ensure the switch is in the off
position (button out) before connection to the
mains supply.
C) Connect the Hook-up Lead.
Firstly connect the supplied hook-up lead
(orange cable with blue connectors) to the
Leisure Vehicle and then connect to the mains
supply.
D) Check Residual Current Device
operation.
Locate the RCD within the PSU and ensure
the RCD is switched on (lever in up position).
Press the ‘Test’ button and confirm that the
RCD turns off (lever in down position). Switch
the RCD back to the on position (lever in up
position). If the test button failed to operate the
RCD see section 3.18.
E) Check Miniature Circuit Breakers
Locate the MCB’s within the PSU (adjacent to
the RCD) and ensure they are all in the on (up)
position. If any MCB’s fail to ‘latch’ in the on
position see section 3.18.
F) Turn the PSU ON.
Locate the black ‘Shutdown’ button and
ensure it is in the on position (press button in).
Locate the green ‘Charger’ switch on the PSU
and turn to the on position (press button in).
The charger switch will illuminate when turned
on.
G) Check correct Polarity.
Locate the ‘Reverse polarity’ indicator on the
PSU and ensure that the indicator is NOT
illuminated. If the indicator is illuminated see
section 3.18.
73
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
2.4 Control Panel - Component Layout
(see image below)
Your control panel will have an appearance as
below, but depending on your type of vehicle
the control panel features will vary. Not all
features are present in all vehicles.
Fig 2
2.5 Control Panel Operation
Power Button. Press the power button to turn the leisure power on. Press
the button again to turn the power off. The adjacent LED will illuminate
when the power is on, the screen backlight will turn on and system
information will be shown on the LCD display. To avoid night time nuisance
the LED and backlight will be turned off after a preset time, see note below.
Menu Navigation Up Button. Use the menu up and down buttons to
scroll through the various functions. The menu operates on a continuous
loop arrangement so you can go up or down to reach all menu items. It is
recommended to start in the down direction.
Menu Navigation Select Button. Use the select button make a selection
or to change a value or setting. This button is also used to select the
display or toggle the display information on many menu items.
Menu Navigation Down Button. Use the menu up and down buttons to
scroll through the various functions. The menu operates on a continuous
loop arrangement so you can go up or down to reach all menu items. It is
recommended to start in the down direction.
74
E L E CT RICS
• Leisure battery, the leisure battery voltage and charging or discharging
current is displayed. Use the select button to toggle the display, with
voltage on the main display whilst current (in or out of the battery is
shown on the bargraph and vice-versa, current on the main display and
voltage on the bargraph.
• Vehicle battery, when connected the vehicle battery voltage and
charging or discharging current is displayed. Use the select button to
toggle the display, with voltage on the main display whilst current (in or
out of the battery is shown on the bar-graph and vice-versa, current on
the main display and voltage on the bar-graph.
• Solar Power, the charging current from the solar panel along with the
voltage of the battery it is charging is displayed. Use the select button
to toggle the display, with voltage on the main display whilst current is
shown on the bargraph and vice-versa, current on the main display and
voltage on the bargraph.
• Select Battery, press the select button toggles between the Leisure
and Vehicle batteries as the power source (or battery to be charged). The
selected battery is shown in the header area.
• Tank-Fill on/off, is not applicable to motorhomes and will not appear on
the menu.
Menu Tree
• Tank Heaters on/off, this feature enables or disables the automatic
Fresh & Waste water tank frost protection system. Tank heating will start
when the tank level is 25% or higher and the external temperature is
under 2 degrees C.
• AC Limit, the AC current limiter, when enabled, will monitor the incoming
AC current and if the set limit is reached the 230V heating element within
the heating system will be temporarily turned off until the current falls
below the set limit. Use the select button to set the limit or to turn the
feature off. The AC Limit icon in the header indicated that a limit is set and
will flash if the limiter is active.
• Temperature & Humidity, Pressing the select button scrolls through the
internal temperature, internal humidity & external temperature readings.
Please note that due to the location of the internal temperature sensor
there may be slight differences to the temperature shown on the heating
system.
• Dimmer %, this display shows the lighting dimming level and is adjusted
in 5% increments. The display commences where the level was last set.
Press the select button to increase the level up to 100% and then back
down again to 5%. Pressing the dimming button on the control panel
immediately shows this dimming value.
• Heater Settings, this sub menu allows the heater controls and
associated settings to be adjusted. A full explanation of the controls can
be found in the heater section.
• System Settings, this sub menu allows a number of system features to
be configured like the Clock, Date, Key beep, Backlight time, LED time,
Tank Alarms, Bluetooth Pairing etc.
75
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
Pump Button. With the power on, press the pump button to turn the water
pump on. Press the button again to turn the pump off. The adjacent LED
will illuminate when the pump is on and the level of the water tank will be
shown on the screen.
Interior Lights Button. With the power on, press the lights button to turn
the main lighting supply on or off.
Light Dimming Button. With the power on, press the dimmer button to
turn the dimmed lighting on or off. Press the select button to adjust the
dimmer level (the menu automatically changes to the adjustment screen).
The last setting is remembered.
Awning Light Button. With the power on, press the awning light button
to turn the awning light on or off. The Adjacent LED will illuminate when
the awning light is on. The awning light may also be controlled by the
motorhome locking system.
Note, display illumination. The LCD back
light will illuminate for the pre-set time (default
time is 30 seconds) adjustable between 5 and
120 seconds. Setting the timer to 0 seconds
will force the backlight to be permanently on.
The illumination of the blue LED’s adjacent to
the power, pump & awning light buttons can
be configured in the same way as the backlight. The screen will wake up if your hand is
placed near the panel or if a button is pressed.
2.6 Operation while driving
The EC600 system is designed to shutdown
parts of the system while the engine is running.
This is to meet Electro Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC) regulations and to ensure the safe
operation of the motorhome.
Please ensure the system shutdown switch on
the PSU is in the on (button in) position before
driving (see 2.2). This will ensure the electronic
system is active and will therefore be able
to control the charging process, supply the
refrigerator and monitor other system circuits.
When fitted, designated 12V sockets, en-route
reading lights and en-route heating will remain
operational while the engine is running.
With the engine running the screen will show
ENGINE RUNNING, the leisure and vehicle
battery icons will be displayed to indicate they
are being charged and the charging voltage
will be show in the main display.
76
3.2 Generator Usage
The following section provides further technical
information relating to the electrical system.
You can also access the supporting technical
manual from www.sargentltd.co.uk
Caution should be used before connecting a
generator to your motorhome.
3.1 Residual Current Device & Miniature
Circuit Breakers
! WARNING: Never start or stop
E L E CT RICS
3 System Technical Information
the generator while electrical loads are
connected and switched on. Start the
engine, let it stabilise and then connect
the electrical load. To stop the engine,
disconnect the electrical load and let
engine stabilise before switching off
Whilst some generators use electronic inverter
technology, others use a more basic principle
to generate the 230V supply. Preference
should be to choose a generator which
produces a consistent sinusoidal wave form
with accurate voltage control.
The Residual Current Device (RCD) is
basically provided to protect the user from
lethal electric shock. The RCD will turn off
(trip) if the current flowing in the live
conductor does not fully return down the
neutral conductor, i.e. some current is
passing through a person down to earth or
through a faulty appliance.
To ensure the RCD is working correctly,
the test button should be operated each
time the vehicle is connected to the mains
supply (see section 2.3)
The Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s)
operate in a similar way to traditional fuses
and are provided to protect the wiring
installation from overload or short circuit.
If an overload occurs the MCB will switch
off the supply. If this occurs you should
investigate the cause of the fault before
switching the MCB back on.
The Reverse Polarity warning light on the
PSU may illuminate when using a Generator.
This is a normal side effect when using some
types of generator. Instead of connecting the
neutral conductor to earth, some generators
centre tap the earth connection making both
neutral and live conductors 110V above earth.
This 110V difference causes the neon polarity
indicator to illuminate.
In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but
please consult the generator handbook for
further information.
The following table shows the rating and circuit
allocation for the three MCB’s
MCB
Rating
Output Wire Colour
Description
1
10 Amps
White
230V Sockets
2
16 Amps
White (Yellow for heater)
Extra 230V Sockets / Alde or Truma
Heating System
3
10 Amps
Black (Blue for Whale
water heater)
Fridge / Charger / Auxiliary devices
77
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
3.3 Battery Charger
3.4 Leisure Battery
The system incorporates an intelligent
three-stage battery charger.
A) Type / Selection
For optimum performance and safety it
is essential that only a proprietary brand
LEISURE battery is used and it is suggested
to select a battery from the NCC Verified
Battery Scheme with a typical capacity of 75
to 120 Ah (Ampere / hours). Depending on the
prospective use of the motorhome the correct
type should be selected (A, B or C).
A normal car battery is NOT suitable. This
battery should always be connected when
the system is in use.
During stage 1 the battery voltage is increased
gradually while the current is limited to start the
charging process and protect the battery.
At stage 2 the voltage rises to 14.4V to deliver
the bulk charge to the battery. When the
battery is charged, the voltage is decreased
at stage 3 to 13.6V to deliver a float charge to
maintain the battery in the fully charged state.
The charger can be left switched on
continuously as required.
The battery charger / power converter also
provides power to the leisure equipment when
the mains supply is connected. This module
supplies DC to the leisure equipment up to a
maximum of 25 Amps (300 Watts), therefore
the available power is distributed between
the leisure load and the battery, with the
leisure load taking priority as per the following
example:
Leisure
Load
Available power for battery
charging
5A
20A
10A
15A
15A
10A
20A
5A
The PSU is configured to work with standard
lead acid leisure batteries, and in most cases
is also compatible with the latest range of
Absorbed Glass Matt (AGM) batteries. Before
fitting non-standard batteries please check
that the charging profile described in 3.3 is
suitable for the type of battery by referring
to the battery documentation or battery
manufacturer.
Some vehicle installations can cater for two
leisure batteries connected in parallel. In these
cases it is recommended that two identical
batteries are used.
The battery feed is fitted with an inline fuse
between the battery and the electrical harness,
and is usually located immediately outside
the battery compartment or within 500mm
of the battery. If a single battery is fitted to
a motorhome, this fuse could be up to 40A,
however if two batteries are fitted each battery
should be fused at a maximum of 20A.
B) Installation & Removal
Always disconnect the 230V mains supply
and turn the PSU green charger switch to the
off position (button out) before removing or
installing the battery.
! WARNING: Under heavy loads the
Battery Charger case may become hot.
ALWAYS ensure the ventilation slots have
a clear flow of air. Do not place combustible
materials against / adjacent to the charger.
78
When connecting the battery, ensure that the
correct polarity is observed (black is negative
[-] and red is positive [+]) and that the terminals
are securely fastened. Crocodile clips must not
be used.
! WARNING: Explosive gases may be
present at the battery. Take care to prevent
flames and sparks in the vicinity of
the battery and do not smoke.
with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent)
which monitors battery voltage. If you plan
to disconnect or remove your leisure battery
for maintenance or external charging, then
please contact the monitoring station before
you remove or disconnect the battery.
If a leisure battery is not fitted, please also
contact the Tracker monitoring station
before removing the mains hook up.
The Swift Command Tracker monitoring
station can be contacted on 0345 6027302.
C) Operation / Servicing
Under normal circumstances it should not
be necessary to remove the battery other
than for routine inspection of the terminals
and “topping up” of the battery fluid where
applicable. Please see instructions supplied
with the battery.
Note: Do not over discharge the battery.
One of the most common causes of
battery failure is when the battery is
discharged below the recommended level
of approximately 10V. Discharging a battery
below this figure can cause permanent
damage to one or more of the cells within
the battery.
E L E CT RICS
! WARNING: Your motorhome is fitted
To prevent over discharge, the EC600 system
incorporates a battery protect circuit that
warns the users and then disconnects the
batteries when they fall below set values.
If a warning is active a beep will be emitted
by the control panel and information will be
shown on the screen. To cancel the warning,
press the select button. These warnings will
not be repeated unless the power switch is
turned off and on again. This is to ensure the
warning does not become a nuisance.
Battery
Voltage
cut off
Action after
cut off
Notes
Vehicle
10.9V
Battery selection
is changed from
Vehicle battery to
Leisure battery. If
the leisure battery
is below 9V then a
further warning will
occur (see below).
This cut off level is designed to protect the
vehicle battery from over discharge. The
10.9V level ensures there is sufficient power
in the battery to run the vehicle electronics
and start the vehicle. This cut off only applies
to power drawn from the battery by the
leisure equipment; it will not protect the
battery if you leave vehicle circuits switched
on, such as the road lights.
Leisure
9V
Power is turned off
This is an emergency cut off level to protect
the battery from severe damage. You
should not rely on this cut off level during
normal operation, but manage your power
consumption to a discharge level of about
11.5V.
This cut off only applies to power drawn from
the battery by the leisure equipment that is
controlled by the control panel power switch;
it will not protect the battery from discharge
by permanently connected equipment.
79
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
3.5 12 Volt DC Fuses
! WARNING: When replacing fuses
always replace a fuse with the correct value.
NEVER replace with a higher value / rating
as this could damage the wiring harness.
If a replacement fuse ‘blows’ do not keep
replacing the fuse as you could damage the
wiring harness. Please investigate the fault
and contact your dealer.
The following table shows the fuse allocation
for the 13 fuses fitted to the PSU. Please note
that fuses are dependant on PSU versions, so
not all fuses may be present.
Fuse
Rating
Fuse
Colour
Description
1
25 Amps
White
Charger
2
7.5 Amps
Brown
Permanent 12V / Alarm / Fridge Electronics / Alde Heating
3
10 Amps
Red
12V Sockets / TV Amplifier
4
10 Amps
Red
Extractor Fans / Truma Heating
5
5 Amps
Tan
Appliances / Hob Ignition / Toilet
6
10 Amps
Red
Water Pumps / Tank Heaters
7
5 Amps
Tan
Lighting, Main Lights & Dim Channel 1.
8
5 Amps
Tan
Lighting, Entry Light & Dim Channel 2.
9
10 Amps
Red
Spare Outputs / Marker Lights / En-Route Sockets &
Lights
10
10 Amps
Red
Auxiliary / Awning Light / Electric Step
11
20 Amps
Yellow
Fridge 12V
12
15 Amps
Blue
Towing 12V
13
15 Amps
Blue
Fridge D+
Note: Fuses (2-13) have a Red LED below
them which provides indication that the fuse
has blown.The charger fuse has a green
LED which Indicates that the charger is
working.
80
Fuse
Rating
Fuse
Colour
Description
Battery 1
20 Amps
Yellow
Fuse remotely located near battery
Battery 2
20 Amps
Yellow
Fuse remotely located near battery 2 (where fitted)
3.6 Solar Charge Management
The EC601/651 PSU incorporates a built-in
solar charge management feature, which will
monitor the input from a separate solar panel
and regulator. The Solar Active symbol will be
displayed on the control panel when there is
an amount of energy available to charge the
leisure or vehicle batteries.
The voltage and current produced from the
regulator can be viewed on the multi-function
display by selecting the Solar Power menu
item. Depending on the charge state of the
batteries, the solar power will be directed
to the required battery or batteries, and be
continuously monitored to ensure optimum
operation. A maximum of 150w of Solar
Charge can be managed in this way
3.7 Mains Charging
The EC651 PSU incorporates a smart charge
feature, which monitors both leisure and
vehicle batteries and automatically adjusts and
directs the charger power (and solar power if a
solar panel is installed) to maintain the leisure
and vehicle batteries at an optimal level.
3.8 Water Pump Operation
The EC620 control panel pump button
operates the internal water pump drawing
water from an internal tank if fitted, or an
external container when no internal tank
is fitted. The water tanks (fresh & waste)
incorporate a level warning feature to warn the
user when the fresh water level drops below
25% or when the waste water level reaches
100%.
If the water pump power is turned on and
the fresh water level drops to below 25% a
warning beep will be heard and a message will
be displayed on the control panel. To cancel
the warning, press the select button.
E L E CT RICS
The following table shows details of the fuse(s)
located at the Leisure battery. See also 3.4A
If the water pump power is turned on and the
waste water level rises to full (100%) a warning
beep will be heard and a message will be
displayed on the control panel. To cancel the
warning, press the select button.
These warnings will not be repeated unless the
water pump power switch is turned off and on
again. This is to ensure the warning does not
become a nuisance.
The Swift Command App can be used to
control this feature.
3.9 Water Tank Heaters (frost protection)
Operation
The EC651 features the ability to switch on
water tank heaters to provide frost protection
for the fresh and waste tanks. (Tank heaters
are not normally fitted when those tanks are
inboard) The tank heater symbol is displayed
on the control panel when this feature is
enabled. The tank heaters will only operate if
there is over 25% in the relevant water tank
and the external temperature sensor detects
that the temperature falls below 2 degrees C.
If the temperature rises above this level the
heaters will be switched off but the feature will
remain on.
3.10 AC Current Limiter Operation
The EC600 system features a 230V current
monitoring system which allows the mains
hook up current to be displayed on the control
panel. The resolution of this reading is 0.5A.
A current limit setting can be activated which
if reached will switch off the electric elements
in the heating system, until such time as
the current drops and the elements will be
switched back on. An example of this is if a
kettle was to be operated whilst the heating
was on and the current limit was reached then
the heater electric element would be
81
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
temporarily switched off, when the kettle
had boiled then the heater element would be
switched back on automatically.
This feature is particularly useful when abroad
on a low current supply. A warning that the
limit has been reached is displayed on the
control panel.
Setting the value to OFF will disable this
feature.
The Smart Command App can be used to
adjust this feature.
3.11 Lighting & Dimming Operation
The system contains up to two dimming
channels for groups of lights which can be
controlled by the light dimming button on
the control panel, and the furniture mounted
controls for those lights.
The awning light on a motorhome can again
be controlled by a number of items, the control
panel awning light button, the App, and the
lock and unlock system (dependant on system
setting being set to do so). Each item can
toggle the light on and off.
The Smart Command App can be used to
both configure and adjust the lighting and
dimming.
82
E L E CT RICS
3.12 Heating Controls
There are a number of heating systems that
can be controlled by the EC600. The system
will be preconfigured by the manufacturer.
The following menu items are only available
in Timer control mode, and 2 examples
are shown for the different heating system
variants.
Scroll to the Heating Settings and press select
to set or adjust the following items:
ALDE 3020
Menu Item
Description
Control
Set to MANUAL to use the controls supplied by the heating appliance
manufacturer. Set to TIMER to control the appliance by the control panel with
the settings below. Set to APP control the appliance by the Smart Command
app. To allow Swift Command control of the heating system, the ‘3rd Party
Panel’ option on the Alde Controller must be enabled. This should already be
set up for you on your motorhome or caravan. See Alde instructions for further
details.
The following menu items are only available when in Timer control mode.
Electric
Set the electric element to OFF, 1KW, 2KW or 3KW
Gas
Set gas heating ON or OFF
Timer 1
Set the timer 1 event time. This setting adjusts in 15
minute increments and uses the 24 hour clock
Example 07:30
T1 Heating
Set the timer 1 heating temperature. This setting
can be off, or 5 through to 30 degrees C
Example 22 deg C
T1 H/Water
Set the timer 1 hot water temperature. This setting
can be OFF, NORML or BOOST
Example Boost
The menu now repeats for timer 2 through to timer 4
Exit settings?
When timer 4 is completed the exit settings item is reached. Press the select
button to exit and save the settings.
The timer example below will set the heating
to 22 degrees C and the hot water to boost at
7:30 in the morning.
83
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
TRUMA Combi CP+
Menu Item
Description
Control
Set to MANUAL to use the controls supplied by the heating appliance
manufacturer. Set to TIMER to control the appliance by the control panel
with the settings below. Set to APP control the appliance by the Smart
Command app. To allow Swift Command control of the heating system,
the Combi Controller must be initialised while Swift Command is active.
This should already be set up for you on your motorhome or caravan.
See Truma Combi CP Plus instructions for further details.
The following menu items are only available when in Timer control mode.
Energy
Set the electric element to OFF, 1KW, 2KW or 3KW
Timer 1
Set the timer 1 event time. This setting adjusts in
15 minute increments and uses the 24 hour clock
Example 07:30
T1 Heating
Set the timer 1 heating temperature. This setting
can be off, or 5 through to 30 degrees C
Example 22 deg C
T1 H/Water
Set the timer 1 hot water temperature.
This setting can be OFF, ECO or HOT
Example Eco
The menu now repeats for timer 2 through to timer 4
Exit settings?
When timer 4 is completed the exit settings item is reached. Press the select
button to exit and save the settings.
The timer example above will set the heating to
22 degrees C and the hot water to eco at 7:30
in the morning.
84
The main control panel will display the
software version number of both the Control
Panel and the PSU. On the EC620 menu item
press the select button to display software
information.
E L E CT RICS
3.13 Other Controls
3.14 Electric Step Operation
On vehicles fitted with an electric step, this is
operated by a button near the entry door.
Press and release the button to move the step
in or out. One press of the button will move the
step out; a further press will move the step in
again.
If the engine is started the step will move in
automatically, after a short warning buzzer.
If this operation fails due to an obstacle a
buzzer will sound continuously to warn that
the step is still out, and therefore requires your
attention.
3.15 Additional CI Bus Enabled Devices
The Swift Command system will continue
to develop enabling the control of additional
devices such as air conditioning and control
units. When selecting additional equipment
check for CI Bus compatibility markings, and
check with Sargent Electrical for details of the
latest compatible devices.
3.16 Bluetooth Pairing
Using the control panel, access the System
Settings menu and then scroll to the Bluetooth
pairing section. Press the select button to
start pairing, the power button LED will flash
to indicate the pairing mode. You can now
pair your device to the system following the
devices instructions to add a Bluetooth item.
Pairing remains on for 1 minute and is then
turned off automatically.
85
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
3.17 System Warnings
The system incorporates a number of warnings that are active at specific times. These are
summarised below, and also covered by relevant sections of this manual. When a warning is
active a triangle will be displayed in the control panel header area.
Warning
When
Type
Fresh water level
low
With pump turned on and fresh
water level low (less than 25%
full). Only available when an onboard tank is fitted.
Message on screen and 30 second
audible beep.
Waste water
level full
With pump turned on and waste
water level full. Only available
when an on-board tank is fitted.
Message on screen and 30 second
audible beep.
Leisure battery
voltage low
With control panel power on and
leisure battery selected (as active
battery) and the voltage level falls
below 10V.
Message on screen and 30 second
audible beep.
With control panel power on and
leisure battery selected (as active
battery) and the voltage level is
below 9V.
Message on screen and 30 second
audible beep. If no action taken after 30
seconds then the system will switch the
power off to prevent severe discharge of
the battery.
Note: This is an emergency cut off level to protect the battery from severe
damage. You should not rely on this cut off level during normal operation, but
manage your power consumption to a discharge level of 11.5V or above.
This cut off only applies to power drawn from the battery by the leisure
equipment that is controlled by the control panel power switch; it will not
protect the battery from discharge by permanently connected equipment.
Leisure battery
voltage high
With control panel power on or
off and leisure battery is selected
(as active battery) and the
voltage level rises above 15V.
Message on screen and repeated beeps
from the control panel. The power is
automatically turned off. The beeping will
not stop until the fault is cleared.
Vehicle battery
warnings
If the vehicle battery is selected instead of the leisure battery, then similar
warnings to those described above are applied to the vehicle battery.
The vehicle battery low warning level is 10.9V.
Engine running
When the engine is started the
system power will be turned off.
Message on screen, Leisure & Vehicle
battery symbols indicating both batteries
are connected for charging. The charging
voltage is also shown on screen.
Step extended
Step extended and engine
started.
Message on screen and warning buzzer.
Step jammed or obstructed.
86
Mains lead
(hook-up cable)
still connected /
plugged in
When the engine is started and
the mains cable is still plugged in
and the charger is switched on.
Message on screen and repeated beeps
from the control panel. The beeping
will not stop until the hook-up lead is
removed.
3.18 Common Fault Table
Possible Cause
Proposed Fix
No 230
volt output
from PSU
Connecting lead
between the site
and Leisure Vehicle
not connected
Check and connect lead as per 2.3C
RCD switched off
Reset RCD as per 2.3D
RCD not operating
correctly
Check supply polarity; if the RCD continues to fail contact
your Dealer as there is probably an equipment or wiring
fault.
MCB switched off
Reset MCB by switching OFF (down position) then back
ON (up position), if the MCB continues to fail contact your
Dealer as there is probably an equipment or wiring fault.
No or deficient
supply from site
Contact site Warden for assistance
Other fault
Contact your Dealer
Mains Supply
reversed?
The reverse polarity light is designed to illuminate when the
Live and Neutral supply has been reversed / crossed over.
If the light illuminates there is a problem with the site supply
or the cable connecting the supply to your vehicle. The light
is designed to work on UK electrical supplies (where the
neutral conductor is connected to earth at the sub station).
If you are using your vehicle outside the UK this light may
illuminate when no fault exists. In these cases consult the
site warden for advice.
Generator being
used
‘The Reverse Polarity warning light is on when using my
Generator’. This is a normal side effect when using some
types of generator. Instead of connecting the neutral
conductor to earth, some generators centre tap the earth
connection making both neutral and live conductors 110V
above earth. This 110V difference causes the neon polarity
indicator to illuminate. In most cases it is still safe to use the
generator, but please consult the generator handbook for
further information.
Control Panel has
no display
Check batteries and fuses, turn PSU isolate switch and
charger switch on and ensure mains supply is connected.
Check control panel connecting lead at PSU and behind
Control Panel Contact your Dealer
12V Power turns off
Battery protect feature has operated to protect the Vehicle
battery and or the Leisure battery. See 3.4C Over voltage
protection has been activated, the control panel will display
a warning. A number of things can cause this but the most
common is the solar panel, it is worth checking the regulator
is connected correctly and operating within the correct
parameters. Engine has been started, all equipment has
been disconnected to meet EMC requirements. See 2.6
Control Panel
locked / erratic
function
Observe control panel handling instructions Control panel
software may have crashed. Reboot control panel by
turning off the PSU isolate switch. Wait 30 seconds then
turn the switch back on.
Reverse
Polarity
light is
illuminated
on PSU
Control
Panel
Problems
E L E CT RICS
Fault
87
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
Fault
Possible Cause
Proposed Fix
No 12 volt output
from PSU
No 230V supply
Check all above
Charger not switched on
Turn charger switch on, switch will illuminate
Battery not connected
and / or charged
Install charged battery as per 3.4
Power button on control
panel not switched to on
Turn power on at control panel
Battery flat / Battery fuse
blown
Recharge battery, check fuses, check charging
voltage is present at battery
Fuse blown
Check all fuses are intact and the correct value
fuse is installed as per fuse table
Equipment switched off
/ unplugged
Check equipment is switched on and connected
to the 12V supply
Other fault
Contact your Dealer
Fuse blown
Replace fuse with correct value as per fuse
table.
Pump turned off
Turn pump on by pressing the pump button at
the control panel.
Setting incorrect
Both the internal and external pump feeds
are controlled from the control panel. To alter
the setting of the pump switch see section
3.8. Ensure the setting matches your desired
requirement.
Fuse/s blown
Replace fuse with correct value as per fuse
table.
Lights turned off
Turn Lights on by pressing the lights button, use
dimmer at the control panel.
Bluetooth not paired
Using System Settings menu, select Bluetooth
Pair option
Bluetooth not active on
Device
Ensure that the handheld device has Bluetooth
switched on and that the device supports the
Bluetooth 4 standard (BLE)
Bluetooth out of range
Ensure the handheld device is within 7M of the
middle of the caravan/motorhome switch see
section 3.8. Ensure the setting matches your
desired requirement.
Bluetooth connection
issue
See App user guide for further details
Account details
notentered on App
Enter details in Account page of App settings
menu
Pump not
working
illuminated
on PSU
Lights not
working
Bluetooth
Communications
not working
illuminated on
PSU
Remote
Communications
not working
88
Account not registered
Check with supplying dealer or Sargent Electrical
at time of vehicle delivery that an account has been registered.
Sargent Electrical Services Limited provide a
technical help line during office hours. Please
contact 01482 678981 if you require technical
help. For out of hour support please refer to
the tech support section of the Sargent web
site www.sargentltd.co.uk.
Below is a list of the countries covered by the
SIM under a fair usage policy, a complete list
is available at request.
4.1 Swift Command App
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Netherlands, Malta, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Spain, Sweden, United Kingdom.
The Swift Command app can be down loaded
from the Apple App Store, the Android Play
store or the Windows store (when available).
For continued use outside of the countries
listed above, a change of SIM card should be
arranged by your supplying dealer.
A separate Swift Command User Guide is
available which covers the operation of the
app. The app will update as features are
continuously developed or added.
4.4 Replacement parts
4 Remote Access & Control
Before you can use the App with your
caravan or motorhome you will need to
create an account and sign up to the free
communication service. This is a simple
process and will be explained further by your
dealer at the vehicle handover.
Additional information is available at
www.swiftcommand.co.uk
4.2 Swift Command Web usage &
Description
In addition to the mobile App, you can also
use the same account and login details to
access the Swift Command web site.
E L E CT RICS
3.19 Contact details
The Control panel contains a small lithium
battery to maintain the clock when no other
energy supplies are available this will last in
excess of 5 years under normal conditions.
The battery is a CR2032 3.0V
The EC630 Communication module contains a
special backup battery pack which should last
in excess of 3 years under normal conditions.
The pack part number is 16308 available from
Sargent.
4.5 Updates
From time to time there may be updates to the
system software; these updates will be done
at service intervals by your dealership.
Here you can update and amend your details,
look at location information and history, review
system information and historical data as
well as changing some system options and
settings.
Additional information is available at www.
swiftcommand.co.uk
4.3 Swift Command SIM Coverage &
Usage information
The EC600 system, when delivered for mainly
UK use, contains Mobile SIM with 36 month
contract, which commences upon activation at
the Dealership when a customer is assigned to
the motorhome.
89
E LE CTRICS
SWIFT COMMAND POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
5 Technical Data & Approvals
5.1 Equipment – EC601, EC602, EC651, EC620, EC630 & PX300 Control Equipment
Outline Specification
INPUT 230V
230 Volts / 0 to 16 Amps
OUTPUT 230V
RCD protected, 2 x MCB outputs of 10A & 1 x
MCB output of 16A
+ / - 10%
Separate switched channels for heating
system and charger
INPUT 12V
2 x 20A battery inputs via 2 x 4 way
connectors
SOLAR INPUT
1 X Dedicated solar panel input (20 to 150W
panel) via a 2 way connector
OUTPUT 12V
25A total output via multiple switched channels
protected by 13 fused outputs
Integrated
CHARGER
Input 220-240 Volts AC +/- 10%, Frequency
50 Hz +/- 6%, Current 3A max.
DC Output 13.6 to 14.4 Volts nominal, Current
25 Amps max (300 Watts).
Signal INPUT
4 x Fresh water level, 4 x Waste water level,
1 x Engine running, plus multiple vehicle
connections, sensor inputs for temperature &
humidity
Data IN / OUT
CANBUS Data communication and power to
Control Panel via 6 way connector
Fresh water negative
sensed Waste water
negative sensed
CI-Bus Data communication to CI-Bus enabled
devices via RJ11/12 connector
IP rating
IP31
Operating
Ambient 0 to 35° Celsius
temperature
Charger case temperature with full load 65°
C Max
Automatic shutdown
and restart if
overheated /
overloaded
Dimensions
EC601 & EC651
PSU
Overall size (HxWxD) 180 x 305 x 135mm
Weight 3.8 Kg
EC620 Control
Panel
Overall size (HxWxD) 93 x 180 x 32mm
EC630 Comms
Module
Overall size (HxWxD) 55 x 116 x 85mm
Weight 550g
EC640 Sensor
Overall size (HxWxD) 60 x 27 x 14mm
Weight 80g
Clearances 75mm above, 50mm left & right
Cut-out size (HxW) 82 x 165mm
Fixing centres 166mm
X 26MM
Weight 150 g
90
E L E CT RICS
5.2 Approvals
System: BSEN 1648-1, BSEN1648-2
compliant, BS7671: 2008 compliant
Residual Current Device: RCD 40A 30mA
trip to BS EN 61008
Miniature Circuit Breakers: MCB’s type C
6000A breaking capacity to BSEN 60898
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
directive 2004/108/EC Certificate
CE20071224-1
Integrated Charger: BS EN 60335-1/2.29,
2006/95EC, IEC61000-3.2/3:1995, 1.
Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95EC TUV014900-A1, EN55022, Class B, EN55024/
Level 2
5.3 Declaration of Conformity
Equipment: Leisure Power Control System
Model name: EC601, EC602, EC651,
EC620, EC630 & PX300
I hereby declare that the equipment named
above has been designed to comply with the
relevant sections of the above referenced
approvals. The unit complies with all essential
requirements of the Directives.
Signed
Date:
Name
Position
Manufacturer
I L Sargent
Technical
Director
Sargent Electrical Services Ltd
Unit 35, Tokenspire Business Park
Woodmansey, Beverley
East Yorkshire, United Kingdom
91
E LE CTRICS
MOTORHOME BATTERY
Motorhome battery
! WARNING: Use precaution when
removing or replacing the battery, as
batteries contain acid liquids which can
cause severe injuries and damage when
handled incorrectly. Refer to the cleaning
and maintenance section. Please also take
into consideration when manoeuvring a
battery, that the weight may be in excess
of 20kg.
Your motorhome has been fitted with one
or two leisure batteries depending on size of
vehicle and expected electrical loads. The
battery will be housed in one of two ways:
Within a floor mounted compartment
Retained beneath the drivers seat
Floor mounted compartments are designed
to hold the battery securely and to contain
any electrolyte (acid) spillage. They are
sealed from the habitation compartment and
a breather pipe is fitted to ensure any build
up of explosive gases (hydrogen) is vented
to the outside. If a breather pipe is fitted it
is important to ensure that any replacement
batteries are also fitted with a breather pipe.
The battery or batteries should only be
positioned in the appropriate compartment,
and be properly secured before travelling.
92
Note: The batteries fitted to your
motorhome in floor mounted compartments
must be kept upright.
When a leisure battery has been factory installed below the driver’s seat, the battery type
used is specific to that installation, and is of a
type (Sealed AGM) that allows a battery to be
installed in a vertical or horizontal orientation.
Due to the construction of this type of battery,
it is not necessary to vent the battery to the
outside, and there is no requirement to check
and maintain electrolyte levels.
Note: If an AGM battery is replaced, it must
be replaced by an equivalent AGM battery
which is suitable for a horizontal installation,
and does not require venting to the outside.
It is recommended that a good quality leisure
battery is always connected when the motor
home electrical system is in use. Leisure
batteries are a deep cycling rechargeable
heavy duty 12v battery designed to
provide power for lights and other electrical
appliances. It should be remembered that
batteries suitable for the electrical demands
of a motorhome differ in design from those
for use with a car, and whilst the system
may operate with a car battery it is strongly
recommended that only a rechargeable leisure
type battery, maintained in good condition, is
used. The battery should be kept topped up
(charged) at all times. If two leisure batteries
are fitted additional care is needed, as one
battery deteriorates this can reduce the
lifespan of the other.
Replacement batteries should be a proprietary
brand leisure battery with a minimum 75Ah
capacity. Replacement batteries should be
checked dimensionally before purchasing, to
ensure fitment within the battery compartment,
as brands vary in size.
! WARNING: When connecting the
battery, ensure that the correct polarity
is observed (black is negative and red/
brown is positive) and that the terminals are
securely fastened.
M0TORHOME BATTERY
with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent)
which monitors battery voltage. If you plan
to disconnect or remove your leisure battery
for maintenance or external charging, then
please contact the monitoring station before
you remove or disconnect the battery.
If a leisure battery is not fitted, please also
contact the Tracker monitoring station
before removing the mains hook up.
The Swift Command Tracker monitoring
station can be contacted on 0345 6027302.
Under normal circumstances it should not be
necessary to remove the battery other than for
routine inspection of terminals and (for nonAGM batteries) ‘topping up’.
! WARNING: Explosive gases may be
present at the battery. Take care to prevent
flames and sparks in the vicinity.
Your motorhome has been fitted with an
in-line fuse between the battery terminal and
the power supply unit. Do not use a higher
rated fuse as this may cause damage to your
motorhome.
! WARNING: Switch off all appliances and
lamps before connecting or disconnecting
the battery. Smoking is prohibited around
the battery compartment.
To preserve the life of your leisure battery and
charger please observe the following:
1. Do not leave all 12v lights powered at the
same time as this will drain your leisure
battery more rapidly.
2. If all 12v lights must be powered together,
ensure the battery is ‘in-circuit’ and that the
battery charger is turned on.
3. For optimum performance use the
transformer/charger unit with a leisure
battery attached.
Please note the auxiliary battery or batteries
supplied with your motorhome may not be fully
charged and should be charged for a minimum
of 24 hours before use. Battery performance
may be affected by a number of things such
as ambient temperature, age, state of charge
etc.
Cleaning and maintenance
(Floor mounted battery compartment)
E L E CT RICS
! WARNING: Your motorhome is fitted
• Use protective clothing and glasses when
handling a leaking battery, and avoid direct
contact to the skin, eyes and respiratory
organ.
• Should a battery leakage occur, please act
according to the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the battery. Act with caution
as caustic substances are present in the
battery.
• Always remove the battery and the power
cable before carrying out any maintenance of
the product.
• Before removing the clamps switch off all
appliances.
• Use a soft cloth or sponge and a non-acid/
abrasive detergent when cleaning the Battery
Box and Soft Tray.
• To check if any acid is present in the Soft
Tray (non-AGM batteries), simply press it
softly. A strong smell from the Soft Tray may
also indicate spilled acid. The battery can
be filled again with acid collected from the
Soft Tray. Always treat spilled battery acid as
hazardous waste. Dispose of spilled battery
acid according to the local and national
regulations.
• At the beginning of each season or extensive
travelling, check the Soft Tray for faults and
replace if necessary.
• The cleaning of the Battery Box and Soft
Tray should only be done after all power
sources have been switched off, in order to
prevent a hazardous situations.
Cleaning and maintenance
(Driver mounted batteries (AGM)).
• Always remove the battery and the power
cable before carrying out any maintenance of
the product.
• Before removing the clamps switch off all
electrical and gas appliances.
• Use a soft cloth or sponge and a non-acid/
93
E LE CTRICS
SOLAR PANEL CONNECTION
abrasive detergent when cleaning the battery
tray and area.
• Before the camping season or extensive
travelling, check the under seat area for wear
on fitting and cables and replace if
necessary.
level within furniture (i.e within wardrobe,
either visible or behind a removable cover).
The output from a regulator, rated to suit the
chosen solar panel, should be connected to
this point.
Factory fitted Solar Energy System
• The cleaning of the battery area should only
be done after all power sources have been
switched off, in order to prevent a hazardous
situations.
Solar panel connection point
or Solar panel fitment
Depending on specification, a solar panel
connection point, or a solar panel and
regulator, will be installed in the motorhome.
Solar Panel Connection Point
If a connection point only has been included
in the motorhome harness, a solar panel
using the provision must provide a fused
and regulated output. From the provided
connection the supply is taken to the EC600
power supply unit. This facility is designed
to be used with a maximum solar panel size
of 150 watts – if a solar panel (or panels) of
output greater than 150 watts are required,
please contact Sargent Electrical Services or
the Swift Group for further advice.
Solar charge directed to the power supply
unit can then be distributed to the leisure
battery, vehicle battery, or each battery in
turn. For further details of selecting which
battery receives the solar charge, please see
the EC600 series instructions. Please note
that solar charge can only be directed to both
batteries in this way if the System Shutdown
button is ON – if System Shutdown is OFF,
any available solar charge will be directed to
the vehicle battery only.
Solar panel installations should be undertaken
by trained technicians who are familiar with
the systems involved. Particular care should
be taken when making connections to solar
panels, which can generate high voltages
ahead of a regulator when exposed to light.
94
Motorhomes without factory fit solar energy
systems will have two way connectors present
close to the leisure battery, and/or at a high
Depending on specification, your motorhome
may be fitted with a solar panel of up to 120W,
and if a solar panel is fitted then a suitable
solar regulator will also be installed. This solar
panel and regulator may provide additional 12v
power whenever sunlight is available to the
panel, and this will be directed to the EC400/
EC600 power supply unit. Conditions allowing,
and depending on the settings chosen in the
EC600 power supply unit, the system can
keep the leisure battery and vehicle battery
'topped up' during storage, and will provide
a daily boost to the leisure battery when
camping without a mains 230V supply.
Regulator operation
The regulator operates automatically, turning
on and off as required to charge and operate.
When the solar panel is exposed to a source
of sunlight the regulator tarts to operate. When
the voltage from the panel reaches a usable
level, the Panel Output LED will flash indicating
that the battery is being charged (see battery
charging above). If insufficient power is being
generated by the solar panel the regulator will
turn off. The regulator checks the solar panel
output every 30 seconds and turns on/off as
required. On overcast days when the solar
panel output is minimal the regulator can still
deliver a small charge, and in this mode the
LED's are not illuminated to conserve power.
Control Panel
When the solar panel is operating the leisure
battery voltage display on the control panel will
increase, however this does depend on the
SOLAR PANEL CONNECTION /
ACCESSORY HARNESSING
Accessory harnessing
Battery charging
A connection exists within the motorhome
harness, which can be used as a power
supply for an alarm or tracking system. For
security reasons, information regarding this is
not published; please contact your dealer for
further information.
If a leisure battery is fitted and requires
charging the Charge Status LED will illuminate.
Depending on the state of charge of the
battery this LED will illuminate red for bulk
charge (14.4V output) or green for float charge
(13.6V output). It may take a few hours to
several days to charge the battery depending
on its state of charge. When the battery is fully
charged the regulator will turn off to prevent
overcharging of the battery. If the mains
charger is turned on to charge the leisure
battery this can also cause the solar panel
regulator is to tun off.
Alarm Power Supply
E L E CT RICS
amount of load placed on the system and the
amount of power being generated by the solar
panel at that time.
Satellite Power Supply
Dependant on specification, in many
motorhomes a power supply harness is
included for use with roof mounted satellite
systems. This power supply is terminated in
a 4-way connector marked ‘SATELLITE’, and
carries 12v positive, 12v negative, and a signal
which can be used to detect when the vehicle
engine is running. (The engine run signal is
required by some systems to automatically
retract satellite dishes.
In addition, on Kon-Tiki models which have a
decoder / receiver position. At this position an
additional 230v socket is present for use with a
decoder / receiver, and a 12v supply is present
(2-way connector, 12v positive and 12v
negative), which can be used with an inverter
(not supplied) to power a decoder/receiver
when a mains supply is not available.
Tow Bar Connection
Note: This image is of a typical solar
regulator, the appearance my vary
Power Supply Unit
The PSU does not need to be switched on
(shutdown button in) for the solar panel to
charge the battery, but if the PSU has an
LCD display then this can be used to see the
increase in battery voltage as the solar panel
charges the battery. During storage the PSU
should be shutdown (shutdown button out).
Maintenance and cleaning
The solar panel will require cleaning periodically
in order to maintain the performance of the
panel. A caravan, car shampoo or simple soap
can be used, but do not use abrasive cleaners.
The addition of a tow bar requires an
electronic interface to ensure compatibility
between the combined road lighting on the
motorhome and the trailer, and the road light
monitoring system on the Fiat base vehicle.
Your motorhome already features an interface
which enables the use of LED road lighting on
the motorhome body, and there is connectivity
on this device for the addition of a tow bar.
It is important that the correct tow bar
electrical harness is used, and your Swift
Group dealer can order and fit this part for
you.
95
E LE CTRICS
GENERATOR USAGE
Generator usage
Caution should be used before connecting a
generator to your motorhome.
! WARNING: Never start or stop
the generator while electrical loads are
connected and switched on. Start the
engine, let it stabilise, then connect the
electrical load. To stop engine, disconnect
the electrical load and let engine stabilise
before switching off.
Whilst some generators use invertor
technology, others use a more basic principle
to generate the 230v supply. Preference
should be to choose a generator which
produces a consistent sinusoidal wave form
with accurate voltage control.
The reverse polarity warning light may
illuminate when using a generator. This is a
normal side effect when using some types of
generator. Instead of connecting the neutral
and live conductors 110v above earth. This
110v difference causes the neon polarity
indicator to illuminate.
In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but
please consult the generator handbook for
further information.
Habitation relay
Habitation relays are fitted to motorhomes by
manufacturers to comply with the following
legislation:
1. The Road Vehicles (Construction and Use)
Regulations 1986 Regulation 60 - Radio
interference suppression
2. European Community Whole Vehicle Type
Approval (ECWVTA) framework directive
2007/46/EC and EU Regulation 661/2009
(General Safety) mandates UNECE
Regulation 10 (Vehicles with regard to
Electromagnetic compatibility).
96
A habitation relay must be fitted by
manufacturers, safe guarding the consumer,
the purpose of the relay is to disable nonhomologated appliances/components whilst
the vehicle is in transit.
Unintentional electromagnetic energy can be
created by non-homologated devices within
the habitation compartment, which could
cause a malfunction of the base vehicles
electronic systems/components, including
safety critical items such as air bags, ABS
braking etc.
In your motorhome the habitational relay is
within the power supply unit.
ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING
E L E CT RICS
The Swift Group recommends that electrical
fault finding is undertaken by a trained
Technician familiar with the systems involved.
The basic checks below are therefore limited
to items that can be checked without the use
of tools etc. If in any doubt please consult a
Swift dealer.
Power Supply
Fault
Remedy
No 230v output from PSU
See Sargent EC600 information
No 12v output from PSU
See Sargent EC600 information
Reverse Polarity light illuminated
See Sargent EC600 information
Control Panel Problems
See Sargent EC600 information
Appliance Not Operating
Fault
Remedy
Error code or fault light displayed
on appliance (eg fridge LCD
display)
Check appliance specific information for next steps
No display at appliance controls
Check power supplies are available (electric hook up,
charger operating, battery in good state of charge).
Majority of appliances will not be operational when engine
is running.
Ensure control panel is ON.
Check appropriate fusing in Power Supply unit
Internal Lighting
Fault
Remedy
Lighting not operational
Check power supplies are available
Check control panel is ON, and that CABIN LIGHTS
button has been pressed
Locate furniture mounted switches, where appropriate
Check fuses on Power Supply Unit
Determine if light is LED or Tungsten / Halogen bulb, or
Fluorescent tube – check and replace bulb if appropriate
97
E LE CTRICS
ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING
Road Lighting
Fault
Remedy
Dashboard warning light
illuminated / groups of road lights
inoperative
Check all bulbs are located correctly in bulb holders
(especially those recently replaced). See bulb
replacement information in Service Book
If Tow Bar fitted check trailer lighting / disconnect trailer
to determine if this is the cause of the fault.
Check fuses in Fiat dash for main road lighting (see Fiat
handbook for details of which light groups are fused)
Check fuse in Power Supply Unit for auxiliary marker
lights (Amber side markers, Luton / upper rear markers)
VLM Fusebox Rio/Bessacarr/Bolero
Depending on specification, your motorhome may be fitted with a secondary VLM-4 fusebox,
which is designed to work in conjunction with the Fiat base vehicle. The secondary VLM-4
fusebox allows the base vehicle to function with the LED rear lights and still inform the user if the
directional indicators are functioning or not, via the base vehicle dash.
If a towed trailer is attached to this motorhome then the VLM-4 fusebox will still allow the status
of the vehicle directional indicators to be relayed to the user along with informing the user if the
directional indicator on the towed trailer are functioning correctly.
Electric Step Operation (When fitted)
Fault
Remedy
Step will not automatically retract
with engine start
Check fuses in Power Supply Unit.
Check mechanical condition of step – clean / lubricate if
appropriate.
Check other functions that are linked to the running of
the vehicle engine (i.e. fridge 12v operation). If these are
also inoperative contact dealer.
Step does not respond to furniture
switch
Check fuses in power supply unit
Check mechanical condition of step – clean / lubricate if
appropriate.
It is possible to link the operation of the step to the lock/
unlock commands from the central locking keyfob. If this
feature is enabled on your motorhome, check if operation
of the step via the central locking keyfob is possible. To
enable / disable the keyfob feature contact your dealer.
98
ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING
Fault
Remedy
Fresh water level sensor gives
incorrect readings
Use floor hatch within motorhome to access top of water
tank, remove sensor (4-screws) and clean probes
E L E CT RICS
Power Supply
If problems persist, dealer assistance required for further
fault finding.
Waste water level sensor gives
incorrect readings
If possible, from below motorhome remove level sensor
from top of waste tank, and clean probes. Alternatively,
clean waste tank internal surfaces by flushing through
with water or cleaning agent.
If problems persist, dealer assistance required for further
fault finding.
Battery Discharge
Fault
Remedy
Leisure battery discharging earlier
than anticipated
If appropriate to battery, check condition and top-up
battery fluid if required
Have condition of leisure battery checked by dealer or
tyre/exhaust/battery specialist
If motorhome is not in use, ensure ‘SYSTEM
SHUTDOWN’ button on Power Supply Unit is being used
to isolate all circuits
If motorhome is in use, see consumption table in
handbook – are several items perating simultaneously / is
total load likely to cause discharge.
Check charger is operational when mains hook up is
present, and that the charger is allowed sufficient time to
replenish battery / batteries.
Vehicle battery discharging earlier
than anticipated
If appropriate to battery, check condition and top-up
battery fluid if required
Have condition of leisure battery checked by dealer or
tyre/exhaust/battery specialist
If motorhome is not in use, see base vehicle handbook
section headed ‘periods of inactivity’. Consider use of
vehicle battery isolator
If motorhome is in use, Power Supply Unit configured
to charge / maintain both leisure and vehicle batteries.
(Contact dealer for further assistance if unsure)
99
E LE CTRICS
ELECTRICS FAULT FINDING / CAB RADIO
Audiovisual Equipment
Fault
Remedy
Rear view camera system
inoperative when reversing
(if fitted)
Check if camera system can be switched on manually,
using power button on rear view mirror.
Rear view camera system
inoperative whether moving
forward or reversing (if fitted)
Check fuses in habitation area fusebox
(Power Supply Unit)
Radio switches off intermittently
Radio will not remain on indefinitely when vehicle ignition
is switched off. Please see below or the Fiat handbook.
Check Reverse Lights are operational on rear of
motorhome. (Check base vehicle fuses if reverse lights
are inoperative.)
Cab radio - timer Settings
On all vehicles fitted with a Fiat radio, the
amount of time the radio will stay on can
be altered. To do this please follow the
instructions below:
Procedure for setting radio
switching off time after
ignition-off.
1. Switch on the radio
2. Press MENU to access the menu.
Radio VP1
3. Select SYSTEM SETTINGS and press OK.
4. Scroll to POWER OFF and tick the POWER
OFF with 180min. Delay.
5. Press OK
6. Press MENU on the display.
With 180 showing on the display, the setting is
complete and the radio will remain on for
3 hours.
Radio VP2 (Touch screen)
100
FITTED EQUIPMENT
Truma CP Plus digital timer control (when fitted)..................................................................... 103
Truma Combi 4E/6E boiler..................................................................................................... 116
ALDE Compact 3020 Control Panel - Functions and Symbols .............................................. 123
ALDE heat exchanger............................................................................................................. 133
ALDE compact 3020 boiler..................................................................................................... 134
Dometic absorption refrigerators ............................................................................................ 142
Thetford Cooker 3 burner and hotplate .................................................................................. 164
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Truma Combi ........................................................................................................................ 102
Dometic Oven CU600............................................................................................................ 169
Microwave oven ................................................................................................................... 179
Extractor hood 524 ............................................................................................................... 181
Thetford C260CS & C260S cassette toilet.............................................................................. 182
Thetford C400 cassette toilet ................................................................................................. 187
Windows ............................................................................................................................... 194
Window Blinds ...................................................................................................................... 196
Skyview operating instructions ............................................................................................... 197
Roof lights ............................................................................................................................. 198
Doors .................................................................................................................................... 201
Omnistep single step ............................................................................................................. 202
Awnings/Fiamma F45S/L side awning/Thule Omnistor 4900 side awning............................... 202
Reverse camera system......................................................................................................... 206
Cycle rack mounting bars....................................................................................................... 206
Solar Panel............................................................................................................................. 208
Seat swivel (Driver / Passenger).............................................................................................. 208
Side Lockers ......................................................................................................................... 208
Bunk and luton bed safety ..................................................................................................... 208
Drop down bed mechanism................................................................................................... 209
Tables ................................................................................................................................... 211
Table storage ........................................................................................................................ 211
TV inlet .................................................................................................................................. 212
TV aerial................................................................................................................................. 213
TV brackets............................................................................................................................ 215
Trigger shower heads............................................................................................................. 215
External BBQ point................................................................................................................. 216
External shower...................................................................................................................... 217
Colour reference..................................................................................................................... 217
101
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Note: The instructions covering fitted
equipment to your vehicle were correct
at the time of going to print. Owners
handbooks are updated annually and we
take great care to try and ensure their
accuracy. However,Swift Group Limited
cannot accept responsibility for any
changes that may be made in specification
or operating instructions to the equipment
described in this section after the time of
going to press.
Every care is taken to ensure that the
information provided in this handbook is
correct and easy to understand.
Separate manufacturers’ leaflets on many
of the components are also included in the
Owner’s Pack provided with this vehicle
and we recommend that you compare
the instructions in the handbook with
the component manufacturers literature,
to ensure the information provided is as
accurate as possible.
If you are in any doubt as to how to operate
the equipment in your vehicle, please
contact the component manufacturer’s
service department on the telephone
number shown on their component leaflet.
If you remain in any doubt, please contact
customer service department
on 01482 875740.
Equipment Specification
For details on type of equipment fitted in your
vehicle, please refer to the Sales Brochure or
Dealer.
! WARNING: To maximise the use and
life of all fitted equipment in your vehicle
it is essential that any accompanying
manufacturers’ literature is read fully.
All recommended maintenance and
preparation procedures should be followed.
The information provided in this handbook
is only intended as a guide. If in any doubt
consult your manufacturer appointed dealer,
particularly before attempting to install
EXTRA EQUIPMENT.
102
Note: In the interest of safety, replacement
parts for an appliance shall conform to the
appliance manufacturer’s specifications
and should be fitted by them or their
authorised agent.
Truma Combination Boiler
The Truma Combination Boiler has been
designed to run on gas or electric power and
the optimum performance is obtained when
used in dual fuel mode, that is running on
gas and electric at the same time.
Running in dual fuel mode has the following
benefits:
• Fastest possible heat up time, the 2KW
gas burner combines with a 1.8KW electric
element to provide 3.8KW of energy to heat
your hot water and warm your motorhome.
• The intelligent heat management system
automatically senses when the water and
room are nearing the required temperature
and then automatically turns off your gas
burner and operates solely electric power,
conserving your gas.
• As hot water is used or the room cools the
Truma combination heater will continue to
operate on electric only until a point where
the demands necessitate that additional
gas power is required. An example for
such a demand could be for instance if the
exterior door was left open and the room
temperature dropped by 10 degrees in the
space of a few minutes, in this case the
intelligent heat management system would
decide that the best way to get the room
back to the required temperature would be
to use both gas and electric at the same
time.
Operating the Truma Combination system on
electric or gas only will result in longer heat up
times for hot water and the room temperature
in comparison to operating on dual fuel.
Operating on electric only may not in all cases
maintain a comfortable room temperature
especially in colder conditions.
Control of Truma combi via Swift
Command
The Truma combi can also be controlled using
Swift Command. Please see details in the
electrical section of this handbook for further
details.
While taking energy consumption and the
environment into account, consider using the
Combi in summer mode (water heating only)
when room or space heating is not required,
but may be needed in the near future. This
ensures the appliance is held at the same
temperature as the hot water setting chosen,
and this can reduce the time taken to provide
warm air into the living area, when room or
space heating is then selected.
Truma CP Plus
Digital Timer Control (when fitted)
The Truma CP plus control panel is used to
control and monitor a Combi CP plus ready
heater and/or a Truma air conditioning system.
The Truma CP plus serves as an interface for
operating connected appliances via Truma
App and iNet Box. (Trauma aftermarket option)
• Do not carry out any repair work or
modifications on the Truma CP plus control
panel!
• A defective Truma CP plus control panel may
only be repaired by the manufacturer or the
manufacturer’s service department.
• Never use LP gas appliances when refuelling,
in multi-storey car parks, in garages, or on
ferries. Switch off the LP gas appliance on
the Truma CP plus control panel and make
sure that the LP gas appliance definitely
cannot be switched on via the Truma App.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
The intelligent heat management system
operation in dual fuel mode and allow the
Truma Combination boiler to prioritize the
electric power source over your gas, which all
conserve your gas supply.
Note:
• If the power supply to the system has
been interrupted, the time / time switch
must be reset.
• If a new or replacement appliance (heater,
air conditioning system or iNet Box)
is connected to the bus system, the
procedure described in “Initial start-up”
must be repeated.
• The ZUCB time switch can no longer
be used when the Combi CP plus ready
heater is connected to the Truma CP plus
control panel.
• If an iNET box is connected, the operation
of the CP plus controller will differ from
these instructions
The following air conditioning systems can be
operated with the Truma CP plus:
• Saphir compact
• Saphir comfort RC
• Aventa eco
• Aventa comfort
For further details on connecting and
controlling these items, and iNet contact your
dealer.
Safety instructions
• Operate the Truma CP plus control panel
only if it is in technically perfect condition.
• Repairs must be carried out immediately.
Only carry out repairs yourself if the solution
is described in the troubleshooting guide of
this manual.
103
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Display and control elements
Rotate anticlockwise
• Menu is run through from
right to left.
• Decrease values (-).
Tapping
• Accept (save) a selected
value.
• Select a menu item, change
to the setting level.
1 = Display
Long Press
2 = Status bar
• Main switch function ON / OFF.
3 = Menu bar (upper)
• Note: If an iNet Box was recognised while
searching for an appliance, the function of
the rotary push button changes.
4 = Menu bar (lower)
5 = 230 V mains supply indicator (power)
6 = Time switch display
Back Button
8 = Rotary push button
Pressing the Back button (9) returns you from
a menu and discards settings. This means that
the previous values are retained.
9 = Back button
Initial Set-Up
The menus can be selected in lines (3 + 4) and
settings can be made using the rotary push
button (8). The display (1) has an illuminated
background. The Back button (9) can be used
to return from a menu.
In order to perform the initial start-up, the
following steps are required:
7 = Settings / Values
Rotary push button
Setpoints and parameters can be selected,
modified and saved by tapping on it using the
rotary push button (8). Selected menu items
flash.
Rotate clockwise
• Menu is run through from
left to right.
• Increase values (+).
• Switch on power supply. 12V direct voltage
for CP plus control panel and Combi and
230V mains voltage for air conditioning
systems and Combi E.
• Start the search of the appliances under
menu item
“Service menu” –> “RESET” –> “PR SET”.
After confirmation,Truma CP plus control panel
initialises itself. “INIT ..” appears on the display
while this is in progress. This stores in the
Truma CP plus control panel the appliances
that have been found.
Note: This initial set up will have been
undertaken prior to delivery of your
motorhome.
104
Switch off
Start/Stand by screen
• Press rotary push button for longer than 4
seconds.
After connecting the control panel to the
power supply, a start screen is shown after a
few seconds.
• “OFF” appears after another 2 seconds.
• The Truma CP plus control panel
deactivation procedure can be delayed by
several minutes because of internal heating
or air conditioning system after-runs.
Change the room temperature
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Start-Up
• Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
Note:
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• The display changes between the time
and the set room temperature.
• Depending on the appliance that is
connected, select between heating system
(HEATER) or air conditioning system (AC) or
automatic air conditioning system1 (AUTO)
using the rotary push button.
• Special displays on command via
Truma App, IR remote control of the
air conditioning system (see “Special
displays” on page 113).
• After a repair / retrofit, the procedure
described under “Initial start-up” must be
repeated.
• Tap rotary push button to confirm selection.
• Select desired temperature with rotary push
button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Functions
The functions in the menu bars (3, 4) of the
Truma CP plus control panel are selectable
in any order. The operating parameters
are shown on the status bar (2) and on the
displays (5, 6).
Select setting level
Heater
• Tap rotary push button.
Settable temperature range 5 - 30°C
(1°C steps)
The display shows the setting level. The first
icon flashes.
a = heater2 – Heater is switched on.
Air conditioning system (AC)
(when connected/when AC is fitted)
Settable temperature range 16 – 31°C
(1 °C steps)
Switching on and off
Switch on
• Tap rotary push button.
• Previously set values / operating parameters
are reactivated after switching on
b = COOL* - Air conditioning system is
switched on
c = AUTO - Air conditioning system is set to
automatic
d = HOT
- Air conditioning system is in
heating mode.
e = VENT - Air conditioning system is in air
circulation mode
105
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Notes: Quick temperature change using
rotary push button possible (in Stand-by
screen).
Automatic air conditioning system (AUTO)
only if “ACC” has been activated in the
service menu (see “Service menu” on page
111). This is deactivated at the factory.
1
Symbol flashes until the desired room
temperature is reached.
Change the hot water level
Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Select desired level with rotary push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
2
Automatic air-conditioning system (AUTO)
Settable temperature range 18 – 25°C
(1°C steps)
Automatic switch over between heater and
air conditioning system for an approximately
constant temperature on the inside.
f = AUTO - Automatic air-conditioning
system is activated
Requirements for operation with automatic airconditioning system:
• The heater and air conditioning system must
be connected.
• Automatic air-conditioning system “ACC”
must be activated in the service menu (see
“Service menu” on page 111).
– = OFF - H
ot water generator is switched
off.
a = Boiler1 - H
ot water generator is switched
on.
b = Eco2
- Hot water temperature 40°C
c = Hot - Hot water temperature 60°C
d = Boost1 - T
argeted, rapid heating of
boiler contents (Boiler priority)
for a maximum time window
of 40 minutes. Then the water
temperature is kept at the
higher level for two post-heating
cycles (about 62°C). After
reaching the water temperature,
heating of the room continues.
Notes:
106
1
his symbol flashes until the required water
T
temperature has been reached.
2
hot water temperature can only be
A
maintained with combined room and water
heating for a limited time at 40°C.
Special fixtures in the mixed mode
• Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
• Interruption of the mains voltage 230V:
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Select desired energy source with rotary
push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
The heating system switches automatically
into gas mode. As soon as the 230V power
supply has been restored, the heating
system automatically switches back to mixed
mode.
• Fault in combustion procedure (e.g. lack of
fuel).
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Select energy source
The heating system switches automatically
into electrical mode. For the heater
to operate in mixed mode again, the
cause of the fault must be remedied and
acknowledged on the Truma CP plus control
panel. See “Fault” on page 114.
Symbol
Operating mode
Power type
a
Gas
Gas
b
MIX 1
Gas + Electro
c
MIX 2
Gas + Electro
d
EL 1
Electro
e
EL 2
Electro
As soon as the heater is switched on (room
temperature, hot water level active), the
status line shows the energy type selected in
the previous heating procedure. The factory
setting is gas / diesel.
The heater automatically switches to the gas
mode. As soon as the 230 V power supply
is reconnected, the heater automatically
switches back to the mixed mode.
Special features in electric mode
Combi Gas
• If the 230 V power supply is interrupted and
the 12 V supply is switched on, a fault code
is shown on the display.
• When the 230 V power supply has been
restored, the heater is automatically started
with the existing settings. The fault code
goes off.
107
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Select fan level
With connected heating / air conditioning
system
• Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Select desired fan level with rotary push
button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Heater (HEATER)
Icon
–
OFF
an lead to additional motor wear
C
depending on frequency of use.
Fan level “HIGH” results in higher power
consumption, higher noise level and increased motor wear.
2 As soon as the heater is switched on (room
temperature, hot water level selected) the
status bar (2) displays the fan level that was
selected during the previous heating procedure. The factory setting is “ECO”.
Icon
Operating
mode
–
OFF
Description
Fan is switched off
(only selectable if
no appliance is in
operation).
a
-
b
LOW
Low fan level
Fan is switched off
(only selectable if
no appliance is in
operation).
c
MID
Medium fan level
d
HIGH
High fan level
e
NIGHT
Ultra-quiet fan
operation
AUTO
Automatic fan level
selection.
Cannot be changed
in AUTO mode.
Circulated air,
when no appliance
is in operation
and the hot water
generator is
switched off. 10
speed settings
available.
VENT1
b
ECO
Low fan level
c
HIGH2
High fan level
BOOST
1
Description
a
d
108
Operating
mode
Note:
Rapid room
heating. Available
if the difference
between the
selected and
the actual room
temperature is
>10 °C
f
Automatic air-conditioning system
(AUTO), When connected/When AC is
fitted
Not possible to select the fan level with the
automatic air conditioning system.
• The fan level of the air conditioning system is
determined automatically.
• Only “ECO” is available for heaters.
12hour mode
! WARNING:
Danger of toxic exhaust fumes.
The activated time switch switches on the
heater even when the vehicle is parked.
The heater’s exhaust can be toxic in closed
spaces (e.g. garages, workshops). If the
vehicle is parked in closed rooms:
• Shut off the fuel supply (gas or diesel) to
the heater.
• Deactivate the time switch of the Truma
CP plus control panel (OFF).
• Switch off the heater on the Truma CP
plus control panel.
Note:
• When air conditioning systems are being
operated, the time switch of the Truma CP
plus control panel must only be used to
clearly define the start and end time for a
required period of time.
• If the time switch has been activated
(ON), the deactivate time switch menu is
displayed first (OFF).
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Set time switch
Entering the end time
• Set the hours then the minutes with the
rotary push button.
24hour mode
12hour mode
• Select icon in menu bar (4) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
Enter start tme
• Set the hours then the minutes with the
rotary push button.
24hour mode
Note: If the start/end point was exceeded
during entry, the operating parameters are
not taken into consideration until the next
start/end point has been reached. Until then,
the operating parameters that have been set
outside the time switch remain valid.
Set the room temperature
• Select the heater, air conditioning system
or AUTO using the rotary push button,
depending on the appliance that is
connected.
• Tap rotary push button to confirm selection.
• Select required room temperature with rotary
push button.
109
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Note: The Select fan level menu is only
available if the heater / hot water level has
been set. Not available with automatic air
conditioning system AUTO.
Activate time switch (ON)
Set the hot water level
• Activate time switch with rotary push button
(ON).
• Select required hot water level with rotary
push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Select energy source
• Select required energy source with rotary
push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Note:
• The time switch remains active until it is
deactivated (OFF), even for several days.
• If the time switch is programmed and
active, the time switch icon flashes.
Deactivate time switch (OFF)
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Deactivate time switch with rotary push
button (OFF).
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Note: The select energy type menu is
displayed if a heating system with electric
heating elements is connected.
Select fan level
• Select desired fan level with rotary push
button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Switch lighting on/off
Available when air conditioning system is
connected and only with Aventa comfort or
Aventa eco air conditioners.
• Select icon in menu bar (4) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Select required function with rotary push
button.
110
- S
witch lighting on.
Brightness selectable in 5 levels.
OFF - Switch lighting off.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Service menu
1. Calibrating the room temperature
sensor of the heater (OFFSET)
The room temperature sensor of the heater
can be individually adjusted to the sensor’s
installation situation. The setting can be made
in increments of 0.5°C within the range of 0°C
to -5°C.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
1 – 5
Set time
24hour mode
Example:
Set room temperature 23 °C;
OFFSET = -1 °C;
• Setpoint value for heater = 22 °C
Presetting: 0 °C (Celsius).
2. AC SET1,2
(When air conditioner is connected/fitted)
12hour mode
• With the rotary push button (8), select the
“Set time“ symbol in the menu bar (4).
The hour display flashes.
• Set the hours with rotary push button (8).
• The minutes display flashes when the rotary
push button (8) is tapped again.
• Set the minutes with rotary push button (8).
• Tap the rotary push button (8) to confirm the
value.
The sensed room temperature can – during
operation of the automatic air conditioning
system – be perceived differently during cooling than during heating. “AC SET” is used to
set an offset between cooling and heating. The
setting can be made in increments of 0.5 °C
within the range of 0 °C to +5 °C.
Example:
Set room temperature 23 °C;
AC SET = 2 °C
• Setpoint value for air conditioning system
= 25 °C
Presetting: +1°C (Celsius)
Notes:
1
Only available if the air conditioning system
and heater are connected.
2
Only available if ACC is set to “ON”.
111
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
3. ACC1
(When air conditioner is connected/fitted)
• with good circulation and not on the vehicle
ceiling.
The automatic air conditioning system function
AUTO is activated or blocked with “ACC”.
Truma dealers / Truma partners are trained
in correctly installing the automatic air
conditioning system. You can find Truma
partners at www.truma.com.
ON
-T
he automatic air conditioning
system function AUTO is activated.
Automatic air conditioning system
function AUTO can be selected in
the Room temperature menu.
- “AC SET” appears in the Service
menu.
OFF -T
he automatic air conditioning
system function AUTO is blocked.
4. °C / °F temperature display
Select the temperature display °C (Celsius) or
°F (Fahrenheit).
Presetting: °C (Celsius).
Presetting: OFF
Note:
The function of the Truma automatic air
conditioning system depends on proper
installation. Your Truma dealer/ partner
would be pleased to advise you whether
your vehicle is suitable.
Requirements for the automatic air
conditioning system functioning as expected:
1. The air conditioning system and heater
cover the entire area of the vehicle that
is supposed to be automatically air
conditioned.
2. The room temperature sensor of the heater
is the lead sensor of the automatic air
conditioning system and must therefore be
in a suitable location, i.e.
• in the area in which the required room
temperature should be reached.
• if possible not influenced by the outside
temperature and sunlight.
• not near to warm air ducts, cold air ducts
or other sources of heat.
112
• warm or cold air from the air outlets must
not flow against the room temperature
sensor. particular attention must be paid
to this when adjusting the air throttles on
Aventa air conditioning systems.
5. Changing the background lighting
Change the background lighting of the Truma
CP plus control panel in 10 levels.
6. 12 h / 24 h mode
Display time in 12 h (a. m., p. m.) / 24 h mode.
Presetting: 24 h mode.
Perform Reset
Select the desired language
(German, English, French, Italian).
• Select “RESET” with the rotary push
button (8).
• Tap on the rotary push button (8)
• “PR SET” appears in the display.
• Tap the rotary push button (8) to confirm.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
7. Change language
Presetting: English
8. Showing the version number
Display version number of heater, air
conditioning system,
After confirmation, the Truma CP plus control
panel initialises itself.
Truma CP plus control panel or iNetBox.
“INIT..” appears on the display while this is in
progress.
Special displays
230V mains voltage available
Example:
The icon signals that 230 V mains power
supply is available.
H 1.20.01 –> H = appliance; 1.20.01 =
version number
Appliance
C = Truma CP plus control panel
C = Truma CP plus control panel
SMART Command
A = Air conditioning system
H = Heater
T = Truma iNet Box
9. Presetting (RESET)
The reset function resets the Truma CP plus
control panel back to the factory setting. All
settings will be deleted. Newly connected
appliances are recognised and saved in the
Truma CP plus control panel.
• Switch on the power supply
12 V direct voltage for CP plus control panel
and Combi and230 V mains voltage for air
conditioning systems and Combi E.
Truma app with iNet Box (when fitted)
When a command is snet via the Truma APP
of a mobile terminal device, “APP” appears in
the display.
Infrared (IR) remote control
(air conditioning system when fitted)
When a command is sent via infrared remote
control of air conditioning system, “IR” appears
in the display.
External control panel (CI-BUS)
(when fitted)
When a command is sent via an external
control panel with CU-BUS, “CI” appears in
the display.
Note: The Truma CP plus control panel
CI-BUS is the company’s own variant that is
configured only at the factory.
113
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
! Warning
This symbol indicates that an operating
parameter has reached an undefined state.
In this case the appliance concerned
continues to operate. As soon as the operating
parameter is within the target range again,
this symbol goes off again automatically.
Read out code of warning
• Select icon with rotary push button.
• Tap the rotary push button.
The current warning code will be displayed.
The cause of the warning can be
determined and remedied with the aid of the
troubleshooting guide (from page 115).
W=
Warning
42 = Fault code
H=
Device
H = Heater
A = Air conditioning system
Fault
In the event of a fault, the Truma CP plus
control panel immediately jumps to the
“Fault” menu level and displays the fault code
of the fault. The cause of the fault can be
determined and remedied with the aid of the
troubleshooting guide (from page 115).
E = Fault
112 = Fault code
H = Device
H = Heater
A = Air conditioning system
Cause eliminated / return to setting level
• Tap the rotary push button.
• The respective appliance is restarted.
Note: This can take several minutes
because of internal after-runs of connected
appliances.
If the cause has not been remedied, the fault
will occur again and the control panel will jump
to the “Fault” menu level again.
Cause not eliminated, / return to the setting level
Cause eliminated / return to setting level
• Tap the rotary push button.
Cause not eliminated / return to the
setting level
• Press the Back button.
Note: In this case, the warning in the
Truma CP plus control panel has not been
acknowledged and the warning symbol
remains. The affected appliance remains in
warning status. Other connected appliances
can be operated.
114
• Press the Back button.
Note: In this case, the fault in the Truma
CP plus control panel has not been
acknowledged and the warning symbol
remains. The appliance remains in fault
state. Other connected appliances can be
operated.
TRUMA TROUBLESHOOTING
Error
code
Cause
Remedy
#17
• Summer mode with empty water
container
• Switch device off and allow to cool. Fill boiler with
water
#18
• Warm air outlet blocked
• Check each of the outlet openings
• Circulated air intake blocked
• Remove the blockage from the circulated air intake
#21
• Room temperature sensor or cable
faulty
• Inspect the room temperature sensor cable, replace
if faulty
• Check the resistance of the room temperature
sensor. 15°C – 16.2 kOhm / 20°C – 12.6 kOhm /
25°C – 10.0 kOhm Replace the room temperature
sensor if faulty
#24
• Risk of low voltage. Battery voltage is
too low < 10.4 V
• Charge battery
#29
• Frost Control heating element has a
short circuit
• Disconnect heating element plug from electronic
control unit. Replace heating element
#42
• Open window above cowl (window
switch)
• Close the window
#43
• Over-voltage > 16.4V
• Check battery voltage / voltage sources such as
the charger
#44
• Low voltage. Battery voltage is too low
< 10.0 V
• Charge battery. If necessary replace old battery
#45
• No 230 V operating voltage
• Restore 230V operating voltage
• Faulty 230V fuse
• Replace 230V fuse
• Overheating protection has triggered
• Please contact Truma Service
• Gas cylinder or quick-acting valve in
the gas supply line closed.
• Check gas supply and open valves
#202
#121
• Gas pressure regulation system iced up
• Use regulator heater (EisEx)
• Butane content in the gas cylinder too
high
• Use propane. Butane is unsuitable for heating,
particularly at temperatures lower than 10°C.
• Combustion air infeed or exhaust outlet
is sealed
• Inspect openings for obstructions (slush, ice, leaves,
etc.) and remove any obstructions
• Gas pressure regulation system faulty
• Inspect / replace gas pressure regulation system
• Electronic system faulty
• Please contact Truma Service
• Heater has no 12 V power supply
• Ensure that the 12V power supply is available
• No connection between heater and
control panel
• Make connection between heater and control panel
• Control panel cable faulty
• Please contact the Truma Service
#112
#211
#122
#212
#255
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Troubleshooting instructions (Combi Gas heater)
If these measures do not remedy the fault or if fault codes are displayed that you cannot find in the troubleshooting guide, contact Truma Service.
115
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER
Truma Combi 4E/6E
Function description
The liquid gas heater Combi E is a warm-air
heater with integrated hot water boiler (10 liter
volume). The burner operates fan-supported,
which ensures trouble-free function even
when on the move. The unit also has heating
elements for electrical operation.
In winter operation the heater can be used to
heat the room and simultaneously warm water.
If only warm water is required, select summer
operation.
3 different options are available for operating
the unit.
• gas operation only Propane / Butane for
autonomous use
• electrical operation only 230 V for stationary
use on camp sites
• combined gas and electrical operation
(winter mode only)
Winter operation
In winter operation, the unit automatically
selects the required power setting according
to the temperature difference between the
temperature set on the control panel and the
current room temperature. When the boiler
is filled, the water is automatically heated as
well. The water temperature depends on the
selected operational mode and the heater
output.
If more output is required (e.g. heating up
or low outside temperatures) gas or mixed
operation should be selected so that enough
heating power is always available.
With mixed operation, 230 V electrical
operation is preferred if the power
requirement is low (e.g. for maintaining the
room temperature). The gas burner is not
enabled until the power requirement is higher,
and is the first to switch off during heat-up
operations.
Summer operation (boiler operation only)
Gas operation or 230 V electrical operation
is used for hot water preparation. The water
temperature can be set to 40 °C or 60 °C.
With gas operation the water is heated at
the lowest burner setting. Once the water
temperature is reached, the burner switches
off.
Depending on the fuse protection at the
camping site, power of 900 W (3.9 A) or
1800 W (7.8 A) can be manually selected for
electrical operation.
Mixed operation is not possible. With this
setting the unit automatically selects electrical
operation. The gas burner is not enabled.
Repairs may only be carried out by
an expert
Guarantee claims, warranty claims and
acceptance of liability will be ruled out in the
event of the following:
All 3 energy selection options can be used for
winter deployment.
– modifications to the unit
(including accessories),
With gas operation the unit automatically
selects the output level that is required.
– modifications to the exhaust duct and
the cowl,
Depending on the fuse protection at the
camping site, power of 900 W (3.9 A) or
1800 W (7.8 A) can be manually selected for
electrical operation.
– failure to use original Truma parts as
replacement parts and accessories,
– failure to follow the installation and operating
instructions.
It also becomes illegal to use the appliance,
and in some countries this even makes it illegal
to use the vehicle.
During the initial operation of a brand new
appliance (or after it has not been used for
some time), a slight amount of fumes and
116
Heat-sensitive objects such as spray cans
or flammable liquids may not be stored in
the same compartment where the heater is
installed because, under certain conditions,
this area may be subject to elevated
temperatures.
Important operating notes
! WARNING: Care should be taken to
ensure adequate ventilation of the flue at all
times. It is inadvisable to inhale exhaust fumes.
For operating on gas turn on gas cylinder and
open the shut off valve at the manifold.
For operating on electric operate the heater
/ heating system heater switch on the power
supply unit. See page 72.
Summer operation (boiler operation only)
The integrity and tight fit of the exhaust gas
double duct must be checked regularly,
particularly at the end of long trips. Also check
the mounting of the appliance and the cowl.
Mixed operation (gas and electrical) is not
possible in summer mode. With this setting the
unit automatically selects electrical operation
with a preselected power setting of 900 W or
1800 W.
Following a blow-back (misfire) always have
the exhaust gas system checked by an expert!
Winter operation
Always keep the cowl for the exhaust duct and
combustion air intake free of contamination
(slush, ice, leaves etc.).
The hot air outlets and the recirculated air
intake openings must be free so that the unit
does not overheat. The integrated temperature
limiter blocks the gas supply when the unit
becomes too hot.
Operating Instructions
Always observe the operating instructions and
“Important operating notes” prior to starting!
The vehicle owner is responsible for the
correct operation of the appliance.
Before using for the first time, it is essential to
flush the entire water supply system through
with clean water. If the heater is not being
used, always drain the water contents if there
is a risk of frost. There shall be no claims under
guarantee for damage caused by frost!
Taking into operation
Heating is possible without restrictions with
gas, electrical and mixed operation, with or
without water.
Check to make sure the cowl is unobstructed.
Be sure to remove any covers that may be
present.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
smell may be noticed for a short while.
It is a good idea to heat the device up several
times in summer operation (60 °C) and to
make sure that the area is well ventilated.
Heating with water temperature
monitoring
The device automatically selects the
required power setting in accordance with
the temperature difference between the
temperature selected on the control panel
and the current room temperature. When the
room temperature selected on the control
panel is reached, the heater switches back to
the smallest setting and heats the water to 60
°C. Once the water temperature is reached,
the heater switches off and the yellow LED (p)
goes out. The warm air fan can continue to run
in order to cool the unit (after-run).
Heating without water temperature
monitoring
The device automatically selects the
required power setting in accordance with
the temperature difference between the
temperature selected on the control panel and
the current room temperature. Once the room
temperature selected on the control panel has
been reached, the heater switches off. The
warm air fan continues to run at slow speed
until the outgoing air temperature (on the unit)
has fallen to 40°C or less.
If the boiler is filled, the water will automatically
be heated at the same time.
117
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER
The water temperature is then dependent
on the heating output being given off, and
the duration of heating required to reach the
desired room temperature.
Heating with drained water system
Depending on the operating mode, the unit
will automatically select the required power
level according to the temperature difference
between the setting on the control panel and
the current room temperature. Once the room
temperature selected on the control panel has
been reached, the heater switches off.
The warm air fan continues to run at slow
speed until the outgoing air temperature (on
the unit) has fallen to 40°C or less.
Filling the water heater
Switch on power for water pump (main or
pump switch).
Open hot water taps in kitchen and bathroom,
(set preselecting mixing taps or single-lever
fittings to “hot”). Leave the fittings open for as
long as it takes for the boiler to displace the
air and fill up, and the water to flow without
interruption.
If just the cold water system is being operated,
without using the water heater, the heater tank
also fills up with water. To avoid frost damage,
the boiler must be drained through the drain
valve, even if the boiler was not operated.
When connecting to a central water supply
(rural or city mains), a pressure reduction valve
must always be installed to prevent pressures
above 2.8 bar from developing in the water
heater.
Draining the water heater
Switch off power to water pump (main or
pump switch).
Open hot water taps in kitchen and bathroom.
In order to check the water that is flowing out,
place an appropriate container (capacity 10
litres) beneath the drain valve.
Open the drain valve which is situated next to
the boiler by lifting the yellow handle into the
vertical position.
Check whether all of the water in the boiler (10
itres) has been drained into the container via
the drain valve.
There shall be no claims under guarantee
for damage caused by frost!
118
Fuses 230 V
Only original Truma parts may be used for
maintenance and repair work! Materials in the
device which come into contact with water
are suitable for use with drinking water (see
manufacturer‘s declaration: www.truma.com /
downloads / manufacturer‘s declaration).
The fuse and the power supply lines must only
be replaced by an expert!
Bio-film, deposits and limescale must be
removed using chemicals to protect the unit
from infestation by microorganisms.
The fuse is in the power electronics (16)
beneath the electronic housing lid.
Only chloride-free products must be used in
order to prevent damage to the unit.
The unit must be disconnected from the mains
(all poles) before opening the electronic
housing lid.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Maintenance
This fine fuse must always be replaced with a
fuse of the same type: 10 A, slow, interrupting
capacity “H”.
The effectiveness of the use of chemicals to
combat microorganisms in the unit can be
increased by heating the water in the boiler to
70 °C at regular intervals.
The unit must stay switched on for at least 30
minutes and no warm water may be removed.
The residual heat in the heat exchanger will
heat the water up to 70 °C.
Fuses 12 V
The fuse is in the electronics beneath the
connection cover.
Replace the unit’s fuse only with an
identical fuse.
Device fuse: 10 A – slow – (T 10 A)
Overheating protection 230 V
The 230 V heating facility has a mechanical
overheating switch. If the 12 V power supply
is interrupted during operation or during the
after-run period, for example, the temperatures
within the unit could activate the overheating
protection.
To reset the overheating protection, allow
heater to cool, remove connection cover and
press red reset button.
119
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER
Technical data
Determined in accordance with EN 624 or
Truma test conditions
Device category
I3 B/P in accordance with EN 437
Type of gas
Liquid gas (propane/butane)
Operating pressure
30mbar (see type plate)
Water contents
10 litres
Heating up time from approx 15OC to 60OC
Boiler approx 20 minutes (measure according
to EN15033)
Heater + boiler approx 80 min
Water pressure
max 2.8 bar
Rated thermal output
(automatic output levels)
Gas operation
Combi 4 E: 2000 W / 4000 W
Combi 6 E: 2000 W / 4000 W / 6000W
Electrical operation
Combi 4 E / Combi 6 E: 900 W / 1800 W
Mixed operation (gas and electrical)
Combi 4 E: max. 3800 W
Combi 6 E: max. 5800 W
Gas consumption
Combi 4 E: 160-320 g/h
Combi 6 E: 160-480 g/h
Readiness-heat power requirement Combi 4 E
/ Combi 6 E:
Gas operation 5.2 g/h
Air delivery volume
(free-blowing without hot-air pipe)
Combi 4 E:
with 3 hot-air outlets max. 249 m3/h
with 4 hot-air outlets max. 287 m3/h
Combi 6 E:
with 4 hot-air outlets max. 287 m3/h
120
Current input at 12 V
heater +boiler
Combi 4 E: Short-term max. 5.6 A (average
power consumption 1.1 A)
Combi 6 E: Short-term max. 5.6 A (average
power consumption 1.3 A)
Heating up of boiler: 0.4 A
Stand-by: 0.001 A
Heating element FrostControl (optional):
maximum 0.4 A
TRUMA COMBI 4E/6E BOILER
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fault
Cause
Rectification
After switching on
(winter and summer
operation) none
of the controls are
operational.
- No operating voltage.
- Check 12 V battery voltage,
charge if necessary.
The unit is switched
on, but the heater
does not operate.
- The temperature setting
on the control panel is
lower than the room
temperature.
- Select higher room temperature at the
control panel.
After operating for a
longer period of time,
the heater switches
to failure.
- Summer operation with
empty
water tank.
- Switch device off and allow to cool.
Fill boiler with water.
- Hot-air outlets blocked.
- Check individual outlet apertures.
- Recirculated air intake
blocked.
- Remove blockage from recirculated
air intake.
- Gas pressure regulator
iced up
- Use regulator heating (EisEx).
- Device fuse or vehicle
fuse defective.
- Check the unit or vehicle fuse and
replace if necessary
(see fuses).
- Butane content in the gas
cylinder
too high.
Fan continues to
run after controls
switched off
When the device
is switched on in
electrical operation,
the heater does not
heat up.
- Check all electrical plug connections.
- Use propane (at temperatures below 10
°C in particular, butane is unsuitable for
heating purposes).
- Unit was switched off
during failure. Afterrunning is active in order
to reduce the unit’s
temperature.
- After-running will switch off after a few
minutes. Only at that time will a failure
reset be possible (switch off and then
back on).
- After-running is active in
order to reduce the unit’s
temperature.
- No failure. After-running will switch off
after approximately 5 minutes.
- No 230 V operating
voltage.
- Check 230 V operating voltage, and
settings on power supply unit
(EC400/ES600)
- 230 V fuse defective.
- Overheating protection
has activated
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Troubleshooting
- Check 230 V fuse and replace if
necessary.
- Reset overheating protection. Allow
heater to cool, remove connection
cover and press reset button.
If these measures do not remove
the failure, please contact the Truma
Service Centre.
121
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
BLOWN AIR OUTLETS
Truma heating system and air flow
The Swift Group undertakes considerable
testing of our products in cold chambers to
ensure they meet the BS EN 1649 Grade 3
standard and are usable in cold temperatures.
Butterfly outlets
The air ducting outlets on models equipped
with Truma Combi heating systems, are of the
butterfly type. These may be opened or closed
by moving the flap within the fitting, to adjust
the balance of the heating output throughout
the caravan. This can help offset differences
in blown air output, between outlets close to
the heating appliance, and those at a greater
distance away from the heating appliance.
This can also help adjust the temperature of
the bathroom, relative to the temperature of
the main living area and/or bedroom.
When these outlet butterflies are closed
in conjunction with a high heating system
output, and therefore a high fan speed, a
slight whistling sound can occur. In this case,
opening the outlet slightly will reduce or
remove the noise.
Closing too many outlets when the heating
system is producing a high output, can
cause the appliance to reach high operating
temperatures. This does not in general terms
affect the appliance, but it can cause the
appliance to automatically shut down.
This can cause an interruption of the heating
of the caravan, how ever heating will resume
when the appliance temperatures have
reduced to a lower level.
The output of the appliance, and therefore the
output of the blown air outlets, will generally be
higher when using Gas or Dual Fuel operation.
Electric only operation of the heating is rated
at up to 1.8kw, whereas Gas (or Dual Fuel)
operation is rated at up to 4kw (3.8kw) or 6kw
(5.8kw), depending which model of Combi is
fitted.
122
The blown air fittings can also be rotated to
adjust the direction of air leaving the outlet,
as shown in the photo below.
Blown air
The air ducting outlets are generally of the
butterfly type and may be opened or closed by
adjusting the butterfly valves. Twisting the disc
in its housing directs the flow in the direction
required.
Some outlets do not feature butterfly valves
and must remain fully open.
One outlet on each leg of the air ducting layout
must be kept open at all times. Under no
circumstances should the air ducting outlets
be blocked.
ALDE CONTROL PANEL
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Alde 3020 - HE
The Alde 3020 Compact HE control panel
has two hard buttons and a non-capacitive,
colour touchscreen interface. The soft buttons
displayed on the screen are operated by
touching the screen with your finger.
Important: Please read the Alde 3020
Compact HE operating instructions fully
before using the system
Control of Alde system via Swift
Command
The Alde system can also be controlled using
Swift Command. Please see details in the
electrical section of this handbook for further
details.
1. Starting the system
i. Both the control panel and boiler are off.
The system will now be drawing variable
0.1–1.5 A of current from the 12v supply.
2. Standby screen
The Standby Screen is displayed after the
Splash Screen. This screen contains useful
information about the status of your heating
system.
Note: If Standby Screen is set to “Dark” in
Backlight settings, the Standby Screen will
not be displayed, the screen will be dark
unless touched.
ii. To start the system, press the Power
button on the control panel. The Splash
Screen is displayed and green LED is lit.
The boiler will now start with the previously
saved settings (factory settings by default).
A. Clock
Clock is enabled. Day of the week and time
shown.
B. Outdoor temperature
Optional outdoor temperature sensor required.
123
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE CON TROL PANEL
C. Room temperature
Measured at the control panel.
(Optional discrete room temperature
sensors available).
D. Circulation pump
Central heating circulation pump is active.
ii. Main Menu.
a. What’s Activated Menu
[Not displayed if no activated functions are
detected.]
b. Settings Menu
E. Delayed start
Delayed Start/Cycle is enabled.
F. Day mode
Day Mode active.
G. Gas cylinder status
Gas Cylinder Status. Full/empty and active
EisEx shown. (Additional accessories required).
H. Night mode
Night Mode active.
I. 230v supply
If not displayed, the boiler is not receiving 230v
supply.
J. Power button
Press to switch system on-off. Lit green LED
indicates system is on.
K. Menu button
Press to access Main Menu from Standby
Screen or Settings Menu.
3. Main menu
Desired Room Temperature
The desired room temperature can be set from
5 to 30°C, in 0.5 increments.
Tip! T
he World Health Organisation
recommends a room temperature of
18–24°C for healthy living.
Note: If Day or Night Mode are active, the
temperature cannot be adjusted, the Plus
and Minus buttons will be greyed out.
Press MENU button to access the Main Menu
from the Standby Screen or Settings Menu.
The screen will revert to the Standby Screen
after 30 secs if untouched.
1. The current desired room temperature is
displayed.
i. Standby Screen. Press MENU button.
2. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button.
Domestic Hot Water
The Alde boiler stores 8.4 Litres of hot water
as standard. If the hot water cylinder is empty,
the air is heated but no damage can result.
Tip! In a good summer, for example, lower
the desired temperature on the control
panel to around 10°C. The central heating
will not circulate (unless the temperature
drops to 10°C), but you can still control
hot water.
Note: If Day or Night Mode’s Hot Water
Ignore is active, the hot water cannot be
adjusted, the Plus and Minus buttons will be
greyed out.
124
ii. H
ot Water Normal. Volume bar half-full. Hot
water is heated to greater than 50°C. NB: If
Circulation Pump is set to Continuous, this
option will not be available.
What’s Activated Menu
Press the A button to access the What’s
Activated Menu. This screen shows any
functions that are activated and allows direct
access to that function by pressing its button.
NB: The A button is not displayed if no
functions are activated.
iii. H
ot Water Boost. Volume bar full. Central
heating circulation is disabled for 30 mins.
Hot water is heated to greater than 65°C.
After 30 mins the system reverts to Hot
Water Normal.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
i. Hot Water Ignore. Volume bar empty.
No attempt is made to heat hot water
specifically. This saves energy when the
freshwater is drained down.
iv. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button.
Electric Heating
Check that 230v supply is displayed on the
Standby Screen. The Alde boiler is hard wired
to use power economically and there are times
when it may use no power at all, even if set to
3kW.
i. Select Off, 1, 2 or 3 kW electric heating.
More power equals better performance, but
may be restricted by the current (amps) limit
on the electric hook-up.
ii. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button.
Max current draw from 230 V supply is 4.5
A on 1 kW, 9 A on 2 kW, 14 A on 3 kW. If
the electric supply has unstable voltage, the
amperage will also fluctuate.
Gas Heating
The Alde boiler is hard wired to use power
economically. The gas burner has two stages,
shifting dynamically between low or full flame.
There are times when it may use no power at
all, even if gas heating is selected.
i. Press the Flame button to select gas heating.
Green is on, blue is off.
Use both gas and electric heating for best
performance.
Note: Not all Alde functions are relevant to a
motorhome installation, (activated functions
are shown below)
Activated Functions
Night Mode is enabled, but
may or may not be active,
depending on the time and
day.
Delayed Start/Cycle is
enabled, but may or may not
be active, depending on the
time and day.
Alde Smart-Control or
daisy-chained, third party
control panel is enabled. This
includes the Swift Command
system. Ensure this feature is
enabled.
Circulation Pump is set to
Continuous. NB: This will
reduce the hot water supply.
125
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE CON TROL PANEL
Day Mode is enabled, but
may or may not be active,
depending on the time and
day.
Load Monitor is enabled and
an amp limit is set.
(model specific)
Settings Menu
Press the Tool Button to access the Settings
Menu from the Main Menu. Lower level
functions can be accessed by from these
screens by pressing the buttons. NB: If a
function is not available its button is greyed
out.
To return to the Main Menu, press
the MENU button.
Delayed Start/Cycle (requires
Clock to be set)
llows you to programme the
A
boiler to start at a specified time
and day, weekly. It will provide
heating using the last saved
settings for 24 hours, before
automatically shutting down
again. This is recommended for
airing the vehicle over winter if
stored locally and hooked up
to 230 V power. Once Delayed
Start/Cycle is enabled, the system
should be shut down by pressing
the Power button.
here are four screens in the
T
Settings Menu. The up/down
arrows allow you to navigate
between them.
Night Mode (requires Clock to
be set)
llows you to programme the
A
boiler to automatically change
and select settings at night. Set
a start and stop time for the
night-time period. Set a day of the
week, or “All” for the same daily
programme. You can also define:
• Desired room temperature
• Invert Standby Screen
• Hot water ignore
•Temperature sensor (if discrete
room temperature sensors are
connected)
• AC Quiet Mode (if Truma Aventa
Comfort air-conditioning unit is
connected)
Day Mode (requires Clock to
be set)
llows you to programme the
A
boiler to automatically change and
select settings during the day.
Set a start and stop time for the
day-time period. Set a day of the
week, or “All” for the same daily
programme. You can also define:
• Desired room temperature
• Hot water ignore
Clock
Temperature Offset
he clock must be set for
T
programmable functions to
activate at the correct time/day. If
12 V power is lost, the clock will
reset.
ecalibrate the room temperature
R
displayed by the control panel in
0.5 °C increments. If an outdoor
temperature sensor is connected,
this can also be recalibrated.
TiP! The optional Alde 3010-414 battery
backup uses two AA batteries and allows
the clock memory to be stored even if
12 V power is lost.
126
Navigation Arrows
Return
Return to the previous menu.
elect whether to prioritise gas
S
heating or electric heating, when
using both. Less demand will be
placed on the non-prioritised fuel.
TiP! If you’re hooked up to a site with a flat
rate 230 V supply, but still want the extra
performance from gas heating, prioritise
electric heating to save money on gas.
Pump Manual
12 V.
For the 12V inline
circulation pump with
manual 5-speed dial.
Pump
Remote 12 V
For the remote-controlled
12 V inline circulation
pump. Pump speed can
also be set. Speed 2 is
recommended. Speed 4–5
should only be used prior
to bleeding the system
of air.
Optional
Pump 12 V.
For the optional 12V
circulation pump in the
expansion tank.
Pump 230 V.
For the 230V inline
circulation pump
Button Sound
Bleep when a button is pressed.
Backlight
he brightness of the Standby
T
Screen can be adjusted from 1–3.
The display mode of the Standby
Screen can also be set.
Dark. The Standby Screen is deactivated,
the control panel may appear dormant
except for the power LED. Pressing the
screen will activate the Standby Screen for
30 secs. Suited for use in dark/night-time
conditions.
Bright. The Standby Screen shows dark
characters on a light background. Suited for
use in bright/day-time conditions.
Invert. The Standby Screen shows light
characters on a dark background. Suited for
low light conditions.
Antimicrobial (requires Clock
to be set)
ot Water Boost will automatically
H
activate at 02:00 every morning.
This further reduces the risk of
Legionella bacteria.
Circulation Pump
elect which circulation pump
S
to use for the central heating,
depending on what pumps are
installed. (your motorhome is
fitted with ‘pump manual 12V’).
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Prioritise
Auto.
Automatically selects the
230V pump when a 230V
supply is detected, or
the optional 12V pump
when only 12V supply is
available.
Pump mode can also be set.
Cont. The pump is continuously active. This
will reduce the hot water supply. For testing
the circulation pump in the summer, if room
temperature exceeds 30°C.
Thermo. The pump is controlled by the room
thermostat.
External Switch
llows you to use a third party,
A
external switch to start up and
shutdown the boiler. When the
external switch starts the boiler,
it will provide heating using the
last saved settings. Once External
Switch is enabled, the system
should be shut down by pressing
the Power button. The external
switch then takes control of the
boiler.
127
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE CON TROL PANEL
Ext. When a circuit is made at X18 on the
boiler, the boiler is started. When the circuit
is broken, the boiler shuts down. For use
with a third party rocker or toggle switch,
or compatible telematics systems. NB: The
Alde 3010-219 adaptor lead is available for
connecting an external switch.
230V. When 230V is detected, the boiler
is started. When 230V supply is lost, the
boiler shuts down. No additional accessories
required.
Off. External Switch is disabled.
TiP! Hiring out a vehicle? Your customers can
operate the central heating/hot water
with a convenient wall switch, whilst
the control panel is fitted in a locked
maintenance cupboard with a discrete
room temperature sensor. On-off, no
hassles.
Language
Select English, French or German
language. NB: The Service Menu
is English language only.
Load Monitor
If an Alde 3010-246 load monitor
is installed, this allows you to
set an amp limit from 5–17 A
for the vehicle’s 230V power. If
the current drawn by the vehicle
exceeds the amp limit, the boiler
will automatically reduce power.
This helps avoid tripping the
circuit breakers on the electric
hook up. The load monitor can be
disabled by selecting “Off”.
Settings Menu
Press the Tool Button to access the Settings
Menu from the Main Menu. Lower level
functions can be accessed by from these
screens by pressing the buttons. NB: If a
function is not available its button is greyed
out.
128
Error Log
Press the Warning button to access the Error
Log from the Service Menu. The most recent
20 error messages are displayed. To verify an
error message, remove the system from the
12V and 230V supply. Wait 10 secs before
restoring 12V and 230V power to the system.
After fitting an accessory to the Alde 3020
Compact HE, it must be installed in the control
panel software by ticking the box for that
accessory in the Installed Accessories Menu,
unless otherwise noted. Press the Installed
Accessories button to access the menu from
the Settings Menu.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Installed Accessories Menu
Reset
Press Reset to restore factory default settings,
and the Error Log will be cleared. NB: The
Main Menu will be set to 22°C, Hot Water
Normal, 1 kW electric heating and gas heating.
Note: Using Reset to restore factory
default settings does not clear Installed
Accessories.
Fig 1
4. Shutting down the system
To save energy, the control panel only updates
the boiler after the last adjustment is made.
Wait 10 secs before shutting down the system
to ensure the boiler is updated.
Fig 2
Press the Power button again. The screen
goes dark, the green LED is unlit. The system
is off.
Fig 3
Fig 4
129
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE CON TROL PANEL
Setup Standby Screen for bedtime
The backlight on the Standby Screen can be
disturbing if the control panel is visible from
your bed. It can be inverted for white text on
black background.
i. Press Tool button to access the Settings
Menu (bottom right in Main Menu).
Fig 5
The following options are shown as standard.
Tick the box to install:
• Alde Smart Control, or third party control
panel (connected to JP3 on Alde control
panel) This feature must be enabled to allow
Swift Command system to control ALDE
system.
• Optional 12V circulation pump in expansion
tank (connected at X4 on boiler)
• Load Monitor (connected to X5 on boiler)
• 12V inline circulation pump with manual
5-speed dial
• Remote controlled 12V inline circulation
pump
• 230V inline circulation pump
5. Setup
How you set up your system will depend on
what accessories are installed and your user
preferences. To get you started, here’s how to
setup some of the more common features.
Restore default factory settings
Before using the system for the first time,
restore default factory settings. Your control
panel may have been tested by the dealer or
installer, and some settings may have been
changed unintentionally.
i. Press Tool button to access the Settings
Menu (bottom right in Main Menu).
ii. Press down arrow, until Reset button is
displayed.
iii. Press the Reset button to proceed
130
ii. Press down arrow, until Backlight button is
displayed.
iii. Press Backlight button, select Invert to
proceed.
Setup Antimicrobial function
To actively kill Legionella, setup the
Antimicrobial function. At 2:00 every night,
the hot water will be heated to over 65°C
for 30 mins. This further reduces the risk of
Legionella.
i. Press Tool button to access the Settings
Menu (bottom right in Main Menu).
ii. Press Clock button, set the time and day.
Press Return.
iii. Press down arrow, until Antimicrobial button
is displayed.
iv. Press Antimicrobial button to proceed.
ALDE HEATING TROUBLESHOOTING
No central heating
Any error messages will be displayed on the
Standby Screen. Error messages can be
cleared by switching off 12 V supply to the
boiler for 10 secs.
• Bleed the system of air.
The system is completely dead,
the control panel is blank
• Check the 20 mm T3.15 Amp glass fuse in
the boiler. This is located under the lid of the
black plastic service hatch, in a green plastic
fuse holder.
• Check the 12 V supply to the boiler, it should
be above 12 V.
• Check the 12 V cable is plugged into the
boiler. Check the cable is plugged into the
Alde control panel.
• Check the fluid level in the expansion tank.
• Check that the circulation pump is
responding.
• Check that hot water boost is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
• If electric heating is not being used, set it to
“Off” on the Alde control panel.
• Use gas and electric heating for best
performance.
• Check that vents in the furniture are not
obstructed.
• Check the condition of the heat transfer fluid.
The boiler will not ignite on gas, but no
error message
• Most vehicles will reach a comfortable
temperature within 40 mins, in non-extreme
conditions.
• The system may not need to use gas heating
if also using electric heating.
Circulation pump active even though
system is off
• The fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
• 12 V supply to the boiler dropped to 7 V
momentarily. Check 12 V supply for stability.
The boiler will not heat on 230 V electric
“Panel failure 1” & “Panel failure 2”
• Check the circuit breaker and any 230 V
fuses.
• Moisture is trapped in the control panel.
• Check that any 230 V isolator switches are
on (they will often have an LED indicator and
230V fuse).
• Check the 230 V supply to the vehicle.
• The fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
No hot water
• Check that Hot Water Ignore is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
• Check that Continuous pumping is not
activated on the Alde control panel.
• Check for other conflicting settings on the
Alde control panel.
• Check the fresh water supply and water
pump.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Troubleshooting
• Remove the Alde control panel from
the vehicle and air in a warm, dry place
overnight.
“Gas failure”
• Out of gas or gas is not igniting.
• Check the gas cylinder is full. Try a different
gas cylinder, ensuring it is propane gas.
• Check the gas regulator and any isolation
valves are open and not frozen.
“Overheat red fail” or “Overheat blue fail”
• Bleed the system of air.
• Check the fluid level in the expansion tank. It
should be 1 cm above Min mark when cool.
• Check the correct circulation pump is
installed, selected and responding.
• 12 V supply to the boiler dropped to 7 V
momentarily. Check 12 V supply for stability.
• Wait 15 mins for the fluid to cool down.
131
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING TROUBLESHOOTING
“Overheat PCB”
• Failsafe in boiler has triggered.
• Check the fluid level in the expansion tank.
It should be 1 cm above the Min mark when
cool.
• Check the boiler compartment is ventilated,
and that the vents are unobstructed. Do not
place stowage in the boiler compartment.
“Fan failure”
• Combustion fan speed too low. Bearing may
be stiff after a period of disuse.
• Automatically clears after 5 mins. Please try
again.
“Connection failure”
• Loose connection between Alde control
panel and boiler.
• Unplug cable at the control panel and boiler,
then carefully plug back in.
• Check there is slack on the cable at the
control panel, but not excessive weight from
free- hanging/unmanaged cable.
“Window open”
• Optional window sensor has triggered, gas
heating is suspended. Automatically clears
and gas heating resumes when window is
closed.
“3rd Party Panel C. Fail”
• Break in comms between Alde control panel
and third party control panel.
• Check the cable between the Alde control
panel and third party control panel.
• Third party control panel is installed in
software but not fitted.
• Untick “Third Party Panel” in Installed
Accessories Menu.
“Low battery”
• 12 V supply to boiler has dropped below
10.5 V, possibly causing system brownout.
• Automatically clears when 12 V supply
reaches 11 V.
“No match Heater/Panel”
• Control panel is incompatible with boiler
PCB.
132
• Check control panel part number. Control
panel 3020-013 is for 3020 A-series boiler,
3020-113 is for 3020 HE-series boiler.
If problems persist, please contact Alde, or
your dealer or installer.
For our frequently asked questions, or
download all instruction manuals, please visit
our website at: www.alde.co.uk
ALDE HEAT EXCHANGER
The Kon Tiki range of motorhomes is fitted
with an Alde heat exchanger, which transfers
heat from the engine of the motorhome
(when available) to the heating system in the
habitation area of the motorhome.
The diagram below shows a typical heating
circuit, with the heat exchanger highlighted.
The heat exchanger provides a link, via a
series of plates, between the engine coolant
fluid from the base vehicle, and the glycol fluid
in the Alde heating circuit: At no time though
do these two fluids mix, so the levels of each
fluid must be maintained separately.
To use the Heat Exchanger
The Alde heating system must be switched on,
while the motorhome engine is running, to use
the heat exchanger. The following settings on
the Alde control panel are suggested:
Turn Alde heating system ON using power
button at bottom left of panel
Press MENU button at bottom right of panel
Using the MINUS ( - ) and PLUS ( + ) touch
screen settings on the top row of the panel
(Thermometer symbol) to select a desired
room temperature.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Alde Heat Exchanger
During en-route use the water temperature
setting on the second row of the touch screen
(Shower symbol) is not relevant, and can be
left in its previous setting.
Heater Exchanger
Boiler
Chassis Cab Engine
133
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE BOILER
Alde Compact 3020
! WARNING: Alde can accept no liability
whatsoever for damage or injury resulting
from failure to observe these instructions.
Specific Use
These instructions are approved for the
Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler fitted in
motorhomes in accordance with CE 0402
no. SC0653-13, and have the E5 mark for
installation in vehicles in accordance with
ECE R122, no. 00 001 and R10, no. 04
166, for use in central heating and hot water
systems.
The boiler is not intended for use by persons
(including children) with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of
experience and/or knowledge, unless they
have been given instruction or are supervised.
The term “specified use” also covers
observance of the operating and installation
instructions.
The Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler must be
installed or repaired by a competent person in
accordance with current local regulations.
In the unlikely event that your boiler develops a
fault, switch off the boiler and contact Alde, or
your dealer or installer.
Operating and installation instructions for the
Alde control panel are supplied separately.
The owner is always responsible for
maintenance and arranging inspection.
Boiler Design
The boiler’s internal heat exchanger consists
of three concentric cylinders; the combustion
chamber, the central heating cylinder and the
hot water cylinder.
The combustion chamber is made from
aluminium, and is divided into two halves by a
baffle plate, with the burner head located in the
top half, and the flue gases venting through
the bottom half.
The combustion assembly is fixed to the end
of the internal heat exchanger. It consists of
the burner, combustion fan, gas valve, air
134
intake and exhaust ducts, and gas line.
Two electric heating elements are sealed
inside the central heating cylinder, one for 1
kW, one for 2 kW.
Gas Heating
When gas heating is set to on, the combustion
fan starts to revolve. Once the correct speed is
achieved (in rpm), a signal is sent to the PCB
for the burner to be lit. The gas valve opens,
passing gas, and the ignition module on the
PCB generates sparks at the electrode on the
burner head.
When the burner ignites, a flame supervision
device signals the ignition module to cease
sparking. The burner fires until the boiler or
room thermostat reach the setpoint.
Should the burner flame out unexpectedly, the
FSD detects this and attempts to reignite (for
about 10 seconds), before shutting down and
raising a fault code.
Note: Listen carefully to the ignition
sequence of the boiler. You should hear the
whirl of the combustion fan, the clunk of the
gas valve and the tick-tick of the ignition
module.
Electric Heating
When electric heating is set to 1, 2 or 3 kW,
relays on the PCB trip, feeding the 230v
supply to the electric heating elements. These
are controlled by the same programme as the
gas heating.
Domestic Hot Water
The combi-type boiler automatically produces
hot water. Heat is emitted from the central
heating cylinder into the hot water cylinder.
If the hot water cylinder is empty, the air is
heated but no damage can result.
Note: In a good summer, for example, lower
the desired temperature on the control panel
to around 10 °C. The central heating will not
circulate (unless the temperature drops to
10 °C), but you will still have hot water.
•T
he boiler must not be switched on if
there is no heat transfer fluid (HTF) in the
system.
•A
lways drain down the freshwater system
if there is risk of frost; in winter, for
example. You may continue to use the
boiler with no freshwater in the system, as
required; no damage can result
•A
lways replace the HTF in accordance
with the antifreeze product’s lifespan. . If in
any doubt, replace the HTF after 2 years.
•O
nly sterilise the freshwater system with a
product suitable for stainless steel.
•D
o not place stowage in the boiler
compartment.
•D
o not position awnings, tents or other
enclosures around the flue terminal.
When the hot water cylinder is in continuous
use, it should be drained and refilled once a
month. This recreates the air cushion in the hot
water cylinder that absorbs pressure surges.
Tip! If continuously using the hot water cylinder
in a hard water area, fit an inline scale inhibitor
to minimise the effects of limescale.
Target hot water temperature is greater
than 50°C in normal operation, to prevent
the growth of Legionella. Over 50°C , the
hot water will be heated to the maximum
achievable temperature at the time. This
allows the hot water to achieve disinfection
temperatures, and increases warm water
performance.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
! WARNING:
If scalding hot water temperatures are a
concern – such as with the young, elderly or
infirm – thermostatic mixing valves (TMVs)
can be fitted, and may be required by local
regulations.
•D
o not obstruct the flue. Be careful not to
flood the flue when washing the vehicle.
•T
he gas heating must not be used when
refuelling the vehicle at the service station
or related facility.
Domestic Hot Water
Being a combi-type boiler, the Alde 3020
Compact HE has an integrated, stainless steel
hot water cylinder that holds approximately 8.4
litres of freshwater.
The boiler can produce around 12 litres of
40°C warm water per 30 mins (at a cold
water temperature of 10°C). If only the electric
heating is used, this capacity is slightly
reduced.
The hot water should not be used for drinking
or cooking.
Always flush out the hot water cylinder before
use, especially when it has stood empty for
some time. Any steriliser products should
be suitable for use with stainless steel.
Avoid steriliser products containing sodium
hyperchlorite, for example, as these will cause
severe corrosion damage to the hot water
cylinder. Read the product label or contact the
product manufacturer for details.
! WARNING: Always drain down and
completely empty the hot water cylinder
when there is risk of frost, unless the vehicle
is explicitly stated to be self-winterising by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Failure to drain the hot water cylinder when
there is a risk of frost may result in frost
damage, and is not covered under warranty.
135
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE BOILER
Draining Freshwater
Heat Transfer Fluid
1. Switch off the water pump.
The central heating system is filled with heat
transfer fluid (HTF), a solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze and 50% water.
2. Open all water taps, showers, etc.
3. Open the safety/drain valve by lifting the
yellow tab (Fig 1 [M]), or by turning the blue
knob (Fig 1 [K]) 90°.
4. The system will drain directly below the
vehicle through the clear plastic hose on the
safety/drain valve. Check that all water has
emptied out (7–10 litres). Leave the valve in the
open position until the next time the hot water
cylinder is used.
Note: Check that the red breather valve (Fig
1[N]) is allowing air to enter the hot water
cylinder, when it is being drained, and that
the clear plastic hose is not obstructed.
Figure 1
Open the manual safety/drain valve
The antifreeze manufacturer will have a
maximum water hardness recommendation.
Read the product label or contact the product
manufacturer for details.
Note: For re-filling Alde recommends
antifreeze meeting VAG G12++ or G13
specification, and deionised water (0 ppm).
50:50 ethylene glycol antifreeze and water
will protect against frost down to -35–37 °C.
A refractometer and/or hydrometer can be
used to measure the strength of the antifreeze
solution.
Corrosion protection will vary depending on
the lifespan of the antifreeze. Read the product
label or contact the product manufacturer for
details.
! WARNING: Always replace the HTF in
accordance with the antifreeze product’s
lifespan. If in any doubt, replace the HTF
after 2 years.
Opening the safety/drain valve
The corrosion inhibitors found in ethylene
glycol antifreeze may not be cross-compatible.
When topping up or replacing the HTF, ensure
the new antifreeze is compatible with the
current antifreeze product. Read the product
label or contact the product manufacturer for
details.
! WARNING: As a rough guideline,
blue and red antifreeze products are not
compatible with each other, but VAG G12++
and G13 spec antifreeze (purple/magenta) is
compatible with both.
Failure to fill with suitable HTF may result in
severe damage to your Alde system, and is
not covered under warranty.
136
ALDE BOILER
Central Heating
The central heating system is filled with HTF
through the expansion tank, either by hand, or
using the Alde service pump. Any containers
used for handling or storing the HTF should
be checked first, and must be visibly clean
to avoid introducing contaminants or foreign
objects into the system.
The boiler is set to an upper limit temperature
of 85°C, i.e., the temperature of the heat
transfer fluid (HTF) as it circulates around the
pipes, radiators, convectors, et al.
Alde recommends using the Alde 1900-811 or
839 twin-motor service pump to fill the system.
To fill the system by hand, unscrew the
expansion tank cap (Fig 2 [R]), and lift the
circulation pump (Fig 2 [S]) out of the tank
(if applicable). Carefully pour the HTF into the
tank, and repeat until the fluid level is about 1
cm above the MIN mark when cold.
Figure 2
To ensure the best performance from hydronic
heating, air must be able to circulate freely
around the back of the furniture (Fig 3). Air
vents, cut into the top and bottom of the
furniture must be unobstructed by carpets,
cushions, or stowage, etc.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Filling
The full length of a convector should be
ventilated for best performance.
Note: Use gas and electric heating
simultaneously for the best performance.
The boiler will only use as much energy as is
needed, and is 93% efficient on a SEBDUK
based test.
Quick heat up
While taking energy consumption and the
environment into account, consider switching
the Alde appliance ON when room or space
heating is not required, but may be needed
in the near future. This ensures the appliance
is held at the same temperature as the hot
water setting chosen, and this can reduce the
time taken to warm the living area, when room
heating is then selected.
Figure 3
137
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE BOILER
Bleeding Air
The HTF will contain some air. This is
unavoidable. Air bubbles can also be
introduced when the system is filled.
In a newly-filled central heating system, you
will need to bleed air from the bleed points
to ensure best performance. There is an
automatic air bleed valve on the boiler. There
is also an air vent on the expansion tank.
Bleed points are installed at strategic points
within the system to allow any trapped air to
bleed off.
Note: Contact the dealer or installer for
details on where the bleed points are in your
system, and how to access them.
To bleed the system, set the desired
temperature to 30°C and select gas heating
on the control panel.
If fitted set the 12v inline circulation pump on
the side of the boiler to speed 5 (Fig 1 [D]),by
turning the blue speed dial clockwise, on the
face of the pump motor. NB: Speed is not
adjustable if using the 12 V circulation pump
fitted in the expansion tank.
After 10 mins, set the pump back to its
normal running speed (2 for a caravan, 3 for a
motorhome).
Now power off the Alde 3020 Compact
HE boiler completely, making sure that the
circulation pump is not active.
Follow the flow pipe from the boiler, and bleed
the system at each bleed point.
If Alde bleed points have been fitted, these are
metal bleed screws mounted on black EPDM
rubber connectors (Fig 4). Have a cloth in
hand. To open, turn the screw anticlockwise
between thumb and forefinger. Air will hiss out.
When fluid trickles out, close the bleed screw
and mop up fluid with the cloth.
Fig 4
Move on to the next bleed point and repeat,
until all bleed points have been tended to.
Air Lock
If enough trapped air accumulates at one
point, an air lock can result and prevent the
circulation of hydronic heating.
A ramp or steep slope can be used to raise
one end of the vehicle, causing the trapped
air to shift around the system. Repeat the full
bleed procedure. A caravan can be slowly and
carefully tilted to reproduce this effect.
To clear a stubborn air lock in under 15
minutes, an Alde-certified service agent can
use the Alde 1900-811 or 839 twin-motor
service pump.
230v ELECTRIC
The Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler has two
230 V electric heating elements, outputting
1050 W and 2100 W, or 3150 W combined,
and drawing 5 A, 9 A, and 14 A respectively
(rounded).
230v breakers, fuses, fused spurs and isolator
switches should be rated for 16 A.
Before using electric heating, check the
current limit on the electric supply you are
hooking up to.
• 6 A limit, only use 1 kW electric heating.
• 10 A limit, use 1–2 kW electric heating.
• 16 A limit, use 1–3 kW electric heating.
Note: If the electric supply has unstable
voltage, the amperage will also fluctuate.
138
BS 5482 Part 1 states, “For butane cylinders,
satisfactory service might not be obtained
at temperatures of less than 10°C; the most
suitable temperature range is from 13 to 30°C.
For temperatures less than 13°C, the use of
propane should be considered.”
For this reason, Alde recommends using
propane gas for all year round gas heating.
LPG cylinders contain both gas and liquid
forms. When the cylinder is filled, high pressure
transforms the gas into liquid. The liquid
reverts to gas when the valve on the cylinder
is opened.
LPG is a flammable gas. It can be a fire and
explosion hazard if stored or used incorrectly.
Store cylinders vertically and securely, to
prevent them from toppling.
Do not mount your LPG cylinder horizontally
or use liquid phase gas cylinders. Liquid–gas
explosion may result. Read the product label
or contact product manufacturer for details.
LPG is heavier than air. Should a gas leak
occur the fitted floor vents will allow the gas to
escape from the motorhome. For this reason,
always ensure floor vents are unobstructed.
! WARNING: The boiler compartment
contains the gas connection, floor vents and
the flue hoses. Do not place stowage in the
boiler compartment.
In the event of a gas leak, or if you smell gas:
• Extinguish all naked flames
• Open all doors and windows
•C
lose all gas valves, including the valve on
the cylinder.
• Do not smoke.
•D
o not operate any electrical appliances or
switches.
•A
rrange for immediate inspection of the
gas system by a competent person in
accordance with current local regulations.
LPG from the cylinder is reduced in pressure
by a regulator, and is supplied to the boiler
at low pressure (30 mbar). Never use an
unregulated high pressure supply.
Where oil and dirt in the gas supply are a
concern, gas filters should be fitted to prevent
blockage of the boiler gas valve.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
LPG
LPG (liquefied petroleum gas) has two main
variants, propane and butane gas. The gas
heating in your Alde 3020 Compact boiler can
use propane or butane gas as fuel. Many LPG
fuels contain a mixture of propane, butane and
other additives.
Gas heating must not be used whilst driving
your vehicle unless a safety shut-off device
is fitted to the gas system. Current local
regulations must be adhered to.
Flue
The burning of LPG produces CO² (carbon
dioxide), a non-toxic, asphyxiant gas.
Exhaust flue gas can cause possible burns
and poisoning. Avoid inhaling exhaust flue gas.
! WARNING:
Do not position awnings, tents or other
enclosures around the flue terminal.
Air supply is essential for clean combustion.
The air intake is located in the flue terminal. For
best performance, the flue terminal should be
well vented. If leaving the gas heating unused
for a period, ensure the flue terminal is covered
to prevent pest animals nesting in the flue.
! WARNING:
Do not obstruct the flue. Be careful not to
flood the flue when washing the vehicle.
! WARNING: Air is sucked into the
combustion chamber via the air intake.
The gas heating must not be used when
refuelling the vehicle at the service station or
related facility.
Maintenance
There is no manufacturer’s service requirement
for the Alde 3020 Compact boiler itself.
Current local regulations must be adhered
to. The installation of the boiler should be
inspected annually for gas safety.
139
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE BOILER
LPG hoses should be regularly checked for
signs of damage and should be replaced, at
maximum, after 3 years of use.
Bleed air from the system when newly filled,
when the vehicle has been standing unused
for a period, and before departing on holiday.
The fluid level in the expansion tank should be
about 1 cm above the MIN mark when cool.
The heat transfer fluid (HTF) should be topped
up if below this level, to prevent a break in
circulation. Only top up with compatible HTF.
Never leave the system empty of HTF.
! WARNING: Always replace the HTF in
accordance with the antifreeze product’s
lifespan. If in any doubt, replace the HTF
after 2 years.
Failure to maintain the condition of HTF may
result in frost and/or corrosion damage, and is
not covered under warranty.
When the hot water cylinder is in continuous
use, it should be drained and refilled once a
month. This recreates the air cushion in the hot
water cylinder that absorbs pressure surges.
Winter
When camping in the winter, always ensure
the flue terminal remains unobstructed
by snow and ice. Extensions for roof flue
terminals, and condensate spouts for side flue
terminals are available from Alde.
Check the strength of the heat transfer fluid
(HTF) with a hydrometer and/or refractometer.
It should measure 50% ethylene glycol
antifreeze, or -35-37°C.
The central heating can still be used with no
freshwater in the system. The air in the hot
water cylinder is heated but no damage can
result.
! WARNING: Always drain down and
completely empty the hot water cylinder
when there is risk of frost, unless the vehicle
is explicitly stated to be self-winterising by
the vehicle manufacturer.
140
If camping in temperatures below -10°C,
consider carrying spare parts in the event
of an emergency. Alde recommends a 12v
circulation pump for the expansion tank (with
cabling), a PCB, and 4–5 litres of ready to use
antifreeze. These spare parts should be kept
well insulated and in the warmest part of the
vehicle; for example, in the wardrobe, near to
the expansion tank pipes.
If storing the vehicle for winter, ensure the flue
terminal is covered to prevent pest animals
nesting in the flue.
Note: Air the vehicle over winter
without wearing out the pump. Use the
programmable Alde control panel to
automatically heat the vehicle for 24 hours,
once a week.
ALDE BOILER TROUBLESHOOTING
The Alde control panel will display any error
messages. See the Operating and Installation
Instructions supplied separately.
The system is completely dead, the
control panel is blank
•C
heck the 20 mm T3.15 Amp glass fuse in
the boiler. This is located under the lid of the
black plastic service hatch, in a green plastic
fuse holder.
•C
heck the 12v supply to the boiler, it should
be above 12v.
•C
heck the 12v cable is plugged into the
boiler. Check the cable is plugged into the
Alde control panel.
The boiler will not ignite on gas
•C
heck the gas cylinder is full. Try a different
gas cylinder, ensuring it is propane gas.
•T
he system may not need to use gas
heating, if also using electric heating.
•T
he fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
The boiler will not heat on 230 V electric
•C
heck that any 230v isolator switches are on
(they will often have an LED indicator).
•C
heck the 230v supply to the vehicle.
•C
heck that hot water boost is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
•U
se gas and electric heating.
•C
heck that vents in the furniture are not
obstructed.
• Check the condition of the heat transfer fluid.
•M
ost vehicles will reach a comfortable
temperature within an hour, in non-extreme
conditions.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Trouble-Shooting
If problems persist, please contact Alde, or
your dealer or installer.
WARRANTY
Alde undertakes to rectify any manufacturing
defect or early component failure through
normal use that occurs within 12 months of
the installation date.
If your Alde boiler develops a fault, your first
action should be to contact your dealer or
installer, as they will be familiar with your
installation and vehicle, and how to make a
claim under warranty.
Alde International (UK) Ltd Huxley Close Park
Farm South Wellingborough Northamptonshire
NN8 6AB
Tel. 01933 677765
www.alde.co.uk
•T
he fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
No hot water
•C
heck that hot water ignore is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
•C
heck that constant pumping is not
activated on the Alde control panel.
•C
heck for other conflicting settings on the
Alde control panel.
•C
heck the freshwater supply and water
pump.
No central heating
•B
leed the system of air.
•C
heck the fluid level in the expansion tank.
•C
heck that the circulation pump is
responding.
141
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Dometic absorption refrigerator
Guide to these operating instructions
Before you start using the refrigerator,please
read the operating instructions carefully.
These instructions provide you with the
necessary guidance for the proper use of your
refrigerator. Observe in particular the safety
instructions. Observation of the instructions
and handling recommendations is important
for dealing with the refrigerator safely and for
protecting you from injury and the refrigerator
from damage. You must understand what you
have read before you carry out a task.
Keep these instructions in a safe place close
to the refrigerator so they may be referred to
at any time.
Copyright protection
The information, texts and illustrations in these
instructions are copyright protected and are
subject to industrial property rights.
No part of these instructions may be
reproduced, copied or utilised in any other
way without written authorisation by Dometic
GmbH, Siegen.
Warranty
Warranty arrangements are in accordance
with EC Directive 44/1999/CE and the
normal conditions applicable for the country
concerned.
For warranty or other maintenance, please
contact our customer services department.
Any damage due to improper use is not
covered by the warranty. The warranty does
not cover any modifications to the appliance
or the use of non-original Dometic parts. The
warranty does not apply if the installation and
operating instructions are not adhered to and
no liability shall be entertained.
Limitation of liability
All information and guidance in these operating
instructions were prepared after taking into
consideration the applicable standards and
regulations as well as the current state of
the art. Dometic reserves the right to make
changes at any time which are deemed to be
in the interest of improving the product and
safety.
Dometic will assume no liability for damage in
the case of :
• Non-observation of the operating instructions
• Application not in accordance with the
regulations or provisions
• Use of non-original spare parts
• Modifications and interferences to the
appliance
• Effect of environmental influences, such as
- temperature fluctuations
- humidity
Customer services
Dometic offers a pan-European customer
service network. Find your authorised
customer service centre by calling the
phone number indicated in the EuroService
Network book, EuroService Network - which
accompanies every refrigerator. You can also
obtain the address information of the nearest
customer service from www.dometic.com.
When contacting Dometic Customer Services,
please state the model, product number and
serial number together with the MLC code,
if applicable. You will find this information on
the rating plate inside the refrigerator. We
recommend that you note this data in the
field provided on the front page of this
operation manual.
Spare parts
Parts can be ordered throughout Europe from
our customer services. Always give the model
and product number when you contact the
customer service! You will find this information
on the rating plate inside the refrigerator.
142
In order to ensure that the recyclable
packaging materials are re-used, they
should be sent to the customary local
collection system.
The appliance should be transferred to a
suitable waste disposal company that will
ensure re-use of the recyclable components
and proper disposal of the rest. For
eco-friendly draining of the coolant from
all absorber refrigeration units, a suitable
disposal plant should be used.
Energy-saving tips
• At an average ambient temperature of 25°C,
it is sufficient to operate the refrigerator at
middle thermostat setting.
• Where possible, always store precooled
products.
• Do not expose the refrigerator to direct
sunlight.
• Ensure that air circulation of the cooling unit
is not obstructed.
• Defrosting at regular intervals saves energy
(see “Defrosting”). Open the refrigerator
door only for a short period of time when
removing products.
• Run the refrigerator for about 12 hours
before filling it.
Safety instructions
Application according to regulations
This refrigerator is designed for installation
in recreation vehicles such as caravans
or motorhomes. The appliance has been
type approval tested for this application in
accordance with the EC Gas Directive.
The refrigerator is to be used solely for storing
foodstuffs.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Note: Refrigerators manufactured by
Dometic GmbH are free of CFC/HCFC
and HFC. Ammonia (a natural compound
of hydrogen and nitrogen) is used in the
cooling unit as a coolant. Non-ozonehazardous cyclopentane is used as a
propellant for manufacturing PU foam
insulation.
! WARNING: The refrigerator is
not suitable for the proper storage of
medication. Please observe in addition
the instructions in the medication package
inserts.
User’s responsibility
Anyone operating the refrigerator must be
familiar with the safe handling and understand
the advice in these operating instructions.
This appliance is not intended for use by
persons (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or
lack of experience and knowledge, unless they
are supervised or have been given instruction
concerning use of the appliance by a person
responsible for their safety. Children should be
supervised to ensure that they do not play with
the appliance. Cleaning and user maintenance
shall not be made by children.
[EN 60335-2-24, 7.12]
Protection of children when disposing of
the equipment
! WARNING: When disposing of the
refrigerator, detach all refrigerator doors and
leave the storage racks in the refrigerator.
In this way inadvertent entrapment and
suffocation is prevented.
143
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Working upon and checking the
refrigerator
! WARNING: Work on gas equipment,
exhaust system and electrical facilities must
be carried out by authorised personnel
only. Substantial damage to property and
/ or injury to persons can arise through
unprofessional procedures.
! WARNING: Never use an unshielded
flame to check gas bearing parts and pipes
for leakage!
There is a danger of fire or explosion.
! WARNING: Never open the absorber
cooling unit! It is under high pressure.
There is a danger of injury.
Information on coolant
Ammonia is used as a coolant. This is a natural
compound also used in household cleaning
agents (1 litre of Salmiak cleaner contains up
to 200g of ammonia - about twice as much as
is used in the refrigerator). Sodium chromate is
used for corrosion protection (1.8% by weight
of the solvent).
In the event of leakage (easily identifiable from
the strong odour), proceed as follows:
• Switch off the appliance.
• Air the room thoroughly.
• Inform authorised customer services.
Note: For your safety it was ascertained
in an expert’s report that no impairment
of health exists when the coolant is
discharged.
Operating the refrigerator with gas
It is imperative that the operating pressure
corresponds to the data specified on the rating
plate of the appliance. Compare the operating
pressure of the rating plate with the data
specified on the pressure reducing valve of the
liquid gas cylinder.
144
! WARNING: Operating the appliance with
gas is not permitted
• At petrol stations
• On ferry boats
• While transporting the motorhome by a
transporter or breakdown vehicle.
There is danger of fire!
Leave the equipment switched off
Safety instructions when
storing foodstuffs
Instructions for storing food in a
refrigerator:
No refrigerator of any kind can improve the
quality of the food; refrigerators can only
maintain the food’s quality for a short duration
as from the time of storing it.
Please observe the following particular
conditions for storing food in a refrigerator that
is built into a vehicle:
• A change in the climatic conditions such as
temperature fluctuations
• High temperatures inside the vehicle when
it is closed and parked in direct sunlight
(temperatures are possible up to 50°C)
• Use of the refrigerator during travel with the
power supply of 12V DC
• A refrigerator built in behind a window and
exposed to direct sunlight
• Storing the products too soon, i.e. shortly
after starting up the appliance for use
Under these particular conditions the
refrigerator cannot guarantee reaching the
temperature needed for perishables.
Perishables include all products with a
stipulated use-by date and a minimum storage
temperature of +4°C or less, especially for
meat, poultry, fish, sausages, pre-packed
foods.
• Pack raw and cooked foods separately (e.g.
in containers, aluminium foil, etc.).
• Do not leave cooled goods outside the
refrigerator for too long.
• Place the foods with the next use-by date at
the front, accordingly.
• Pack away any left-over food and eat at the
first opportunity.
• Wash your hands before and after handling
any food.
• Regularly clean the inside of the refrigerator.
Please observe the instructions and
information regarding the use-by date on the
outside packaging of the food.
Please observe section “Cleaning” of this
instruction.
Refrigerator rating plate
The rating plate is to be found on the inside of
the refrigerator. It contains all important details
of the refrigerator. You can read off from this
the model identification, the product number
and the serial number. You will need these
details whenever you contact the customer
service centre or when ordering spare parts.
1 - Model Number
2 - Product Number
3 - Serial Number
4 - Electrical rating details
5 - Gas pressure
Note: The cooling unit’s performance is
influenced by ambient temperatures. Please
select the medium setting for ambient
temperatures between +15°C and +25°C
(refer to Setting of cooling compartment
temperature). The unit operates within its
optimum performance range.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
• Only remove the outside packaging of single
packs if all the necessary information, e.g.
the use-by date, can also be read on the
single packs.
Dometic refrigerators work according to the
absorption principle. For physical reasons,
an absorption system responds slowly to
changes made by the thermostat controller,
by loss of cooling energy through opening the
door or during storing food. The devices meet
the cooling performance requirements of the
Climatic Class SN acc. to EN/ISO 7371 in the
temperature range of +10°C to +32°C ambient
temperature.
For temperatures below +10°C, winter covers
should be installed. For ambient temperatures
exceeding +32°C for a longer period of time, it
is recommended installing Dometic additional
fan (item no. 241 2985 -00).
145
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Description of refrigerator
2
1
1
8
3
4
5
9
1 - Operating controls
2 - Door locking button
3 - Freezer compartment (removable)
4 - Insertable grid shelf (available as option,
to be used when freezer compartment is
removed)
5 - Post-evaporator for cooling compartment
6 - Condensation water drain channel
7 - Vegetable bin
8 - Upper door shelf with flap, egg shelf
available as option may be inserted
9 - Lower door shelf with bottle holders
146
1
6
RMx 8xx1 / MES
7
Fig. 5
RMx 8xx0 / Battery igniter
1
RMx 8xx5 / AES
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Description of fridge freezer
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
8
Fig. 3
1 - Freezer compartment
2 - Operating controls
3 - Post-evaporator for cooling compartment
4 - Condensation water drain channel
5 - Data plate
6 - Vegetable bin
7 - Upper door shelf with flap, egg shelf
available as option may be inserted
8 - Lower door shelf with bottle holders
147
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Manual energy selection /
automatic ignition (RM 8xx1/
RML9xx1) MES
1
2
3
4
6
7
Automatic energy selection /
automatic ignition (RM 8xx5/
RML9xx5) AES
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 8
8
Fig. 9
1 - Power ON/OFF switch
1 - Power ON/OFF switch
2 - Energy selector button 230V ~
2 - Energy selector button 230V ~
3 - Energy selector button GAS
3 - Energy selector button GAS
4 - Energy selector button 12V =
4 - Energy selector button 12V =
6 - Temperature level selection
5 - Selector button “AUTOMATIC”
7 - Temperature level display
6 - Temperature level selection
8 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button
GAS FAILURE
7 - Temperature level display
Switching ON/OFF
8 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button
GAS FAILURE
• Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s
Switching ON/OFF
• Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s
• Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s
230V AC operation
• Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s
• Select “Mains voltage” by pressing button (2)
Manual operation
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
• Select energy source with buttons (2,3,4)
12V DC operation (vehicle’s battery)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
• Select “Battery voltage” by pressing
button (4)
Automatic operation
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
Gas operation
• Select “Gas” by pressing button (3)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
• Change over to “Automatic” with button (5)
Automatical energy selection (if available)
Sequence of priority:
1.) Solar (12V -)
2.) 230V ~
3.) 12V 4.) Liquid gas
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
148
Setting of cooling compartment
temperature
Electrical operation
1
6
7
Fig. 18
2
3
4
Fig. 16
To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2
seconds.
The refrigerator starts with the last selected
type of energy.
230V operation :
Press button (2) :
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
RM 8xx1/RML9xx1 models MES
appliances (manual energy
selection)
Select the desired cooling compartment
temperature by pressing button (6) .
The LED display (7) of the selected
temperature setting is illuminated.
The scale starts with MIN position at the left
LED position (small bar = highest temperature)
and climbs up to MAX position at the right LED
position (large bar = lowest temperature).
Note: The temperature levels do not relate
to absolute temperature values.
12V operation :
Press button (4) :
Gas operation
RM 8xx5/RML9xx5 models
Manual operation
1
3
Fig. 17
2
3
4
Gas operation :
Press button (3) :
The ignition process is activated automatically
by means of an automatic igniter.
Note: The flame extinguishes after
reaching the preset cooling compartment
temperature and ignites again if the cooling
compartment temperature increases again.
If the flame is not lit after the first ignition
attempt, the automatic igniter repeats the
ignition twice (duration 30 s) at time intervals
of 2 minutes. If the flame is not lit afterwards,
a fault is indicated.
Abb. 19
To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2
seconds.
The refrigerator starts with the last selected
type of energy.
230V operation :
Press button (2) :
12V operation :
Press button (4) :
Gas operation :
Press button (3) :
149
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Automatic operation
Refuelling while in AES mode operation
1
5
Fig. 20
To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2
seconds.
The refrigerator starts with the last selected
type of energy.
Automatic operation :
Press button(5) : A
Upon switching on, the electronics
automatically selects one of the three possible
energy types: 230V - 12V - liquid gas. The
control electronics automatically ensures that
the refrigerator is supplied with the optimum
source of energy in each respective case.
Sequence of priority:
1.) Solar (12V -)
2.) 230V ~
3.) 12V 4.) Liquid gas
Note: If sufficient mains voltage is available
(more than 195 V), this power source is
selected as prime option. If a solar system
capable of powering the refrigerator is
installed, the solar 12V supply takes priority.
The 12V operation is otherwise only effective
while the engine is running.
According to the sequence of priority the
electronics selects GAS as energy source only,
if both of the electrical energy source are not
available.
Manual operation is possible at any time.
Note: For Setting of cooling compartment
temperature see point “4.7.2”
150
Note: In order to prevent unintended
switching to gas operation during refuelling,
the electronic system starts gas operation
of the refrigerator after the motor has been
turned off for 15 minutes. During this period
the appliance is ready for operation (“standby”). The temperature level LEDs do not light
then while all other indicators remain active.
! WARNING: The use of unshielded
flames is prohibited in petrol station
environments. Should the refuelling stop
last longer than 15 minutes, the refrigerator
has to be switched off or switched over to
another energy type.
Additional features (MES / AES)
• The brightness of the display reduces after a
WARNING!
few seconds
if no other buttons are pressed.
The indicator lights again if a button is
pressed. Press the button again to activate
the required function.
• Failures are indicated by flashing of the
failure indicator LED.
• Should the door be kept open for too long
(more than 2 minutes), an acoustic signal is
initiated (pulsing whistle tone).
• Should the electronic control detect any
failure, an acoustic signal will sound (pulsing
whistle tone). At the same time the display
starts flashing (for trouble-shooting, please
refer to page 160).
Gas operation with internal batteries
(optional)
An optional battery compartment in the
electronics case for internal (self-contained)
power supply of the electronics is available
for the model variants RM 8xx1 and RM 8xx5
(appliances with electronics).
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Battery compartment
Fig. 21
Load the battery compartment with batteries
(8 x AA 1.5 V) before operating the refrigerator.
All operating modes can be selected while the
on-board 12 V DC power supply is active. The
internal voltage is disconnected.
If the on-board 12 V DC power supply is not
present or there is an interruption of the mains
power supply during operation, the electronics
automatically switch to the internal (battery)
power supply.
The refrigerator can now only be operated
in the gas mode. All LED indicators except
the GAS LED are not lit during operation with
internal batteries. The GAS LED flashes every
15 seconds.
If a button is pressed, the temperature level
LEDs (7) also light. If the battery voltage
. is too
low, an acoustic signal (whistle tone) sounds
every 15 seconds. Then replace the batteries
in the battery compartment.
Inserting / changing the batteries
Switch off the refrigerator, as described in
section “Shutting of the refrigerator”.
press
Opening battery compartment
Fig. 22
pull out
Fig. 23
Note: Batteries (8 x AA 1.5V) are not
included!
! WARNING:
• Observe the correct polarity!
• Do not connect non-rechargeable
batteries to a charger.
• Remove rechargeable batteries from the
battery compartment before charging.
• Avoid short circuits on the contacts in the
battery compartment!
• Remove discharged batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the battery
compartment if the refrigerator will not be
used for a long time.
• Do not mix different types of batteries.
151
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Explanation of operating controls
Fridge / Freezer models
The control panel buttons are not accessible
when the refrigerator door is closed. Open the
bottom door to reach the operating buttons.
Depending on the door opening direction,
there are two LEDs on the left or right edge of
the control panel. The outer LED (1) indicates
that the refrigerator is operational (blue). The
other LED (2) lights red in the event of a fault.
2
9 - Indicator LED failure /
Reset button GAS FAILURE
Switching ON/OFF
• Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s
• Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s
230V AC operation
• Select “Mains voltage” by pressing button (2)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
12V DC operation (vehicle’s battery)
1
• Select “Battery voltage” by pressing
button (4)
Fig. 4
Indicator LEDs
8 - Temperature level display
Refrigerators for self-contained (gas) operation
contain two battery compartments in the
control panel which are located on the left and
right next to the button bar.
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
Gas operation
• Select “Gas” by pressing button (3)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
Automatic energy selection / automatic
ignition (RMD 8xx5) AES
Fig. 5
Operating controls without battery compartments
L
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 8
1 - Power ON/OFF switch
Operating controls with battery compartments (L, R)
2 - Energy selector button 230V ~
Manual energy selection / automatic
ignition (RMD 8xx1) MES
3 - Energy selector button GAS
4 - Energy selector button 12V =
5 - Selector button “AUTOMATIC”
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
Fig. 7
1 - Power ON/OFF switch
2 - Energy selector button 230V ~
3 - Energy selector button GAS
152
6 - Frameheating
7 - Temperature level selection
8 - Temperature level display
9 - Indicator LED failure /
Reset button GAS FAILURE
Switching ON/OFF
4 - Energy selector button 12V =
• Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s
6 - Frameheating
• Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s
7 - Temperature level selection
9
• Select energy source with buttons (2,3,4)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
Automatic operation
• Change over to “Automatic” with button (5)
Automatical energy selection (if available)
Sequence of priority:
1.) Solar (12V -)
2.) 230V ~
3.) 12V 4.) Liquid gas
If the battery voltage is too low, an acoustic
signal (whistle tone) sounds every 15 seconds.
Then replace the batteries in the battery
compartment.
1
open
press
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Manual operation
Fig. 15
Opening left battery compartment
1
press
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
open
Gas operation with internal batteries
(optional)
An optional battery compartment in the
electronics case for internal (self-contained)
power supply of the electronics is available for
the model variants RMd 85x1 and RMD 85x5
(appliances with electronics).
Opening right battery compartment
Fig. 16
2
Note: Batteries (8 x AA 1.5V) are not
included!
Left battery compartment
Fig. 14
Load the battery compartment with batteries
(8 x AA 1.5 V) before operating the refrigerator.
All operating modes can be selected while the
on-board 12 V DC power supply is active. The
internal voltage is disconnected.
If the on-board 12 V DC power supply is not
present or there is an interruption of the mains
power supply during operation, the electronics
automatically switch to the internal (battery)
power supply. The refrigerator can now only be
operated in the gas mode.
All LED indicators except the GAS LED are
not lit during operation with internal batteries.
The GAS LED flashes every 15 seconds. If a
button is pressed, the temperature level LEDs
(7) also light.
! WARNING:
• Observe the correct polarity!
• Do not connect non-rechargeable
batteries to a charger.
• Remove rechargeable batteries from the
battery compartment before charging.
• Avoid short circuits on the contacts in the
battery compartment!
• Remove discharged batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the battery
compartment if the refrigerator will not be
used for a long time.
• Do not mix different types of batteries.
153
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Frame heating
All models are equipped with a frame
heating (12VDC/3,5W) around the freezer
compartment. During summer months with
high temperatures and humidity the metal
frame may have water droplets forming. To
evaporate these droplets switch on the frame
heating with button (6).
6
8
Fig. 18
The operating time of the frame heater can
be set to 2 hours, 5 hours or continuous
operation. After selecting the operating time
using the button (6), the temperature level
indicator (8) is extinguished for a short time to
show the set operating time for a few seconds.
The display then returns to the temperature
level indicator.
Operating time: 2 hours
Press button (6) once Display
1x
Operating time: 5 hours
Press button (6) twice Display
2x
Permanent Operation
Press button (6) three times
Display
3x
! WARNING: In order to prevent discharge
of the onboard battery, change the frame
heater from continuous operation to another
operating time or switch it off.
Note: The frame heater is active for 30
minutes after switching on and then
switches itself off and on again at time
intervals of 5 minutes.
154
To enlarge the cooling compartment, just
remove the freezer compartment.
1. Unlock the freezer compartment on both
sides.
5
2. Pull the freezer compartment out.
1
Store the freezer compartment safely in order
to prevent damage
6
2
Note: Once the freezer compartment is
removed, an additional storage rack (3.)
may be installed. The storage rack is a
piece of extra equipment and may be
obtained from Dometic.
3
7
4
Fig. 37
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Refrigerator compartments
Door locking
! WARNING: As a basic rule, shut
1 - Freezer compartment :
already frozen food (deep-frozen food)
and lock the refrigerator before you start
your journey!
2 - Middle compartment:
Dairy products, convenience food
3 - Bottom compartment:
Meat, fish, food for defrosting
4 - Vegetable compartment:
Salads, vegetables, fruit
5 - Top door shelf:
Eggs, butter
6 - Middle door shelf:
Cans, dressings, ketchup, jam
Fig. 24
7 - Bottom door shelf (drinks compartment):
Drinks in bottles or bags
Removable freezer compartment
Fig. 25
Open the door by pressing the locking button
and pull open (see Fig. 24).
Shut the door again by pushing it to close. The
snapping into the lock can be heard.
While the vehicle is parked, the locking hook
may be fixed to facilitate opening of the door
(Fig. 26-27).
Fastening and releasing the, door lock
hook when parking the vehicle
Fig. 32
If the vehicle is parked for a longer period
of time, the locking hook may be clamped
by means of a lockbar. The door may now
be opened by just pulling it without need of
pressing the locking button.
155
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Positioning the storage racks
Fastening
Fig. 27
Fig. 26
Fig. 31
The storage racks may be pulled out by
smoothly lifting them and may be positioned
as desired.
Refrigerator compartments
Releasing
Fig. 29
Fig. 28
1
Lighting
The interior lighting is controlled using a door
contact. Should the door be kept open more
than 2 minutes, an acoustic signal is initiated
(pulsing whistle tone). (except for models with
battery igniter).
6
2
7
3
4
5
8
Fig. 29
Fig. 30
Note: Please contact the authorised
Dometic Service if a failure occurs.
1 - Freezer compartment :
already frozen food (deep-frozen food)
2 - Top compartment:
convenience food
3 - Middle compartment:
Dairy products, convenience food
4 - Bottom compartment:
Meat, fish, food for defrosting
156
5 - Vegetable compartment:
Salads, vegetables, fruit
7 - Middle door shelf:
Cans, dressings, ketchup, jam
8 - Bottom door shelf (drinks compartment):
Drinks in bottles or bags
Shutting off the refrigerator
• Switch off the refrigerator by pressing button
(1) (s. 4.5). Keep button (1) pressed for 3
seconds. The display disappears and the
appliance is fully switched off .
• Release the locking mechanism (Fig. 30-31)
of the door lock by pushing it and shift it to
the front. If the door is shut in this position,
a small gap is nevertheless kept open to
prevent formation of mildew.
Storing products in the cooling
compartment
• Switch the refrigerator on approx. 12 hours
before filling it.
• Always store pre-cooled foods in the
refrigerator. Make sure that the food is well
cooled when it is bought and also when
transporting it. Use insulated cooling bags.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Storing food and making
ice cubes
6 - Top door shelf:
Eggs, butter
• Open the refrigerator door only for a short
period of time when removing products.
• Products must be packed - best of all in
closed containers, wrapped in aluminium
foil or similar - and stored separately from
each other, in order to prevent drying out or
odours.
• Allow foods that have been warmed up to
cool down before storing.
• Avoid storing products in the refrigerator that
could emit volatile flammable gases.
Fig. 30
Fig. 31
• If the refrigerator is to be taken out of service
for an extended period of time, close the
onboard shut-off valve and the cylinder valve.
Defrosting
As time goes by, frost builds up on the fins
inside the refrigerator. A layer of frost thicker on
one side may occur and does not represent a
malfunction. When this layer of frost is about
0.118 inches (3 mm) thick, the refrigerator
should be defrosted.
• Switch off the refrigerator, as described in
section 4.14 Shutting of the refrigerator.
• Remove all food and the ice cube tray.
• Leave the refrigerator door open to allow air
to enter and to prevent formation of mildew.
•Do not overfill the storage grids and
compartments to prevent obstructing the
internal air circulation.
• Maintain a clearance of approx. 5 - 10
mm between chilled products and postevaporator (“cooling fins”).
• Do not expose the refrigerator to direct
sunlight. Please bear in mind that the
temperature inside a closed vehicle increases
sharply if exposed to sunlight and that this
can reduce the efficiency of the refrigerator.
• Ensure that air circulation of the cooling unit
is not obstructed. Keep the ventilation grilles
free from obstructions.
• The freezer compartment is suitable for
making ice cubes and for short-term storage
of frozen food. It is not suitable as a means
of freezing foods.
• After defrosting (freezer compartment
and fins free of frost), wipe both cooling
compartments dry with a cloth.
157
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
When ambient temperatures are lower than
+10°C and the refrigerator is exposed to these
temperatures for extended periods of time, an
even regulation of freezer temperature cannot
be guaranteed for system related reasons. This
can cause the temperature in the freezer to
rise and the stored goods to melt.
Shutting off the refrigerator
Making ice cubes
Fig. 41
Ice cubes are best frozen overnight. At night,
the refrigerator has less work to do and the
unit has more reserves.
Fig. 42
Fig. 43
• For battery igniter models, set energy
selector switch (1) to position “OFF”. The
appliance is switched off (Fig. 41).
Fig. 27
1. Fill the ice cube tray with drinking water.
• Switch off MES and AES models by pressing
button (2). Keep button (2) pressed for 3
seconds. The display disappears and the
appliance is fully switched off (Fig. 41).
• Release the locking mechanism of the door
lock by pushing it and shift it to the front.
If the door is shut in this position, a small
gap is nevertheless kept open to prevent
formation of mildew.
Fig. 28
2. Place the ice cube tray in the freezer
compartment.
! WARNING: Only use drinking water!
158
• If the refrigerator is to be taken out of service
for an extended period of time, close the
onboard shut-off valve and the cylinder valve.
CAUT
Check that the ventilation grilles and the
exhaust (1) duct system (2) have not been
blocked by snow, leaves, etc.
Cold air can restrict the performance of the
unit. Install the winter covers (3) if you discover
any loss of cooling performance when outdoor
temperatures are low. This protects the unit
against excessively cold air.
The following ventilation grille combinations
can be installed on your vehicle : LS 100 and
LS 200 or two LS 200 for refrigerators up
to 130 I capacity: two LS 300 (not sown) for
refrigerators with more than 130 I capacity.
Pay attention to this when purchasing winter
covers.
For ventilation grille LS 300, domestic provides
the winter set EWS 300, which can be used at
a very low temperatures from +5°C to 30°C.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Operating during low outside
temperatures
1
Fig. 35
Ventilation grille LS100
2
Fig. 36
Ventilation grille LS200 + winter cover
! WARNING: Refrigerators up to 130 l
capacity*: Do not install the top winter cover
during gas operation.
You should also attach both winter covers if
the vehicle is taken out of service for a longer
period of time or while it is being cleaned from
the outside.
159
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Troubleshooting
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool
sufficiently.
Possible cause
Action you can take
Inadequate ventilation to the unit
Check that the ventilation grilles are not
covered
Thermostat setting is too low
Set thermostat to a higher level
The condenser is heavily frosted
Check that the refrigerator door closes
properly
Too much warm food has been stores inside
within a short period of time
Allow warm food to cool down before storage
The appliance has been running for only a
short period of time
Check whether the cooling compartment
works after approx 4-5 hours
Ambient temperatures too high
Regularly remove ventilation grilles.
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in
gas operation mode.
Possible cause
Action you can take
Gas cylinder empty
Change gas cylinder
Is the upstream shut-off device open?
Open shut-off device
Air in the gas pipe?
Switch off the appliance and start again. Repeat this procedure 3-4 times, if necessary.
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in
12 V operation.
160
Possible cause
Action you can take
On-board fuse defective
Fit new fuse
On-board battery displaced
Check battery, charge it
Engine not running
Start engine
Heating element defective (please refer to
failure indication)
Please inform the Dometic Customer Services.
Possible cause
Action you can take
On-board fuse defective
Fit new fuse
Vehicle not connected to mains supply
voltage
Make a connection to a mains power supply
AES: Gas operation despite connection to the
mains supply voltage?
Appliance switches to gas operation due to
insufficient mains supply voltage (automatically switches back to 230 V operation)
Heating element defective (please refer to
failure indication
Please inform Dometic Customer Services
Information on failure display
and trouble-shooting
• Refrigerators with an electronics system
(MES, AES) indicate the occurence of a
malfunction by the LED or display flashing.
• If a malfunction occurs, the indicator LED
“Failure” (8) flashes simultaneously. In the
case of AES models an acoustic alarm
sounds.
Before notifying the authorised Service Center,
please check whether:
• the instructions in section “Operating the
refrigerator” have been observed.
• the refrigerator stands level.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in
230 V operation.
Status indicators
1
2
3
4
6
7
MES
8
Fig. 51
1 - Button ON / OFF
2 - Energy selector switch 230 V AC
3 - Energy selector switch GAS
4 - Energy selector switch 12V DC
6 - temperature level button
7 - temperature level display
8 - fault LED / GAS FAULT reset button
• it is possible to operate the refrigerator with
any available power source.
161
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Operation with on-board
12 v power supply
Indicator
Fault
Remedy
(2) and (8)
230 V mode:
"230V" not available or voltage too
low
Check mains power connection, mains voltage,
fuse
12 V mode:
"12V" not available
or voltage too low
Check 12V connection, on-board battery, fuse
Gas mode:
Flame not ignited
Check gas supply (gas bottle, gas valve)
Acoustic signal,
15s at two minute
intervals
Interior lighting is
switched on
Close door, check door contact
(2) and (7)
230 V mode:
230V heating element defective
Arrange replacement of 230V heating element,
contact Customer Service
12 V mode:
12V heating element defective
Arrange replacement of 12V heating element,
contact Customer Service
flashing and acoustic signal 20s
(4) and (8)
flashing and acoustic signal 20s
(3) and (8)
flashing and acoustic signal 20s
flashing and acoustic signal 20s
(4) and (7)
flashing and acoustic signal 20s
(7)
flashing and acoustic signal 20s
(3) and (7)
flashing and acoustic signal 20s
162
Press the (8) button after clearing the fault
Temperature sensor Contact Customer Service
without contact or
defective
Burner defective
or cooling unit
defective
Check burner, burner nozzles, if
necessary contact Customer Service and
arrange replacement
Indicator
Fault
Remedy
(3) and (8)
Flame not ignited
Check gas supply (gas bottle, gas valve)
Press the (8) button after clearing the fault
flashing brightly
(3) and (7)
Burner defective
or cooling unit
defective
Check burner, burner nozzles, if necessary contact Customer Service and arrange replacement
Acoustic signal at
15 second intervals
Undervoltage
detection (internal
batteries)
Replace batteries
Automatic switching from external
to internal power
supply does not
function (absence
of the onboard 12V
power supply for
the electronics)
Refrigerator does
not function, gas
operation not
possible although
the batteries are
inserted
Switch off the refrigerator and start again
flashing brightly
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Operation with batteries
(internal power supply)
The onboard power supply was interrupted during
the starting of the gas operation
Note: No automatic switching is performed during
the ignition.
163
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD COOKERS
Thetford Cookers
Cooker 3 burner with combined
grill and oven / cooker 3 burner
+ electric hotplate with separate
grill and oven
Burner operation
Fig. 1
Important
• Although each burner will support pans from
10 to 22cm, care should be taken not to
overload the appliance as performance may
be reduced.
• The following pan sizes are the maximum:
- Auxiliary Burner:- Ø200mm Semi-Rapid
Burner:- 2x Ø200mm or 1x Ø220mm with
1x Ø180mm
Electric Hotplate:- Ø180mm
• When using small pans the flames should
not spread beyond the base of the pan as
this will reduce the efficiency of the burner.
• Avoid old or misshapen pans as these may
cause instability.
• The lid must be opened fully prior to using
the hotplate burners.
Using the Hotplate Gas Burners
164
1. Ensure gas cylinder is connected and
turned on and the shut off valve at the
manifold is open. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder and contact supplier.
2. Flame supervision: Each burner is
controlled individually and is monitored
by a thermocouple probe. In the event
of the burner flames being accidentally
extinguished, turn off the burner control and
do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at
least one minute.
3. To light: Push in the control knob and turn
to full rate – see Fig.1. Hold a lighted match
or taper to the burner and push the control
knob in and hold. It is necessary to hold
the knob depressed after the burner has
ignited for approximately 10 - 15 seconds,
to allow the thermocouple probe to reach
temperature, before releasing the knob.
Should the flame go out when the knob is
released, the procedure should be repeated
holding the knob depressed for slightly
longer.
4. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia. If
the burner has not lit within 15 seconds
the control knob should be released and
the burner left for at least 1 minute before a
further attempt to ignite the burner.
5. For simmering, turn the knob further anticlockwise to the low rate position.
6. To turn off: Turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel. Always make
sure the control knob is in the off position
when you have finished using the hotplate
burners.
• Glass lids may shatter when heated. Turn
off the hotplate and allow it to cool before
closing the glass lid.
• Remove all spillage from the surface of the
glass lid before opening.
• The glass lid has the tendency to snap
shut towards the end of lowering.
This is caused by the travel lock action of
the hinges as it is activated.
Make sure all fingers are removed from
appliance when closing the lid.
! WARNING: The use of the gas hobs will
generate heat. We recommend, to avoid
excess build-up of heat around the cooker
area, the window is left opened when
cooking to allow for additional ventilation.
IMPORTANT
• Depending on specification, your appliance
may be fitted with a glass lid shut-off system,
which cuts off the power to all hotplate
burners (gas and electric) if the lid is closed.
• Ensure the glass lid is in the open and
upright position before turning on the
hotplate burners.
• Not all models are fitted with the shut-off
system.
Operation
! WARNING:
• The grill must only be used with the door
open.
• On combined grill and oven cookers the
heat deflector below the fascia should be
pulled out prior to lighting the grill. Never
adjust the heat deflector position without
using hand protection i.E. Oven gloves.
See fig 3
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
! WARNING:
On separate grill and oven cookers the grill
area can get hot when the oven is in use,
even if the grill is switched off.
• Care should be taken when removing
pans from the grill, i.e. use of oven gloves,
and by making use of the removal grill pan
handle.
Important
• The grill pan supplied is multi functional, for
use in grill or oven.
• The handle design allows removal or
insertion whilst the pan is in use.
• Always remove the handle when the pan is
in use.
• The grill MUST only be used with the door
open.
165
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD COOKERS
Using the Grill
8. It is normal for the flames on this burner to
develop yellow tips as it heats up.
9. A reversible grill pan trivet enables the
correct grilling height to be achieved.
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier.
Fast Toasting
trivet in high position
Grilling Sausages
trivet in high position
2. To light: Open door, push in the control
knob and turn to full rate – see Fig 1
(page 164). Hold a lighted match or taper
to the burner and push the control knob in
and hold. The burner should ignite and the
control knob should be held in for 10 -15
seconds before release.
Grilling Chops, etc trivet in low position
If the burner goes out, repeat procedure
holding control knob for slightly longer.
3. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia.
Ignition must be carried out with the door
open, and if the burner has not lit within
15 seconds the control knob should be
released and the grill left for at least 1
minute before a further attempt to ignite the
burner.
4. N
ote: the grill must only be used with the
door open.
5. On first use of the grill, it should be heated
for about 20 minutes to eliminate any
residual factory lubricants that might impart
unpleasant smells to the food being cooked.
A non-toxic smoke may occur when using
for the first time so open any windows
and turn on mechanical ventilators to help
remove the smoke.
166
automatically cut off the gas supply in the
event of the flame going out. In the event
of the burner flames being accidentally
extinguished, turn off the burner control and
do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at
least one minute.
Grilling Steak/Bacontrivet in high position
Slow Grilling
trivet removed
10. To turn off: turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel. Always make
sure the control knob is in the off position
when you have finished grilling.
Important:
• The pan supplied with the appliance is multi
functional, for use either whilst grilling or
when using the oven.
• The handle design allows removal or
insertion whilst the pan is in use.
! WARNING: Pans must not touch the
glass lid.
Note: To avoid heat build up around the hob
open the kitchen window slightly to allow the
heat to dissipate.
Operation
Important
6. Although the grill does heat up quickly, a
few minutes preheat is recommended.
• If the appliance is fitted with a cooling
system. The cooling fans should
automatically switch on a couple of minutes
after the grill and/or oven is turned on, and
will remain on even after the appliance has
been switched off.
7. Flame Failure Device (FFD): the grill burner is
fitted with a flame sensing probe, which will
• The fans should automatically switch off a
few minutes after the appliance has been
• A constant 12V supply is necessary at all
times to ensure the cooling system operates
correctly.
Using the Oven
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier.
2. To light: Open door, push in the control knob
and turn to full rate (240°C). Hold a lighted
match or taper to the burner and push the
control knob in and hold. The burner should
ignite and the control knob should be held
in for 10 -15 seconds before release. If the
burner goes out, repeat procedure holding
control knob for slightly longer.
3. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia.
Ignition must be carried out with the door
open, and if the burner has not lit within
15 seconds the control knob should be
released and the oven left for at least 1
minute before a further attempt to ignite
the burner.
4. Place the oven shelf in the required position
and close the door. Set control knob to
approximately 200°C and heat the oven
for about 30 minutes to eliminate any
residual factory lubricants that might impart
unpleasant smells to the meals being
cooked. A non-toxic smoke may occur
when using for the first time so open any
windows and turn on mechanical ventilators
to help remove the smoke.
5. Although the oven does heat up quickly, it
is recommended that a 10 minute preheat
be allowed. The oven should be up to full
temperature in about 15-20mins.
6. To turn off: turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel.
7. Shelf: the shelf has been designed to allow
good circulation at the rear of the oven and
is also fitted with a raised bar to prevent
trays or dishes making contact with the
back of the oven. To remove a shelf, pull
forward until it stops, raise at front and
remove.
! WARNING: The pans and trays supplied
with this appliance are the maximum sizes
recommended for use. Larger pans and
trays may restrict good circulation of heat,
increasing cooking times.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
switched off, when the front of the appliance
has cooled sufficiently.
Oven Temperature Control
The temperature in the oven is controlled by
a thermostatic gas tap and is variable over
the range 130°C to 240°C. Approximate
temperatures for the settings on the control
knob are shown in the table below. The
temperatures indicated refer to the centre of
the oven and at any particular setting the oven
will be hotter at the top and cooler towards
the base.
The variation between top and centre, and
centre to bottom is approximately equivalent
to one gas mark. Good use can be made
of the temperature variation in several
dishes requiring different temperatures may
be cooked at the same time. In this way
maximum benefit can be obtained from the
gas used to heat the oven. Care should be
taken not to overload the oven, adequate
spacing being used to allow free circulation for
heat.
Operation
Cooking Guidelines
Best results will be obtained by the shelf
positions in this guide. It is not necessary to
preheat the oven but advisable for a range of
dishes. The oven is capable of full temperature
in 15-20 minutes.
Most cookery books give details of the
shelf positions and gas mark settings for
each recipe. If in doubt about a recipe you
intend to use, study the recipe carefully
then find a similar dish in our guide and
use our shelf position and gas mark setting
recommendation.
Shelf positions are from the top down. When
167
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD COOKERS
roasting with aluminium foil care must be taken
that the foil does not impair circulation or block
the oven flue outlet.
Gas
Mark
1/4 - 1/2
Temperature
(Centre - Shelf Pos. 2)
265 - 275°F
130-135°C
1
285
140
2
300
150
3
330
165
4
355
180
If a smell of gas becomes apparent, the
supply should be turned off at the cylinder
IMMEDIATELY. Extinguish naked lights
including cigarettes and pipes. Do not
operate electrical switches. Open all doors
and windows to disperse any gas escape.
LPG gas is heavier than air; any escaping
gas will therefore collect at a low level. The
strong unpleasant smell of gas will enable
the general area of the leak to be detected.
Check that the gas is not escaping from an
unlighted appliance. Never check for leaks
with a naked flame, leak investigation should
be carried out using a leak detector spray.
5
385
195
6
410
210
7
430
220
8
445
230
Maintenance & servicing
9
465
240
Important
Do’s and don’ts
• Shut off gas supply at isolating valve, switch
off electric supply and ensure all parts are
cool before cleaning or servicing
Do read the user instructions carefully before
using the appliance for the first time.
• All servicing must be carried out by an
approved competent person.
Do allow the oven to heat before using for the
first time, in order to expel any smells before
the introduction of food.
• After each service the appliance must be
checked for gas soundness
Do clean the appliance regularly.
Do remove spills as soon as they occur.
Do always use oven gloves when removing
food shelves and trays from the oven.
Do check that controls are in the off position
when finished.
Don’t allow children near the cooker when in
use. Turn pan handles away from the front so
that they cannot be caught accidentally.
Don’t allow fats or oils to build up in the oven
trays or base.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners or powders that
will scratch the surfaces of the appliance.
Don’t under any circumstances use the oven
as a space heater.
Don’t put heavy objects onto open grill and
oven doors.
168
Leaks
• This appliance must not be modified or
adjusted unless authorized and carried out
by the manufacturer or his representative.
No parts other than those supplied by
the manufacturer should be used on this
appliance.
• If the supply cord is damaged, it must only
be replaced by the manufacturer or his
representative in order to avoid a hazard.
This appliance needs little maintenance other
than cleaning. All parts should be cleaned
using warm soapy water. Do not use abrasive
cleaners, steel wool or cleansing powders.
When cleaning the burner ring it is essential
to ensure that the holes do not become
blocked. The control knobs are a push fit
and can be removed for cleaning. They are
interchangeable without affecting the sense of
operation.
DOMETIC OVENS
General safety instructions
The manufacturer does not assume any liability
for damages in the following cases:
• Damage to the product resulting from
improper use
• Changes to the product without express
permission from the manufacturer
• Use for purposes other than those described
in the operating manual
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Dometic C600 Oven (where fitted)
• Non-compliant installation and/or
connections
! WARNING:
Please read this instruction manual carefully
before using the appliance.
If the appliance is given to another party, the
instruction manual must also be provided.
Explanation of symbols
WARNING
Security warning: Ignoring
this warning could cause
serious injury or death.
IMPORTANT!
Failure to observe this
note can cause material
damages and affect the
operation of the product.
NOTE
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
Fig. 1
NOTE
Additional information
relative to the use of the
product.
Action
This symbol indicates that
action is required on your
part. The required action is
described step-by-step.
Fig. 1 5
This information refers
to an element in a figure;
in this case, the figure
is found in “position 5 in
figure 1”.
• This warning is located on the appliance.
• This appliance must be installed according
to the regulations in force and used only in
a well ventilated area.
• Refer to the instructions before installing
and using this appliance.
• The appliance must be installed by
specialised technicians.
! WARNING:
The appliance and its accessible
components become very hot during
use. Be extremely careful not to touch the
heating elements. Keep children aged under
8 at a safe distance from the appliance
unless they are constantly supervised.
This appliance can be used by children
aged 8 or over and by people with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capacities or
who are not familiar with the appliance or
have no experience in using it, provided they
are supervised or have been trained to use
the appliance safely in order to understand
the inherent risks. Children must not play
with the appliance.
! WARNING: This appliance must not be
cleaned or serviced by children unless they
are supervised.
169
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC OVENS
! WARNING:
When cleaning, do not use rough abrasive
materials or sharp metal scrapers to clean
the glass doors of the oven as these
products may scratch the surface and
cause the glass to shatter. Do not use
steam cleaners to clean the appliance.
! WARNING:
This appliance has not been designed
to operate with an external timer or with
a remote control system. If the power
cable is damaged, have it replaced by the
manufacturer, a technical service centre or a
person with similar qualifications, in order to
prevent all risks.
! WARNING:
Use the appliance in accordance with
the intended use. Leaving a cooker
unsupervised with grease or oil can
be dangerous and may cause a fire. Never
attempt to extinguish a fire with water;
switch off the appliance and smother the
flames with a towel or fire blanket.
Fire hazard: Do not keep objects on the
cooking surfaces.
Intended Use
! WARNING:
This appliance can only be used to cook
food. Any other use is deemed incorrect and
therefore hazardous. The manufacturer
declines liability for damage to property
and injury to persons caused by improper,
incorrect or irresponsible use.
170
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Technical Description
Fig 5
Control Panel
The following table shows all the buttons and
symbols on the appliance.
NOTE: Buttons and symbols may vary
depending on the model.
Ref
1
2
Symbol
Description
LED light indicating that
the electric hotplate is
in operation.
Indicates the control
knob of a hob burner.
Ref
1-2-3-4-5-6
8
9
4
Button to turn on the
oven light.
10
5
Indicates the grill
control knob.
11
1-2-3-4-5-6
Indicates the oven
0
1-2-3-4-5-6
0
0
1-2-3-4-5-6
1-2-3-4-5-6
0
Button to actuate
electronic ignition.
1-2-3-4-5-6control knob.
1-2-3-4-5-6
0
1-2-3-4-5-6
Description
LED light indicating that
the fans are on.
7
3
6
Symbol
12
Oven or electric
hotplate temperature.
0 1-2-3-4-5-6
1-2-3-4-5-6
Electric hotplate turned
1-2-3-4-5-6
0
off.
01-2-3-4-5-6
0
Maximum adjustment
0
of the flame.
Gas turned off.
Minimum adjustment of
the flame.
171
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC OVEN
Burners
Heat Output
Model
CU601PE
Semrapid
Auxiliary
Ø 62mm
Ø 47mm
Rated Power
Grill
Electric Hotplate
No.
kW
gr/h
No.
kW
gr/h
No.
kW
gr/h
No.
kW
gr/h
No.
W
gr/h
2
1.8
131
1
1
73
1
1.6
116
1
2
146
1
800
200/240
Use (additional safey warning)
! WARNING:
This appliance must only be used by
responsible adults. The accessible parts
may be hot during and immediately after
use; do not touch them and keep children
away. After cooking, return the knob(s) to
the closed position(s). After use, close the
main gas line tap.
This warning is clearly shown on the
glass cover of the hob. The glass
covers may break if heated. Ignition
of any of the burners (hob, oven
and grill) must always be done with the cover
raised, and always turn off all the burners (hob,
oven and grill) and leave them to cool down
before closing the cover.
! WARNING:
This appliance may not be used by people
(including children) with impaired physical
and mental capacities, or with no experience
in using electrical appliances, unless they
are supervised and instructed by a person
who is responsible for their safety.
Children must be controlled to make sure
they do not play with the appliance.
The use of a gas cooking appliance leads to
the generation of heat and moisture in the
room in which it is installed. Make sure
to provide good ventilation in the kitchen:
keep natural ventilation openings open or
install a mechanical ventilation device
(mechanical extractor hood).
Intense and prolonged use of the appliance
may require supplementary aeration such as
the opening of a window or more effective
ventilation such as an increase in the power
of the possible mechanical extractor hood.
NOTE: When cooking food for the first time,
leave the oven and the grill on at maximum
capacity. The oven must be kept on for at
least 30 minutes and the grill must be kept
on for 15-20 minutes. Remove any liquids
overflowing on the cover before opening.
172
Oven
Models bearing this label on the lid
have a device that only allows for
gas flow when the lid is fully open.
Hob
Selecting the burner
! WARNING:
The flame must not spread over the edges
of the cookware. Place the cookware
centrally on the burner, so that it is stable on
the support grid.
Burner
Cookware
Diameter
Auxiliary
Ø 47mm
from 60mm to
160mm
Semrapid
Ø 62mm
from 160mm to
220mm
! WARNING:
If the burner does not turn on:
• check that there is gas in the cylinder.
Fig 6
Electric ignition of the hob
! WARNING:
Ignition must be done without any cookware
or other object on the burners.
• To generate the flame, fully press down the
control knob (Fig. 6 1) and turn it to the large
flame position (Fig. 6 2).
• Simultaneously push down the electronic
ignition button (Fig. 6 3).
• Once the flame has been generated, press
the knob down for a few seconds so that the
flame remains lit.
If the device does not work, close the gas
inlet tap and contact your dealer.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
• Once the flame has been generated, press
the knob down for a few seconds so that the
flame remains lit.
Regulation the hob flame
• To adjust the flame, turn the knob to the
desired position (Fig. 6 1).
Oven
! WARNING:
The burner must only be ignited when the
door is fully open. The rack, drip pan (tray) or
the pan must be positioned in the oven in a
way that they are not directly in contact with
the flames. If the burner flame accidentally
goes out, close the gas knob and wait a
minute before relighting.
! WARNING:
If the burner does not turn on:
• turn the knob to the small flame position
(Fig. 6 4)
• proceed with manual ignition;
• check that there is gas in the cylinder.
If the device does not work. close the gas
inlet tap and contact your dealer.
Manual ignition of the hob
If the electronic ignition does not work, the
manual ignition is used as a substitute.
! WARNING:
Ignition must be done without any cookware
or other object on the burners.
Fig 7
Electronic ignition of the oven
• To generate the flame, fully press down
the control knob (Fig. 7 1) and turn it from
position 1 to 6 (Fig. 7 2).
• Simultaneously push down the electronic
ignition button (Fig. 7 3).
• Once the flame has been generated, press
the knob down for a few seconds so that the
flame remains lit.
• To generate the flame, fully press down the
control knob (Fig. 6 1) and turn it to the large
flame position (Fig. 6 2).
• Simultaneously ignite the burner with a
match or gas lighter.
173
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC OVEN
Grill
! WARNING:
If the burner does not turn on:
• proceed with manual ignition;
• check that there is gas in the cylinder.
If the device does not work, close the gas
inlet tap and contact your dealer.
Manual ignition of the oven
If the electronic ignition does not work, the
manual ignition is used as a substitute.
•T
o generate the flame, fully press down
the control knob (Fig. 7 1) and turn it from
position 1 to 6 (Fig. 7 2).
• Simultaneously ignite the burner with a
match or gas lighter.
• Once the flame has been generated, press
the knob down for a few seconds so that the
flame remains lit.
! WARNING:
The burner must only be ignited when the
door is fully open.
If the burner does not light immediately,
release the knob and repeat the operation
after 10 seconds.
The door must always be opened during
operation.
Never use the grill for more than 25 minutes.
The grill cannot be used as an oven.
If the burner flame accidentally goes out,
close the gas knob and wait a minute before
relighting.
Accessible parts may be hot when the grill is
used, keep children away.
! WARNING:
If the burner does not turn on:
• check that there is gas in the cylinder.
If the device does not work, close the gas
inlet tap and contact your dealer.
Regulating the oven flame
•T
o adjust the flame, turn the knob to the
desired position (Fig. 7 1).
Electronic ignition of the grill
• To generate the flame, fully press down the
control knob (Fig. 8 1) and turn it to the large
flame position (Fig. 8 2).
• Simultaneously push down the electronic
ignition button (Fig. 8 3). Once the flame has
been generated, press the knob down for a
few seconds so that the flame remains lit.
Position
Temperture
1
120oC
2
150oC
3
180oC
4
200oC
• proceed with manual ignition;
5
220oC
• check that there is gas in the cylinder.
6
240oC
If the device does not work, close the gas
inlet tap and contact your dealer.
NOTE: As soon as the oven burner flame is
turned on, it remains at the maximum flow
rate in all potions of the knob and then
automatically decreases to the minimum
flow rate when the set oven temperature is
reached.
174
Fig 8
! WARNING:
If the burner does not turn on:
Manual ignition of the grill
If the electronic ignition does not work, the
manual ignition is used as a substitute.
• To generate the flame, fully press down the
Electric hot plate (depending on model)
• Simultaneously ignite the burner with a
match or gas lighter.
• Once the flame has been generated, press
the knob down for a few seconds so that the
flame remains lit.
! WARNING:
Fig 9
Regulating the grill flame
NOTE: When the electric hot plate is turned
on for the first time, or if it has not been
used for some time, the absorbed humidity
must be removed by turning the plate on for
30 minutes on position 1 of the knob (Fig.
9 1). Use cookware with a flat bottom and
with a diameter smaller than the diameter
electric hotplate.
• To adjust the flame, turn the knob to the
desired position (Fig. 8 1).
! WARNING:
If the burner does not turn on:
• check that there is gas in the cylinder.
If the device does not work, close the gas
inlet tap and contact your dealer.
Visual inspection of the flame
Depending on the type of gas used, the flame
appears as follows:
• Propane (G31): flame with blue internal pin
point and clear outline.
• Butane (G30): flame with slight yellow tips
when igniting the burner; these tips intensify
as the burner heats.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
control knob (Fig. 8 1) and turn it to the large
flame position (Fig. 8 2).
Dry the bottom of the cookware before
placing it on the electric hotplate. When
using the hot plate, do not leave the
appliance unattended and make sure
children are not nearby.
The electric hot plate is controlled by a 7position knob (Fig. 9 2 : the off position is
represented by the 0 (zero), while the positions
from 1 to 6 are used to operate the electric hot
plate. The scale from 1 to 6 corresponds to
the increasing heat intensity generated by the
electric hot plate. There is a red LED light near
the knob that lights up when the electric hot
plate is in operation (Fig. 9 3).
Accessories
Fig 10
The rack and drip pan have a block that
prevents accidental extraction (Fig.10 1).
For a correct insertion, the blocks must be
facing upwards and toward the inside of the
appliance. To extract, slightly lift the front of
the rack or the drip pan.
175
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC OVEN
Gas cylinders
! WARNING:
The use of gas and/or a pressure different
from those indicated by the manufacturer
could cause irregular and incorrect operation
of the appliance. The manufacturer declines
all liability for the incorrect or improper use
of the appliance.
The gas cylinders to be used are the most
common in the country where the appliance is
used. The gas to be used is clearly indicated
on the outside of the packaging and on the
indelible label attached on the back of the
appliance. In any case, observe the following:
gas cylinders with valve and pressure reducer
must be placed in an upright position and in
the appropriate compartment, and access
should not be impeded. Replacement of
the cylinders must be performed without
impediment and with ease.
Replacing the gas cylinder
•C
lose the taps of the appliance.
• Make sure no flames or fire are nearby.
• Close the valve of the cylinder to be
replaced.
• Unscrew the pressure reducer of the empty
cylinder, take it out of the compartment.
• Proceed in reverse order for replacement.
• Check for gas leaks with the use of a
non-corrosive fluid.
! WARNING:
• Do not use a soap and water solution.
• Do not use an open flame.
• Turn on the burners and check for proper
operation, otherwise contact an authorised
technician.
CLOSE THE CYLINDER GAS SUPPLY
AFTER USE
176
Gas leaks
We recommend using a certified electronic gas
leak detector.
If you smell gas:
• open the windows and immediately get all
people out of the camper, caravan etc.
• Never touch electrical switches, light
matches or do anything that could ignite the
gas.
• Extinguish any open flame.
• Close the cylinder valve or gas tank, and
do not open the valve until the gas leak has
been detected and eliminated.
• Contact an authorised technician.
Removing the door
Cleaning the appliance
! WARNING:
Before cleaning, switch off the appliance,
disconnect it from the mains power supply
and wait for it to cool down.
Note: Hot surfaces could be damaged if
they come into contact with cold water or a
damp cloth.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Cleaning and maintenance
Do not use abrasive, corrosive, chlorinebased products, scourers or steel wool.
Do not leave acid or alkaline substances
(vinegar, salt, lemon juice, etc.) on appliance
surfaces.
For stainless steel surfaces and enamelled
parts: wash with soap and water or mild
detergent, rinse and dry. Use clean sponges
and cloths.
! WARNING:
Do not use rough abrasive material or sharp
metal scrapers to clean the glass oven
doors as these products may cause the
glass to shatter. Do not use steam cleaners
to clean the appliance.
Fig 11
To facilitate cleaning, you can remove the door
from the oven as follows:
• fully open the oven door (Fig. a 1).
• Position the hooks of both hinges as
indicated (Fig. a 2).
• Slightly raise the front of the door (Fig. a 1)
and pull it out.
To replace the door follow the procedure in
reverse.
• Clean surfaces with soap and water or
mild detergent, rinse and dry. In particular,
remove oil residues and encrusted grease.
177
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC OVEN
Warranty
Disposal
The statutory warranty period applies. If the
product is defective, please contact the local
manufacturer in your country (the address is
on the back of the instruction manual) or your
reference specialised dealer.
Directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE)
For repair and warranty processing, the
following documents must be included when
sending the appliance:
• a copy of the receipt showing the date of
purchase;
• a reason for the claim or a description of the
fault.
178
Information to users
This information notice is addressed
exclusively to owners of appliances
accompanied by this symbol on the label
bearing the technical data applied to the
product (serial number label). This symbol
indicates that the product is classified,
according to current regulations, as electrical
or electronic equipment and complies with EU
directive 2002/96/EC (WEEE).
Therefore, at the end of its useful life, it must
be handled separately from household waste
by delivering it, free of charge, to a recycling
centre for electrical and electronic equipment
or by returning it to the dealer when buying
a new equivalent appliance. The user is
responsible for delivering the appliance to
appropriate collection facilities at the end of its
working life or face the penalties provided for
by current waste management legislation.
A correct waste disposal of the appliance
and its subsequent recycling, handling
and environmentally compatible disposal
helps avoid possible negative effects on
the environment and health, and promotes
the reuse and/or recycling of materials that
make up the product. Contact your local
waste disposal service or the shop where
the appliance was purchased for further
information regarding the collection systems
available. Manufacturers and importers comply
with their responsibilities for recycling, handling
and environmentally compatible disposal
either directly or by participating in a collective
system.
MICROWAVE OVEN
Note: Always refer to the microwave
operating instructions supplied with
the vehicle.
Note: Take precautions to avoid possible
exposure to excessive microwave energy
! WARNING:
a. D
o not attempt to operate this oven
with the door open since open door
operation can result in harmful exposure
to microwave energy. It is important
not to defeat or tamper with the safety
interlocks.
! WARNING:
b. D
o not place any objects between the
oven front face of the door or allow soil or
cleaner residue to accumulate on sealing
surfaces.
! WARNING:
c. If the door or door seals are damaged,
the oven must not be operated until it has
been repaired by a competent person.
! WARNING:
d. It is hazardous for anyone other than a
competent person to carry out a service
or repair operation.
! WARNING:
Important safety guidance
! WARNING: To prevent fire, burns,
electric shock and other warnings. Listed
below are, as with all appliances, certain
rules to follow and safeguards to assure high
performance from this oven.
Important instructions
1. Do not use the oven for any reason other
than food preparation, such as for drying
clothes, paper, or any other non food items
or for sterilizing purposes.
2. Do not use the oven when empty, this could
damage the oven.
3. Do not use the oven cavity for any type
of storage, such as papers, cookbook,
cookware etc.
4. Do not operate the oven without the glass
tray in place. Be sure it is sitting properly on
the rotating base.
5. Make sure you remove caps or lids prior
to cooking when you cook food sealed in
bottles.
6. Do not put foreign material between the
oven surface and door. It could result in
excessive leakage of microwave energy.
7. Do not use recycled paper products for
cooking. They may contain impurities which
could cause sparks and/or fires when used
during cooking.
! WARNING:
8. Do not pop popcorn unless popped in a
microwave approved popcorn popper or
unless it’s commercially packaged and
recommended especially for microwave
ovens. Microwave popped corn produces
a lower yield than conventional popping;
there will be a number of unpopped kernels.
Do not use oil unless specified by the
manufacturer.
! WARNING:
9. Do not cook any food surrounded by a
membrane, such as egg yolks, potatoes,
chicken livers, etc., without first piercing
them several times with a fork.
e. L
iquids or other foods must not be heated
in sealed containers since they are liable
to explode.
f. O
nly allow children to use the oven without
supervision when adequate instruction has
been given so that the child is able to use
the oven in a safe way and understands
the hazards of improper use.
g. When the appliance is operated in the
combination mode, children should only
use the oven under adult supervision due
to the temperature generated. (if provided)
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Microwave oven general
user instructions
10. Do not pop popcorn longer than the
manufacturer’s directions. (Popping time
is generally below 3 minutes). Longer
179
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
MICROWAVE OVEN
cooking does not yield more popped corn
it can cause scorching and fire.
Also, the cooking tray can become too hot
to handle or may break.
11. If smoke is observed, switch off or unplug
the appliance and keep the door closed in
order to stifle any flames.
12. W
hen heating food in plastic or paper
containers, keep an eye on the oven due
to the possibility of ignition.
13. T
he contents of feeding bottles and baby
food jars shall be stirred or shaken and the
temperature checked before consumption,
in order to avoid burns.
14. A
lways test the temperature of food
or drink which has been heated in a
microwave oven before you give it to
somebody, especially to children or elderly
people. This is important because things
which have been heated in a microwave
oven carry on getting hotter even though
the microwave oven cooking has stopped.
15. E
ggs in their shell and whole hard-boiled
eggs should not be heated in microwave
ovens since they may explode, even after
microwave heating has ended.
16. K
eep the waveguide cover clean at all
times. Wipe the oven interior with a soft
damp cloth after each use. If you leave
grease or fat anywhere in the cavity it may
overheat, smoke or even catch fire when
next using the oven.
17. N
ever heat oil or fat for deep frying as you
cannot control the temperature and doing
so may lead to overheating and fire.
180
18. Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are
able to be overheated beyond the boiling
point without appearing to be boiling due
to surface tension of the Iiquid. Visible
bubbling or boiling when the container is
removed from the microwave oven is not
always present.
This could result in very hot liquid
suddenly boiling over when a spoon or
other utensil is inserted into the liquid.
To reduce the risk of Injury to persons:
a. Do not overheat the liquid.
b. Stir the Iiquid both before and halfway
through heating it.
c. Do not use straight-sided containers with
narrow necks.
d. After heating, allow the container to stand in
the microwave oven for a short time before
removing the container
e. Use extreme care when inserting a spoon or
other utensil into the container.
EXTRACTOR HOOD
Extractor hood 524
1. Turn the oven off before cleaning
2. Keep the inside of the oven clean. When
food spatters or spilled liquids adhere to
oven walls, wipe with a damp cloth.
Mild detergent may be used if the oven gets
very dirty. The use of harsh detergent or
abrasives is not recommended.
3. The outside oven surface should be cleaned
with soap and water, rinsed and dried with
a soft cloth. To prevent damage to the
operating parts inside the oven, water should
not be allowed to seep into the ventilation
openings.
4. If the Control Panel becomes wet, clean with
a soft dry cloth. Do not use harsh detergents
or abrasives on the Control Panel.
5. If steam accumulates inside or around
the outside of the oven door, wipe with
a soft cloth. This may occur when the
microwave oven is operated under high
humidity conditions and in no way indicates
malfunction of the unit.
6. It is occasionally necessary to remove the
glass tray for cleaning. Wash the tray in
warm sudsy water or in a dishwasher.
7. The roller guide and oven cavity floor should
be cleaned regularly to avoid excessive
noise. Simply wipe the bottom surface of the
oven with mild detergent water or window
cleaner and dry. The roller guide may be
washed in mild sudsy water.
8. The oven should be cleaned regularly and
any food deposits removed;
9. Failure to maintain the oven in a clean
condition could lead to deterioration of the
surface that could adversely affect the life
of the appliance and possibly result in a
hazardous situation.
1
2
3
1
2
3
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Care of the microwave
Operating panel
Light
Filter holder with grease filter
The extractor hood 524 serves to extract water
vapour from cooking areas in motorhomes.
The integrated halogen lamps (2) serve to
illuminate the work surface.
The fan and the lighting (2) can be switched
independently via the operating panel (1).
At the same time. The integrated grease filter
(3) prevents the extraction system from being
contaminated from inside.
Note: Safety information, always refer to
the user instructions provided with
your motorhome.
Replacing the lamps on the extractor
Lamp type: max. 10W /12V halogen with
UVStop
Always switch off the lights before replacing
the lamps! The lamps get very hot during
operation. There is a risk of being burnt.
Wait until the lamp has cooled down.
There is a risk of injury if the lamp is broken.
Remove the remainder of the lamp using
suitable tools only.
181
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET
Introduction
s. Waste holding tank mult-level indicator
The Thetford cassette toilet is a high quality
product. The functional design combines
modern styling and ease of use and the toilet
forms an integrated part of your motorhome
bathroom. The Cassette toilet is manufactured
from high quality synthetic material. This
makes it a durable, user and maintenance
friendly toilet.
t. Flush water tank level indicator
The toilet is made up of two parts, a
permanently fixed part and a waste tank that
is accessible from the outside. The removable
waste tank is located, under the toilet bowl
and can be removed via a door on the outside
of the motorhome.
g
f
Parts
a. Removable Seat and Lid
b. Swivelling Toilet Bowl
c. Blade Handle
d. Flush Button
e. Waste Holding Tank Level Indicator
f. Rotating Emptying Spout
g. Automatic Pressure Release Vent
h. Sliding Cover
i. Removable Mechanism
j. Vent Plunger
k. Pull-Out Handle
l. Wheels
m. Blade Opener
n. Access Door to Waste Holding Tank
p. Electric blade opener
q. Electric ventilator
182
r. Waste pump-out system
h
m
i
l
k
Thetford C260CS & C260S
cassette toilet
The toilet is made up of two parts: a
permanently fixed part and a Waste Holding
Tank that is accessible from the outside. The
removable Waste Holding Tank is located
under the toilet bowl and can be removed via a
door on the outside of the motorhome.
j
n
Using the toilet
1. Open the access door on the outside of
your motorhome.
7. Turn the bowl to the desired position with
the lid closed and using both hands.
2. Remove the Waste Holding Tank by pulling
the safety catch (which holds the tank in
place) upwards.
8. To activate the control panel, press the
flush-button once. The control panel display
will stay activated for approximately 5
minutes. Run some water into the bowl by
pressing the flush button again briefly.
3. Pull the Waste Holding Tank outward to
the stop. Tip it slightly and take the tank
fully out.
4. Place the tank upright and turn the rotating
emptying spout upwards. The emptying
spout ensures that the tank can be easily
and hygienically emptied.
5. Remove the cap, with the measuring
cup inside, from the emptying spout and
pour the correct dosage of Thetford toilet
fluid (see product label) into the holding
tank. This avoids unpleasant smells and
keeps the inside of the tank clean. Next
add approximately 2 litres of water enough to ensure that the bottom of the
Waste Holding Tank is covered. For more
information on Thetford toilet fluids, see last
page of the Thetford user manual. Screw
the cap back onto the emptying spout and
turn back to its original position.
Note: The Emptying Spout Measuring Cap
is supplied in the same packaging as the
Thetford user manual.
! WARNING: Never add toilet fluid
directly via the blade or the toilet bowl as
this could damage the lip seal of the Waste
Holding Tank. Always pour the fluids via the
emptying spout.
6. Slide the Waste Holding Tank back into its
original position via the access door. Make
sure that it is secured with the safety catch.
Close the access door and lock it. Your
Thetford toilet is now ready to use.
! WARNING: Never use force if you
cannot get the tank back into place easily.
This may cause serious damage. If blockage
occurs, always check if the blade handle is
in the correct (closed) position.
9. The toilet may be used with the blade open
or closed. To open the blade, slide the
blade handle under the toilet bowl sideways.
After use, open the blade (if still closed) and
flush the toilet by pressing the flush button
for several seconds (if necessary re-activate
the control panel). Close the blade after use.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Preparing for use
Emptying
The Waste Holding Tank has a capacity of
18 litres and requires emptying when the red
light (LED) on the toilet control display lights
up, when the Waste Holding Tank only has
capacity for approximately 2 more litres, which
is no more than two to three further uses.
Make sure that the blade is closed. Open the
access door located outside the vehicle, pull
the safety catch upwards and remove the
Waste Holding Tank.
10. Place the Waste Holding Tank in an
upright position (Pull-Out Handle at the
top, Wheels at the bottom). Slide the
handle sideways - to the front of the tank until it snaps out of its locked position.
11. Pull the handle up and wheel the Waste
Holding Tank to an authorised waste
disposal point.
12. Push the handle back into its locked
position. Turn the emptying spout upwards
and remove the cap from the spout. Hold
the Waste Holding Tank in such a way
that during emptying you can operate the
vent plunger with your thumb. To empty
the tank without splashing, depress the
vent plunger while emptying the tank.
After emptying, rinse the tank and blade
thoroughly with water.
183
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET
! WARNING: Do not seriously shake the
tank or use high pressure water cleaners.
This may cause damage to the tank’s
interior.
Note: The vent plunger should only be
depressed once the emptying spout is
pointing downwards. Prepare the toilet
for re-use if required. Slide the Waste
Holding Tank into the toilet and close
the access door.
Cleaning and maintenance
The toilet should be cleaned and maintained
regularly, depending on the amount of use. To
clean Thetford toilets, we advise using water
and Thetford Bathroom Cleaner.
Note: Never use bleach, vinegar or other
powerful household cleaners that contain
these substances. These may cause
permanent damage to the seals and other
toilet components.
Toilet bowl
• Squirt Thetford Bathroom Cleaner into the
toilet bowl.
• Flush the toilet bowl with water and wipe
down the rest of the toilet with a damp cloth.
• Clean seat and lid The seat and lid can easily
be removed: Lift the seat and lid assembly
and pull the round pins (inside the assembly)
outwards from the pin holes. After cleaning,
replace the seat and lid by positioning the
round pins in front of the pin holes and push
the lid and seat downwards.
• To keep your flush water fresh and to
prevent deposits from forming in your toilet
bowl, add a correct dosage of Aqua Rinse
in your flush water tank, if present, on your
toilet.
Tip! For a really shining toilet, dry with a soft
dry cloth after cleaning.
184
Waste holding tank
To keep your Waste Holding Tank fresh and
clean, Thetford has developed a number
of different toilet fluids. Thetford toilet fluids
suppress smells, reduce formation of gas,
promote breakdown of toilet waste and
increase the life span of a mobile toilet. See
page 50 of the Thetford user manual for more
information. We advise a thorough cleaning of
the Waste Holding Tank once each season,
using Thetford’s Cassette Tank Cleaner.
• Remove the removable mechanism from
the Waste Holding Tank by turning it anticlockwise and rinse it under a tap.
• Remove the cover plate from the Automatic
Pressure Release Vent by prising it up
using a small screwdriver. Use one hand
to push the Automatic Pressure Release
Vent open while holding the float of the
Automatic Pressure Release Vent on the
inside of the tank with the other hand. Push
the float upwards, turn it 180 degrees and
remove it from below. Remove the rubber
seal underneath the float. Rinse the float
and rubber seal under a tap. Replace the
Pressure Release Vent using the same
method in reverse.
The rubber seals in the toilet (the lip seal,
the mechanism seal, the automatic pressure
release vent seal and the cap seal) should
be regularly cleaned with water and treated
with Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant.
This will ensure that the seals remain flexible
and in good condition. If the toilet is not to be
used for any length of time, it is important to
treat the seals with Thetford High Grade Seal
Lubricant after cleaning.
Note: Never use Vaseline or any vegetable
oil except olive oil. These may cause leakage
or malfunction. The lip seal is a part of the
toilet that is subject to wear. Depending
upon the extent and manner of use, the
seals will become less effective and will need
replacing periodically.
You can use your Thetford Cassette Toilet as
normal in cold weather as long as the toilet is
situated in a heated location. If there is a risk of
freezing we advise that the toilet is drained by
following the instructions under ‘Storage’. For
environmental reasons the use of antifreeze,
such as that used in car radiators, is not
recommended.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Winter operation
Storage
It is important that you follow the instructions
below if you do not expect to use your
Thetford toilet for a long (winter) period.
• With the vehicle fresh water tank drained,
(See “Fresh Water System” on page 51 for
how to drain the tank), press the toilet flush
button until water stops flowing into the
bowl. Close the blade. Open the access
door on the outside of your motorhome
and empty the Waste Holding Tank at
an authorised waste dump. Follow the
instructions for cleaning and maintenance.
To allow the Waste Holding Tank to dry,
do not place the cap back on the emptying
spout of the tank.
Thetford warranty refer to the Thetford
user handbook.
185
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET
Cassette toilet fault finding
Fault
Remedy
Bowl does
not drain
when toilet is
flushed.
DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. While inside the motorhome turn flush knob
anti-clockwise to open valve blade and leave it in the open position. Open
access door on side of motorhome. Rotate pour-out spout outward. Place
appropriate size container under spout cap. Remove cap carefully. Allow bowl
contents to drain into container. This will lower the water level in the bowl.
Replace cap and return pour-out spout to stored position. DO NOT REMOVE
CASSETTE. Go inside the motorhome and turn the flush knob clockwise to
close valve blade. Now, the cassette may be removed following the normal
removal and emptying procedure.
Cassette is
overfilled
Odours
Use proper amount of holding tank deodorant specified on bottle.
Soiled bowl
after flushing
Partially fill bowl to cover soiled portion of bowl. Next flush will dissolve waste.
Tip: Leave valve blade open during use.
No power to
add water to
toilet bowl
Check cassette safety sensor switch and fuse-holder for proper engagement
and operation.
Note: Cassette has to be removed to reach switch and fuse.
Insert cassette and try adding water to toilet bowl.
Toilet can be flushed manually. Add water. Add water to bowl from a separate
container. Turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade. Turn clockwise
to close valve blade.
Cassette
cannot be
removed
Check for obstacles under retaining clip. Depress retaining clip several times
to check operation. Remove cassette. Flush knob and valve blade in partial
open position. Close valve blade by moving knob clockwise.
CAUTION: If valve blade is open during cassette removal, severe
damage to system can occur. Never force insertion or removal of the
cassette tank.
186
Valve blade
mechanism
sticks or is
hard to open
Spray light film of silicone on blade.
Major unit
malfunction
Contact your original Motorhome Dealer.
THETFORD C400 CASSETTE TOILET
These operating instructions cover Thetford
cassette toilet models C-402C, C-402X and
C-403L. There are a few differences in the use
of these models. Make sure that you follow the
instructions that apply to your toilet model.
The parts and functions that are referred to by
letters are illustrated in later pages.
The actions to be taken, referred to by
numbers, are illustrated are also illustrated in
page 192.
Parts and functions
C-402C and C-402X
a. Handle: opens and shuts the valve blade
b. F
lush knob: when this pressed, an electric
pump fills the bowl with water
c. L
evel indicator display: the red LED on the
display lights up when the waste tank is full
(C-402C and C-402X). When the flush know
is pressed briefly, the display shows the
level in the waste tank and the level in the
water tank (C-402X).
d. R
emovable seat and cover
e. C
over plates
f. S
torage compartment for toilet fluids (only
the tall model)
g. Safety catch: holds the waste tank in place
h. Water filling tunnel: for easy filling of the
water tank.
i. Cover: guarantees optimal hygiene. Opens
when the waste tank is located in the toilet
and closes when the waste tank is removed.
o. Automatic pressure release valve: ventilates
the waste tank when this located in the
cassette toilet. Avoids excessive pressure in
the waste tank.
p. Pull-out handle: for easy transport of the
waste tank.
q. Wheels
r. Rotating emptying spout: ensures that the
waste tank can be easily and hygienically
emptied.
s. Water filling extension
t. Access hatch to waste tank and water
filling funnel: lockable from the outside of the
vehicle.
C-402L
a. Handle: opens and shuts the valve blade.
b Flush knob: when pressed a central
electric pump in the vehicle pumps water
into the bowl.
c. Level indicator display: the red LED on the
display lights up when the waste tank is full.
When the flush knob is pressed briefly, the
display shows the level in the waste tank.
d. Removable seat and cover
e. Cover plate
f. Storage compartment for toilet fluids (only
the tall models)
g. Safety catch: holds the waste tank in place.
h. Cover: guarantees optimal hygiene. Opens
when the waste tank is located in the toilet.
i. Removable mechanism
j. Valve blade opener
j. Removable mechanism
k. Valve blade / Valve seal
k. Valve blade opener
l. Vent plunger: for emptying without splashing.
l. Valve blade / valve seal
m. Automatic pressure release vent: ventilates
the waste tank when this is located in the
cassette toilet. Avoids excessive pressure
in the waste tank.
m. Vent plunger: for emptying with splashing.
n: Upper handle
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Thetford C400 Cassette Toilet
n. Upper handle: for easy emptying
o. Pull-out handle: for easy transport of the
waste tank.
p. Wheels
187
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD C400 CASSETTE TOILET
q.Rotating emptying spout: ensures that the
waste tank can be easily and hygienically
emptied.
r.Access hatch to waste tank: lockable from
the outside of the vehicle.
Preparing for use
C-402C, C-402X and C-403L
1. Open the access door on the outside of
your motorhome.
C-402C and C-402X
2. Rotate the waste tank emptying spout
90 degrees and remove the water filling
extension (you will find it positioned beneath
the handle closest to the emptying spout).
3. Rotate the waterfill funnel outwards, remove
the cap and place the extension on the
waterfill funnel. Add the stated amount of
Thetford fresh water additive to the water
tank. This ensures a better and cleaner flush
and keeps the water in the flush tank fresh.
4. Fill the water tank with clean water.
Warning: keep water level below the top of
the water filling funnel.
5. Remove the extension and return to its
original position on the waste tank.
Note: depending on the space between the
door and waste tank, this extension part
may also be fixed on the door with a hook.
Screw the cap back onto the water filling
funnel and push back inwards towards the
side of the flush water tank.
Note: 150ml of water will remain in the
waterfill funnel when the water tank is empty.
C-402C, C-402X and C-403L
6. Remove the waste tank by pulling the safety
catch upwards.
7. Pull the waste tank outward to the stop. Tip
it slightly and take the tank fully out.
8. Place the tank upright and turn the
emptying spout upwards.
9. Remove the cap, with the measuring cup
inside, from the emptying spout and pour
188
the stated quantity of toilet fluid into the
waste tank. This avoids unpleasant smells in
the waste tank and keeps the inside of the
waste tank clean. Next add approximately
2 litres of water - enough to ensure that
the bottom of the waste tank is covered.
Screw the cap back onto the emptying
spout. Turn the emptying spout back to its
original position. N.B. The emptying spout
measuring cap is supplied in the same
packaging as this manual.
! WARNING: Never add toilet fluid via the
valve blade or via the toilet bowl.
10. Slide the waste tank back into its original
position via the access door.
! WARNING: Never use force if you
cannot get the tank back into place easily.
This may cause serious damage.
11. Made sure that the waste tank is secured
with the safety catch. Shut the access
door and lock it.
12. R
un water into the bowl by pressing the
flush knob briefly or open the valve blade
by turning the handle anti-clockwise. Your
Thetford toilet is now ready for use.
13. A
fter us, open the valve blade (if still
closed) by turning the handle anticlockwise. Flush the toilet by pressing the
flush knob for several seconds. Close the
valve blade after use.
Note: Do not leave water in the bowl if the
toilet is not being used. This does not help
to reduce unpleasant smells and only leads
to flooding.
Note: To prevent clogging, we recommend
using Aqua soft, Thetford’s quickly dissolving
toilet paper.
! WARNING: Please do not travel with a
flush water tank that is too full (we advise
empty) but not filled more than half full.
Do not travel with water in the toilet bowl.
Failure to adhere to this notice may result in
water damage to yxour motorhome.
Emptying
The waste tank has a capacity of 19 litres
and must be emptied at the latest when the
red light in the level display lights up. The
indicator lamp will light up when the waste
tank can still take about two litres, which is
about three uses.
Note: Do not allow the waste tank to
become too full.
Use C-402C, C-402X and C-403L
14. M
ake sure that the valve blade is closed.
Open the access door located outside the
vehicle. Pull the safety catch upwards and
remove the waste tank.
15. R
emove the water filling extension first to
avoid it getting lost during the emptying of
the waste tank.
16. Stand the waste tank upright (pull out
handle at the top, wheels at the bottom).
Press the handle down and move it away
from the waste tank until it snaps out of its
locked position.
17. Pull the handle up and wheel the waste
tank to an authorised waste dump.
17. Pull the handle up and wheel the waste
tank to an authorised waste dump.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Use C-402C, C-402X and C-403L
18. Push the handle back. Turn the emptying
spout upwards and remove the cap from
the spout. Hold the waste tank by the
upper handle with one hand, while placing
your other hand by the rear handle so that
during emptying you can operate the vent
plunger with your thumb.
To empty the tank without splashing,
depress the vent plunger while emptying
the tank. After emptying, flush the tank
thoroughly with water. Also clean the valve
blade with water.
Note: The vent plunger should only be
pressed once the emptying spout is pointing
downwards!
19. If required make the toilet ready for
use once again. Return the water filing
extension to its original position on the
waste tank. Slide the waste tank into the
toilet and close the access door.
Storage
It is important that you follow the instructions
below if you do not expect the Thetford toilet
for a long period.
Completely empty the water tank through
the drain tube, which also serves as a level
indicator. Take the drain tube out of the clamp
and carefully pull it downwards from the upper
plug. Direct the drain tube out through the
access door opening to allow water to flow
out. Afterwards, be sure the drain tub is placed
back into the clamp first and then pushed into
the upper plug.
189
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD C400 CASSETTE TOILET
C-403L
Waste tank
Drain the central water system of the
motorhome.
We advise a thorough cleaning of the waste
tank once each season.
C-402C, C-402X and C-403L
• Remove the mechanism from the waste tank
by turning it anti-clockwise, as shown on the
waste tank. Rinse the complete mechanism
under a tap.
20. O
pen the valve blade by turning the handle
on the toilet anti-clockwise. Press the blue
knob until water stops flowing into the
bowl. Close the valve blade.
C-402C and C-402X
21. O
pen the access door on the outside of
your motorhome and turn the water filling
funnel outwards. Remove the cap and
empty the water filling funnel by turning it a
quarter turn anti-clockwise.
C-402C, C-402X and C-403L
22. R
emove the waste tank and empty this
at an authorise waste dump. Follow the
instructions for cleaning and maintenance.
23. R
eplace the waste tank and open the valve
blade by moving the handle on the toilet
to the left.
Cleaning and maintenance
The toilet should be cleaned and maintained
regularly, depending on the amount of use. To
clean Thetford toilets, we advise using water
and Thetford Plastic Cleaner.
Note: Never use household cleaners
(bleach, solvents or other powerful cleaning
agents). These may cause permanent
damage to the seals and other toilet
components.
Toilet
• Squirt Thetford Plastic Cleaner in the toilet.
• Flush the bowl with water and wipe down
the rest of the toilet with a damp cloth.
Tip! For a really shining toilet, dry it with a soft
dry cloth after cleaning.
• Clean seat and lid. The seat and lid can
easily be removed. Lift the lid and seat
together and pull upwards. After cleaning,
replace the seat and lid by positioning the
round pins above the holes and then pushing
the lid and seat downwards.
190
• Remove the cover plate from the automatic
pressure release vent by prising it up using
a screwdriver. Use one hand to push the
automatic pressure vent open, while holding
the float of the automatic pressure release
vent on the inside of the tank with the other
hand. Push the float upwards, turn the
float half a turn and remove it from below.
Remove the rubber seal that is under the
float. Rinse the float and the rubber seal
under a tap. Replace the rubber seal and
float for the automatic pressure release vent
in the same way.
The rubber seals in the toilet(the valve blade seal,
the mechanism, seal and the automatic pressure
release vent seal and the cap seal) should be
regularly treated with Thetford High Grade Seal
Lubricant. This will ensure that the seals remain
supple and in good condition. If the toilet is not
to be used for any length of time, it is important
to treat the seals with Thetford High Grade Seal
Lubricant after cleaning.
Note: Never use Vaseline or any
vegetable oil except olive oil. These may
cause leakage.
Note: The valve blade is part of the toilet
that is subject to wear. Depending on the
extent and manner of service, after a certain
period the seal will become less effective
and must be replaced.
Winter operation
You can use you Thetford cassette toilet as
usual in cold weather, as long as the toilet is
situated in a heated location. If this is not the
case there is a risk of freezing. In that case we
advise that the toilet is drained by following the
instructions under ‘Storage’.
Thetford Warranty
Thetford B.V. offers the end users of its
products a three year guarantee. In the
case of defects within the guarantee period
Thetford will replace or repair the product.
In this instance, the costs of replacement,
labour costs for the replacement of defective
components and/or the costs of the parts
themselves will be paid by Thetford.
1. To claim under this guarantee, the user
must take the product to a Service Centre
recognised by Thetford. The claim will be
assessed there.
2. Components replaced during repair under
guarantee become the property of Thetford.
Customer service
Please visit the Thetford web site if you require
further information or have questions about
your toilet, www.thetford.eu The information
available includes frequently asked questions,
problems and solution, instructions for repair,
tips and a list of Thetford dealers near you.
If you still have questions or remarks, please
contact the Customer Service Department in
your country (see the addresses at the back of
this manual).
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
For environmental reasons the use of
antifreeze, such as that used in a car radiator,
is not advised.
Liability
Thetford is not liable for loss and/or damage
caused directly or indirectly by use of the toilet.
Flush water tank
contents
Waste tank contents
15 L
19.3 L
3. This guarantee does not prejudice current
consumer protection law.
4. This guarantee is not valid in the case
of products that are for, or are used for,
commercial purposes.
5. Guarantee claims falling into one of the
following categories will be honoured:
- the product has been improperly used or
the instructions in the manual have not
been followed;
- the product has not been installed in
accordance with the instructions;
- alterations have been made to the
product;
- the product has been repaired by
a Service Centre not recognised by
Thetford;
- the serial number or product code has
been changed;
- the product has been damaged by
circumstances outside the normal use of
the product.
191
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET
192
THETFORD CASSETTE TOILET TROUBLESHOOTING
Fault
Remedy
Bowl does
not drain
when toilet is
flushed.
DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. While inside the motorhome turn flush knob
anti-clockwise to open valve blade and leave it in the open position. Open
access door on side of motorhome. Rotate pour-out spout outward. Place
appropriate size container under spout cap. Remove cap carefully. Allow bowl
contents to drain into container. This will lower the water level in the bowl.
Replace cap and return pour-out spout to stored position. DO NOT REMOVE
CASSETTE. Go inside the motorhome and turn the flush knob clockwise to
close valve blade. Now, the cassette may be removed following the normal
removal and emptying procedure.
Cassette is
overfilled
Odours
Use proper amount of holding tank deodorant specified on bottle.
Toilet tissue
does not
fit into
compartment.
Since some tissues are supplied on larger rolls, it may be necessary to use
some tissue before storing
into compartment.
Soiled bowl
after flushing
Partially fill bowl to cover soiled portion of bowl. Next flush will dissolve waste.
Tip: Leave valve blade open during use.
No power to
add water to
toilet bowl
Check cassette safety sensor switch and fuse-holder for proper engagement
and operation.
Note: Cassette has to be removed to reach switch and fuse.
Insert cassette and try adding water to toilet bowl.
Toilet can be flushed manually. Add water. Add water to bowl from a separate
container. Turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade. Turn clockwise
to close valve blade.
Cassette
cannot be
removed
Check for obstacles under retaining clip. Depress retaining clip several times
to check operation. Remove cassette. Flush knob and valve blade in partial
open position. Close valve blade by moving knob clockwise.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Cassette toilet
fault finding
CAUTION: If valve blade is open during cassette removal, severe
damage to system can occur. Never force insertion or removal of the
cassette tank.
Valve blade
mechanism
sticks or is
hard to open
Spray light film of silicone on blade.
Major unit
malfunction
Contact your original Motorhome Dealer.
193
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
WINDOWS
Windows
Seitz Window Systems
To open, depress the button on the handle
(not on Kon-Tiki) and turn the handle, the
majority rotate anti-clockwise with one handle
on the right stay that will rotate clockwise.
Once all catches are open swivel the window
pane open to the desired position.
These positions are set by a ratchet on the
stay, it has 3 pre-set positions. To close, open
the window all the way past the last position
and it will then close.
The same phenomenon may also occur
when washing your vehicle on a hot day.
The condensation should clear itself when
the ambient conditions return to normal and
the air between the panes dries. However, if
this is taking a longer time than required, the
breathable plug (normally located in the top
corner of the window) can be removed, with
a pin or sharp object, and replaced when the
panes are dry. Care should be taken when
doing this.
All opening windows have two catch positions.
The first position is for ventilation the second
seals the window from ventilation and rain.
Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning
Kon-Tiki Polyvision Acrylic Windows
To open, turn knobs anti-clockwise and open
catches. Swivel the window pane open to the
desired position and close knobs clockwise to
lock in the open position.
Equally, care should be taken when using a
drying cloth that it is clean and free from grit.
To close, reverse the operation.
Plastoform Window System
All opening windows have two catch positions.
The first position is for ventilation the second
seals the window from ventilation and rain.
Within these instructions you will be able to
find information to most common questions
about correct usage of PLASTOFORM Blanca
windows. If you can’t find the information you
need here, please contact us directly on email:
[email protected]
Window Condensation
Kon-tiki windows are not vacuum sealed.
Instead the double panes of acrylic plastic are
fitted with a breathable plug on the inner pane.
It is possible, in weather where extremes
in temperatures occur between night and
day, that customer will notice condensation
between the panes.
194
The material used to produce most
motorhome windows is acrylic plastic. While
the acrylic used is very durable, it is able to
be scratched with relative ease and therefore,
care must be taken when cleaning your vehicle
not to use aggressive cleaning products.
While Driving
When vehicle is in motion all windows must be
fully closed.
WINDOWS
Never use blind on direct sunlight. If you use
the blind on direct sunlight, also for a shorter
period, heat will accumulate between window
and blind and window may get damaged
(will start bending, ballooning…).
Cleaning
Never use abrasive and corrosive substances
or solvents on windows, such as turpentine,
spirit, dishwasher detergents, as they will
damage acrylic and/or print. We recommend
cleaning with generous amount of water or
mild cleaner intended for use on acrylic. Even
cleaning with dry cloth can damage the acrylic
and leave scratches; always use moist sponge
or moist soft cloth. Never clean windows
with high pressure washer. Also carwash can
damage windows and cause scratches or
other damages.
Note: Acrylic material can get scratched
very easily, please consider above
instructions for cleaning, so that you will not
cause scratches or other damages while
cleaning.
Condensation
Condensation can appear on the window
or between both panes. This is a normal
occurrence that appears because of different
temperatures inside and outside and
properties of acrylic itself. Condensation will
disperse after some time. This doesn’t mean
that there is something wrong with the window
or that it is leaking. With properly ventilating
the vehicle, you can in most cases prevent
also condensation.
Handles with button: Always push the
button when opening/closing handle.
Stays with click stops: You will hear clicks
when opening the window. Every click
represents position in which a window can
stay opened. When closing the window,
you must open to it’s widest opening and
then close. Do not try to close it without first
opening it as wide as it goes, as this will
damage the stays.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Sun blinds
Stays with knob screw: Always make sure to
unscrew the knob before closing the window.
Catcher enables three positions of the window.
Open position is where the handle is open
placed on the outer part of the catcher. If the
handle is placed in the middle of the catcher,
this is position for ventilating. Closed position
is position where the handle is closed on the
inner part of the catcher.
Opening and closing the windows
Your windows are equipped with either
handles with button or handles without button
and stays. Consider the following instruction
to avoid the most common damages that can
occur:
1.1 open position
1.2 ventilation
195
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
WINDOW BLINDS
screen does not cause an obstruction.
Blinds that shade from the top downwards
must be kept completely open, or be opened
regularly to allow the heat to escape.
Keeping the windows in ventilation position
allows heat to escape.
1.3 closed position
Plastoform Blanca windows are top quality
windows from acrylic material. If you consider
above instructions, your windows can stay
in good shape for a long time. Windows also
require periodic maintenance and check by
your dealer at least once per year.
Never fully close a roller blind system when
storing the vehicle or when not in use for
longer periods!
or vehicles containing blinds from the top
F
downwards or with other types of reflective
blinds / curtains, please make sure that these
blinds are also ventilated or not fully closed.
Horrex Window Blinds
Ensure that all windows and roof vents are
closed when the vehicle travels on the road.
To operate, pull down or up by holding the
finger bar.
To adjust the tension of the Horrex blind:
• The blind will come up from the bottom of
the cassette to close and the flynet will come
down from the top
• Only operate by holding the fingergrip(s) pulling on one side will cause uneven running
and snagging.
• It is not recommended that blinds and/or
flyscreens are left in the down position for
long periods, or when travelling, as this can
result in fatigue of the spring.
• Clean the cassette, side track and fabrics
with mild detergent and water.
• Lubrication of mechanism or spring is not
required or recommended.
For more detailed information, see
manufacturer’s instructions.
Blind Advice
In case of prolonged exposure to the sun roller
blinds should not be completely closed as this
could cause excessive heat concentration at
the top of the window, due to characteristics
of the glazing material the windows could be
adversely affected.
Blinds that shade from the bottom upwards
it is necessary to leave a gap of a few
centimetres open at the top, this way the heat
between window and blind can escape. A fly
196
In each corner piece there is an cord tensioner
(see photo). By unscrewing the hexagon
screw, the cord can move through the cord
tensioner. When you pull the cord, the tension
will get higher, when you let it move back the
tension will get less.
Care instructions: Clean the blind only with a
damp sponge. Clean on a regular basis to avoid
dirt particle build up as this can damage the
blind material. Use only water or with mild suds
or a vacuum cleaner.
In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave
the flynet closed for a long time.
SKY VIEW
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Skyview operating instructions
Safety and care instructions
Note: Before opening the dome please
check if all handles are disengaged and
no objects are in the opening area of the
rooflight.
For Manual Skyviews
To open, turn the handle anti-clockwise to the
required opening position.
To close, turn the handle clockwise until
the dome lies on the seal and a resistance
is noticeable.
Note: Before you start your journey, close
the rooflight by turning the handle to the
closed position.
Electric Skyviews
Release the retaining catches on either side of
the skyview.
Opening/closing the
blind and fly net
Pull the end rod from the
recessed part and push
it in a position you
desire. You can adjust
the incidence of light
with the second
operating bar.
Safety precautions
Repairs should be
carried out only by
trained personnel.
Inform an approved dealer in case of defects
and malfunctions.
Before starting off, check the roof light for
damage in the dome (tension cracks) and the
opening mechanism which could arise owing
to, for example, branches and other natural
causes. Do not step on the screen.
Do not leave the vehicle with the roof light open
(danger of burglary and water penetration).
To open and close the window press the
button positioned below the window in the
centre of the moulded surround.
Do not open in strong wind, rain or snowfall.
Before opening, remove snow, ice, dirt etc.
from the dome.
Keep the button depressed until the desired
opening angle.
Malfunctions must be repaired by an approved
dealer at once. Do not use caustic detergents
(danger of tension cracks in the dome).
To close press the button until the window sits
in the seals and engages catch.
Please make sure that no persons or objects
are in the closing area of the rooflight.
Before setting off close the dome and check
the locking mechanism.
Avoid high speed (maximum speed
recommended is 130 km/h). Do not close the
blind more than 2/3 during the day (danger of
heat build up). Before starting off, open
the blind.
197
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
SKYVIEW / ROOFLIGHTS
Care instructions
Mini Heki rooflight (when fitted)
Clean the dome with the Seitz acrylic cleaner.
Opaque spots and light scratches on the
dome can be removed with the Seitz Acrylic
Polish and the Seitz Special Polishing cloth.
Use talcum powder regulary (4 times yearly) to
care for the rubber seals.
Clean the blinds only with water and mild soap
suds or a vacuum cleaner.
Note: The guarantee becomes null and void
if the care and safety instructions are
not followed.
Roof lights
To open depress the button (Fig. A).
When opening the roof lights, care must be
taken to release the locking mechanism as the
unit is raised.
Roof lights must be fully closed when
driving. Roof lights provide essential fixed
levels of ventilation.
Pull the bar down and forwards (Fig. B).
By pushing the bar in to the marked rest
positions (Fig. C).
198
ROOFLIGHTS
Two extra opening angles apart from the
one in which the dome is fully opened can
be chosen. The intermediate position can be
fixed with a slide marked with the arrows. Care
should be taken to ensure the dome is closed
and locked for transit with the bar located
behind the locking button (Fig. D).
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Roof light blind and flyscreen
The blind and flyscreen operate Independently
of each other and are engaged by connecting
to each other and sliding.
Safety precautions:
1. Repairs should be carried out only by
trained personnel.
2. Inform an approved dealer in case of
defects and malfunctions.
3. Before starting off, check the rooflight for
damage in the acrylic dome (tension cracks)
and the winding mechanism which could
arise owing to, for example, branches and
other natural causes.
4. Do not step on the acrylic dome.
5. Close the roof light before starting off
(check whether it is locked).
The blind flynet operate together and engage
via the clips in the bar, then slide to gain the
desired blackout or ventilation (Fig. E).
Heki care instructions
6. Do not leave the vehicle with the rooflight
open (danger of burglary or from rain).
7. Do not open in strong wind or rain.
8. Before opening, remove snow, ice, dirt, etc.
from the acrylic dome.
Clean the blind only with a damp sponge.
Clean on a regular basis to avoid dust/ dirt
particle build up as this can damage the blind
material. Use only water or with mild suds or a
vacuum cleaner.
9. Malfunctions are to be repaired by an
approved dealer at once.
In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave
the flynet closed for a long time.
11. Do not operate whilst the vehicle is moving.
10. Do not use caustic detergents (danger of
tension cracks in the acrylic dome).
199
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ROOFLIGHTS
Midi-Heki rooflight
Opening the Dome
Closing the Dome
(drive and rest position)
Push the bar with both hands on the right and
the left side in such a way that the hook bolt
(1) the dome on the left and the right side and
the bar lies on the push button (2). Check if the
dome is locked.
Intermediate position for the dome
By pushing the bar into the marked rest
position, two extra opening angles, apart from
the one in which the dome is fully opened, can
be chosen.
200
ROOFLIGHTS
are designed to hold the skylight open to
the selected position. In gusty or windy
conditions the Skylight should be closed
to prevent it from being blown fully open or
slamming shut.
• Clean the blinds only with water and mild
soap suds
• The guarantee becomes null and void if
these instructions are not followed.
Doors
In order to provide customers with the latest
designs of door furniture it is possible, due
to the use of natural wood, that warping may
occur. This should not detract from the correct
functioning of items fitted in the motorhome.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
! WARNING: The retaining catches
Information
During the normal travelling vehicle vibration
and flexing may cause some of the furniture
doors to become out of alignment.
With crank
To open, rotate the crank until a resistance is
noticeable during the operation.
For your convenience many hinges are
adjustable.
To close, reverse the operation and then
check if locked into position.
Electric version
To open, push button until desired position is
reached or the electric motor switches off.
To close, reverse the operation and then
check if locked into position.
Care instructions:
• Please clean the acrylic panes with the Seitz
Acrylic Cleaner.
• Stains and light scratches on the acrylic
pane can be removed by using the Seitz
Acrylic Polish and the Seitz special
polishing cloth.
• Use talcum powder (4 times yearly) to care
for the rubber seals
201
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
OMNISTEP / AWNINGS
Omnistep single step
Operation
The OMNISTEP is operated by the lever
switch.
Important: when extending the step, hold the
switch until the step is completely extended.
Never mount the step if retracted of if not fully
extended, because then the blocking is not
working and the motor can be damaged.
Check if the step is retracted before departure.
Maintenance
Fiamma F45S/F45L side awning
In order to avoid
unnecessary strain on
the awning as well as
on the vehicle side, we
suggest that the legs
be extended about 1m
from the opening.
nscrew the leg knob
U
to slide the leg out of
its seat.
Dirt and frost can prevent the step from
operating properly. In this case the moving
parts should be cleaned or defrosted.
All points of movement are layered in
maintenance-free bearings.
In case of electrical failure
If the step does not retract by motor: Loosen
the square connection according to fig. 5
(actions 1, 2 and 3), push the footboard in (4)
and tie it to the frame.
Current drawn
Grasp the leg near its
hingejoint and pull it in a
horizontal direction.
Lower the leg as shown
in the figure.
5 A. When fully extended or retracted:
14-18 A
After unrolling the
awning completely,
adjust the legs at the
chosen height.
Fig. 4
To avoid that the awning is lifted up by an
unexpected gust of wind, it is necessary
to secure the legs to the ground with the
provided hooks. For greater safety, we
strongly advise you also use some storm
cords in the upper part of each support leg or
anchor the awning with the Fiamma Tie-Down
Kit strap.
Fig. 5
202
AWNINGS
Please find here a list of some practical
advice for the best and long lasting use of
your awning:
If you want to fasten the support legs to
the vehicle, put the terminals into the wall
brackets. The brackets can be fixed only in
reinforced points.
! WARNING: We recommend that the
awning be ground mounted only. Side
mounting brackets are supplied. But in
inclement weather conditions it may cause
damage to the motorhome bodywork.
! WARNING: The awning is a sun
protection, please roll up your awning in
case of rain, wind or snow. Alternatively
lower one side of your awning, so that water
can flow away and assemble the tension
rafter as shown in the figure (not included for
all awning lengths).
Make sure that the awning perfectly rolls
up: when it is, the red indicators on the front
profile ends are no longer visible. A damaged
fabric does not allow the awning to perfectly
roll up. Never use the awning with a damaged
canopy. Wash the canopy with Fiamma BRILL.
Note: In case of problems refer to the
awning user manual or contact your dealer.
Suggestions for use and maintenance for
the fabric of your awning.
1. Open and close the awning in normal
condition of dampness and temperature
(at night or in the morning) making sure
the fabric has no sharp objects on it and is
clean.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
In low temperature, the fabric becomes
less pliable and there is a risk of cracks.
2. When closing the awning after a long
period in the sun, wrinkles may appear and
prevent the awning closing completely.
In this case the security of the awning is
not compromised, as the security winch
will prevent accidental opening. If wrinkles
appear re-open the awning and leave in
the sun for some hours and the folds will
disappear. Then of course you need to reclose the awning in normal conditions (see
point 1).
3. Residual damp can cause spots on the
fabric. If the awning has to be closed when
the fabric is damp we suggest you re-open
it as soon as possible to dry.
4. We suggest you avoid using the awning
below 0°C.
5. When closing the awning you should
support the front bar.
6. Most of the dirt seen on the fabric will
be superficial and can be cleaned with
water and a cloth. Stubborn marks can be
removed using a light detergent. Please do
not use aggressive chemical substances
and do not use high pressure cleaning tools.
Fiamma fabrics are made with PVC and
Polyester layers and their properties can
change in certain weather conditions.
For example, if you close the awning which
has been opened in the sun for a long time,
wrinkles can appear on the fabric.
203
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THULE OMNISTOR/AWNING
204
Thule Omnistor
-For the mounting height of the bottom
mounting brackets ask your dealer.
-An awning is a sun and not an all-weather
protection. The awning should be closed in
case of storm, snow or heavy rain fall (avoid
formation of a water pocket)
THULE OMNISTOR/AWNING
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Escape Awning
205
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
REVERSING CAMERA / SENSORS /
CYCLE RACKS
Reverse Camera System
Depending on the specification of your
motorhome, a reverse camera system may
be installed. This uses a single or twin lens
camera system mounted at high level on the
rear of the motorhome, connected to an LCD
screen which forms part of the windscreen
mounted rear view mirror.
The reverse camera system is powered
whenever the vehicle engine is running.
Single lens camera system
While the engine is running, the LCD screen
can be switched on at any time to view the
image from the camera, using the power
button on the screen/mirror. If Reverse gear is
selected, the screen will automatically switch
on to display the image from the camera.
Twin lens camera system.
While the engine is running, the LCD screen
can be switched on at any time to view the
image from the camera, using the power
button on the screen/mirror. Pressing the V1/
V2 then toggles between the images from
the two rear cameras, which show a distance
view, and a close range view. If Reverse gear
is selected, the screen will automatically switch
on and display the image from the close range
camera.
Note: The rear view camera (or reverse
sensor system) is a driving aid, it is not
a supplement to, nor a replacement for,
safe driving and good all-round driver
observation. The driver is responsible
for the safe manoeuvring and detection
of pedestrians, objects and obstacles
particularly when reversing.
The rear view camera image may be
distracting or disorientating to some drivers
and as such extra care and awareness must
be observed at all times when using the
camera. When reversing a responsible adult
should assist in guiding the driver into confined
spaces particularly where obstacles or
pedestrians may be present or when visibility
or lighting levels are reduced.
206
The mandatory required rear view door mirrors
must be maintained and used as the primary
rear visibility aid.
The camera image quality can be affected
by dirt, road spray, rain droplets, snow and
ice and as such the camera lens will require
regular inspection and cleaning. Image quality
will be reduced at night-time or by bright lights
shone in low level lighting conditions.
Reverse Sensor System
If a reverse sensor system is fitted to your
motorhome, this will use a row of sensors
fitted at low level on the motorhome, to detect
obstacles. The system will automatically switch
on when Reverse gear is selected.
A buzzer located close to the driver’s seat
(within a bed base) will then sound when an
obstacle has been detected and is close to the
rear of the motorhome. An intermittent tone
indicates an obstacle at the maximum distance
of the sensors range, and the time interval
between tones will reduce as the distance to
the obstacle reduces, until a constant tone is
heard.
Please consider that the distance is measured
from the rear bumper of the motorhome – if an
accessory such as a cycle rack is added, the
driver must take into account the additional
clearance required beyond the bumper, when
reversing toward an obstacle.
If a tow bar is installed, this should include a
facility to disable the reverse sensor system
when a trailer is connected. A tow bar
installation featuring this facility can be installed
by your Swift Group dealer.
There is a volume control on the buzzer with
three settings ON, LOW and OFF.
Cycle racks
The Swift Group allows the fitment of a two
cycle rack carrier and we have made provision
for this pre positioned mounting rails fitted to
the rear of your motorhome.
These are spaced at various heights as shown
in the table below.
CYCLE RACKS
Please be aware a cycle rack can not be fitted
onto a model where there is a rear escape
window.
Contact your dealer for clarification if your van
has a rear window.
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Not available
✓
635, 679
744, 714, 724
649, 669, 625
Kon-Tiki
Bolero
684
✓
424, 462, 484, 496
412, 454, 442, 494
310, 325
Rio
Bessacarr
All
Escape
320, 340
Models
Range
✓
30
Max bike weight (kg)
30
30
✓
30
✓
19
✓
19
50
50
50
50
50
Max load (kg)
50
2+1
2+1
2+1+1
2+1+1
2+1+1
Capacity (# bikes)
2+1+1
307127
307126
306561
306560
309821
Thule reference
309822
Thule
Excellent
standard
version
Thule Bike carrier type
Thule
Excellent
short version
Thule
Elite G2
standard
version
Thule Elite
G2 short
version
Thule
Sport G2
standard
version
Thule
Sport G2
short
version
Note: Cycle carrying racks are not permitted
on the rear opening tailgate of the Rio.
cycles should be stored either outside the
vechicle or on tow bar mounted carrier.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
The Swift Group only recommends a Thule
cycle rack which will conveniently clip in to
the pre installed mounting rail. The maxiumum
weight which can be mounted on the carrier
is 50kg.
207
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
SOLAR PANEL / SEAT SWIVEL /
LOCKER / BUNKS
Solar panel use
Bunk and luton bed safety
All Swift Group products have the specific
provision for the connection and use of a solar
panel, even when the solar panel has not been
factory fitted. Each Sargents PSU (fusebox)
has a dedicated solar panel connection which
allow the 12V feed from a panel to be connect
to the leisure batteries.
Where the sleeping surface is over one metre
above floor level the following notices apply.
It should be noted that this connection is only
designed for the use of a solar panel and has a
maximum rating of 120W.
For further details see the services section of
this handbook.
Seat swivel (Driver/Passenger)
! WARNING: Always ensure safety boards
are located before entering the bunk.
! WARNING: Use upper bunks for sleeping
only, with the provided protection against fall
out in position.
! WARNING: Care shall be taken against
the risk of fall out when the upper bunks are
being used by children, especially under 6
years of age, these bunks are not suitable
for use by infants without supervision.
Layouts with an over-cab bed (luton bed),
access may be restricted when the lower bed
(model specific) is fully extended at night time.
To turn the swivel, slide the BLACK lever
rearwards and adjust to the required
angle. Before driving off ensure the locking
mechanism is fully secure.
Side lockers
Some models are provided with exterior
access locker doors. These are suitable for
storing external equipment.
208
DROP DOWN BED
- When the vehicle is in motion, the bed must
be in the stowed (up) position.
- When in the stowed position, the only item
on top of the bed should be the mattress and
bedding. Do not use the area on top of the
bed as additional storage.
- Before lowering the bed for use, ensure
the area below is clear of people and
obstructions.
• This is especially important in beds over
garages.
weight of occupants in any other position.
- When in the lowered position, the maximum
user payload (occupants and bedding plus
locker contents is 250kg).
- Please ensure the bunk nets are properly
fixed in place when using the bed to prevent
the possibility of falling from height
- To raise the bed back into its stowed
position, press the release button and lift
it back up. If the bed is difficult to raise, it
may be that there is too much weight in the
lockers. Remove some items and try again.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Manual Alu-Line bed operation
instructions
- In order to lower the bed for use, press the
release button on the frame and pull the bed
down.
- Please ensure the bed is fully returned to
its ‘up’ position and that the release button
has returned to its resting position before
travelling.
• Watch the bed as it comes down to ensure
it remains level and free from obstructions.
• Please note - the bed is counter balanced
to account for the weight of the mattress,
bedding, lockers (where applicable) and
locker contents. If the bed lockers are
overloaded, this will cause the bed to
fall more easily than rise and if they are
empty, it may be difficult to pull the bed
down. It may be desirable for users to add
or remove contents from the lockers as
necessary to achieve the required ease of
movement.
- Ensure the bed is fully lowered before
accessing the bed.
• The bunk nets and ladder have been
designed to work at this height, and the
mechanisms of the bed will not support the
- Please do not attempt to lubricate the sytem
- this may damage the seals on the gas
struts which give the counterbalanced action.
If the bed remains difficult to operate after
adjusting the locker weights as described
above then please check for physical
obstructions before contacting your dealer
for further advice.
209
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
FITTED
DROP EQUIPMENT
DOWN BED
Powered Bed Mechanism
(model specific)
If fitted to your motorhome, a touch button
symbol provides control for a motorised bed
mechanism, allowing a bed to be adjusted
between either two, or three, differing heights.
Two Position Bed Mechanism
The bed is operated from a small aluminium
panel with a security key and two buttons.
One to move the plane of the bed upwards,
the other downwards.
Once the bed reaches the desired position,
turn the key to the OFF position, turning it to
the left by 90° and remove it.
Note:
There are various types of protection.
• The key for isolation of operation
• Two or three limit switches, one high and
the other low.
• Mechanical Movement
! WARNING: The bed operating mechanism
Insert the key into the lock and turn clockwise
by 90 °.
Press the top button to lift the bed. The bed
moves as long as the button is pressed.
Press the bottom button to lower the bed.
The bed moves downward as long as the user
holds down the button.
The lifting-bed system is equipped with two
or three limit switches for protection. If for
example the user holds the down button for
a longer time than that required for the bed
to travel its full drop then, a protection device
takes over and disables the movement so as
not to exit the bed from the guides and also to
protect the motor.
This protection is replicated for the upward
movement.
210
should only be operated by a responsible
adult.
Take care to ensure that all persons, pets
and loose items are clear of the top and
underside of the bed before operating the
lifting mechanism.
Do not operate the lifting mechanism with a
person or heavy object on the bed.
Always remove the key when the bed lifting
mechanism is not in use.
Manual Operation
The electric motor is fitted on the end with a
13mm hexagonal nut, which allows manual
movement of the plane of the bed in case
of insufficient voltage of the vehicle leisure
battery. The bed mechanism can be operated
manually, if power is disabled. Locate the
13mm nut, which is accessible through either
the under locker or under bed moulding,
via an access hole. Using a 13mm socket,
turn the hexagonal nut clockwise or counter
clockwise, depending on the desired direction
of movement.
TABLES
Care must be taken to remove obstructions
which will restrict the full range of movement
of the motorised drop-down bed fitted to
Motorhomes.
If an object left in the way when the bed is
lowered then the bed will not reach it’s pre-set
bottom stop position. The motor will continue
to run, unwinding the belts until they loop back
on themselves and begin to raise the bed
despite the ‘lower’ button being depressed
If this happens, the remedy to this is to then
press the ‘raise’ button, which will effectively
re-wind the belts and eventually raise the bed
once the slack has been taken up.
Tables
Note: The free standing table legs have a
positive locking mechanism. Care must be
taken to ensure that, when folded, the leg
which is closed first locks into the second
position.
When engaging legs in down position the
mechanism must be positively locked down.
Table storage
Tables stored in the table storage
compartment must be securely clipped into
place whilst in transit.
To avoid damage care must be taken when
removing tables from their stored position.
! WARNING: Tables infront of forward facing
passengers must be stowed in the storage
position when the vehicle is moving
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Care points
Care of laminate tops, tables,
furniture and doors
Do not use abrasives, chemically treated
cloths or aggressive detergents as these may
cause damage
Do not place hot objects on laminated
surfaces i.e. tops, tables. Any temperatures
70°C and over will cause permanent damage.
Clean worktop surfaces, furniture and door
fascias with a soft, slightly damp cloth, dry off
with a soft cloth.
! WARNING: When erecting the free
standing table, be careful to avoid trapping
fingers.
211
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TV INLET
TV inlet
Depending on specification, the motorhome
may be fitted with an external co-ax
connection in addition to a roof mounted
TV aerial. When fitted, the external co-ax
connection point will be within the mains inlet
enclosure.
Co-ax connection point within the mains
inlet enclosure, Satellite decoder position
within the motorhome. (Kon Tiki and E700)
Co-ax connection point within the mains
inlet enclosure
A short co-ax lead featuring a screw on co-ax
connection will be present behind the Blue
mains inlet connector. A co-ax cable will be
fitted and connected within the motorhome,
from the back of this connection, to the
primary TV position within the motorhome.
At the same time, further co-ax cable or cables
will be fitted which route from the TV aerial
position (i.e. within the wardrobe) to each of
the TV positions within the motorhomes.
The primary TV position will feature a socket
marked 12v, TV, and SAT. The co-ax from
the external connection point will route to the
socket output marked SAT, whilst the co-ax
from the TV aerial will route to the socket
output marked TV. At any secondary TV
positions (if present) co-ax from the TV aerial
will be fitted, and routed to the socket output
marked TV.
An external TV aerial or site TV feed can be
connected to the external connection point;
signals from that connection will then be
available at the primary TV position within
the motorhome. As the connections are of
the screw-on type, it is also possible to use
212
this co-ax to route from an external satellite
dish, for instance a tripod mounted dish, to a
satellite receiver.
A short co-ax lead featuring a screw on co-ax
connection will be present behind the Blue
mains inlet connector. A co-ax cable will be
fitted and connected within the motorhome,
from the back of this connection, to the
location intended for the later fitment of a
satellite decoder or similar receiver.
This external connection can be used to link
an external dish or signal, to the decoder /
receiver position.
Upon delivery, the remaining co-ax cables
installed in the motor home will be used to
distribute the signal from the fitted TV aerial
to the TV positions. Depending on the type
of decoder / receiver, it is possible that a
modulator or similar component may be
required, to convert the output from the device
(SCART or HDMI) into a signal that can be
sent through the same co-ax cable to the
TV positions within the motor home. Please
ask your dealer or satellite system installer for
more details, which are specific to the types of
aftermarket equipment fitted.
TV ANTENNA
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Status 570 Digital antenna system
Travelling
Do not travel:
• With the antenna raised
• With the antenna set for vertical signals
To reduce the possibility of damage when
travelling, point the antenna backwards.
The RED SPOT on the bottom of the mast
indicates the front of the Antenna.
Operating the system
Firstly determine the approximate location
of the nearest transmitter and whether the
signals are horizontally or vertically polarised.
For assistance ask your site operator or check
other antennas in the vicinity.
1. Loosen the Mast Locking Collar and raise
the antenna. Rotate the mast to direct the
TV transmitter.
The RED SPOT on the bottom of the mast
indicates the front of the antenna.
2. Should you need to receive vertically
polarised signals rotate the winder, anticlockwise to cant the antenna through 90°.
The red / green indicator in the lower part of
the aerial mast indicates whether the aerial
is horizontal or vertical.
DO NOT use undue force on the winder.
3. Switch ON the amplifier and the LED will
illuminate.
! WARNING: The blanking cap is temporary
seal and is not recommended for long term
use.
Technical:
Diameter: 122mm (foot)
Height raised: 330mm
Height lowered: 150mm
No Antenna dome: 50mm
Mast: 365 mm
Amplifier: 115 x 45 x 29mm
Frequency Range: UHF 470-862 MHz
Antenna Forward Gain: 7db
Amplifier Gain - Max: 18db
Gain Adjustment - Min: 15db
Noise Figure: 2.8db
Output Impedence: 75ohms
Output: 98 dbuV
Power Supply: 12-24 VDC
Power Consumption: 55ma
4. Check the gain control is set to maximum.
For maximum rotate clockwise.
5. Tune your television into the strongest
signal. You may need to adjust the direction
of the mast to achieve the best picture
quality.
6. Secure by tightening the mast locking collar.
Removing the antenna
1. Unplug the antenna lead from the amplifier.
2. Loosen the mast locking collar and lift off
whilst feeding out the mast, coaxial cable
and plug.
3. Push the blanking cap supplied into place.
213
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TV ANTENNA
Short Hook up - Test 1
This test isolates the wiring from the amplifier
through to your TV/Radio points.
Unplug the coaxial plugs from the ‘TV’ sockets
of the amplifier and using your TV fly lead with
convertor 1 supplied. Connect your TV to the
amplifier.
Fault Finding
The following are some of the key areas we
suggest you check which generally solve the
most common problems encountered with the
operation of the Status antenna.
Coaxial Connections
It is critical that all connections in the system
are fitted correctly. Using the diagrams and
procedures described over the page, please
check all connectors ensuring they are wired
correctly. Secondly please ensure only quality
plugs have been used.
Coaxial Cable
Sharp bends, kinks and hot surfaces can
easily damage coaxial cable and should be
avoided. Coaxial cable, if placed in close
proximity to electrical cables, transformers
or other pieces of electrical equipment, may
pick up electrical interference causing picture
quality to deteriorate, especially in poor
reception areas. Excess cable should be
removed and NOT coiled as this may cause
picture distortion. An inspection of the routing
of the cable is highly recommended to ensure
all is correct.
Gain Control
In normal use the button should be rotated
clockwise for optimum reception. In strong
signal areas the amplification may need to be
reduced.
To reduce amplification rotate the button
anti-clockwise until picture quality improves.
The button rotates through 270 degrees from
MAX to MIN.
LED light
Should the LED on the amplifier not light, firstly
check there is power to the unit. Secondly
check the polarity is correct. Otherwise
contact your dealer for further assistance.
214
Please ensure the antenna dome is plugged
directly into the ‘ANT-IN’ socket of the
amplifier and switch on. Tune in your TV for the
strongest signal.
If the picture quality improves the fault lies with
the wiring of the system between the amplifier
and the TV outlet socket.
Short Hook up - Test 2
This text isolates the amplifier by connecting
your TV direct to the antenna.
Unplug the antenna from the amplifier and
connect convertor 2 supplied to the plug on
the cable end. Using your TV Fly lead connect
the antenna directly to your TV. Tune in your for
the strongest signal.
If the picture quality improves, the fault lies with
the Vision Plus Amplifier.
Antenna Dome Coaxial Cable
Check the routing of the coaxial cable from
the antenna dome to the amplifier. Check to
ensure there are no kinks or trapped cable or
if there are loops of surplus cable which could
be affecting performance.
TV ANTENNA / TV BRACKET /
SHOWER
Symptom
Very poor
No picture
or sound, TV
freezing, severe
pixilation, break up
and picture drop
out
Action
Check the amplifier gain is set to maximum
(rotate clockwise). Check antenna alignment
which must be directed at the transmitter.
Ensure the antennas polarity is correct, whether
horizontal or vertical. Bypass the amplifier by
following 'Short Hook-Up Test 1'
Poor
Moderate pixilation
and sound distortion
Medium
Minor pixilation,
will not receive all
channels
Good
Stable picture,
good sound quality, will receive all
channels
N/A
Strong
Moderate
pixilation, picture
break up and drop
out
Reduce the amplifier gain (rotate anti-clockwise). Rotate antenna AWAY from the transmitter.
Very Strong
No picture
or sound, TV
freezing, severe
pixilation, break up
and picture drop
out
Rotate antenna AWAY from the transmitter.
Switch 'OFF' the amplifier and turn the gain
control to maximum (rotate clockwise).
After performing any of the ‘Actions’
above you must re-tune your TV.
Trigger Head shower heads
TV Brackets
• Squeeze trigger to release water. Release
trigger to stop. Twist trigger up to gain
permanent water flow, lower to stop.
In some models a bulkhead mounted bracket
is supplied to mount the TV on. Whilst the
bracket has a travel lock it is good practise
to unclip the TV from the bracket and store
securley for transit.
• Orbit shower heads are also provided with a
button at the side of the head to allow users
to control the flow.
Shower
• Small children should be surpervised at all
times when using the shower.
When using the shower, always ensure that
the shower door is fully closed thus avoiding
water spray on unprotected areas
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Signal
• Care should be taken as water may become
hot temporarily when switched on until it
mixes and regulates.
• We recommend unfastening the trigger
shower head before travelling and storing
safely to prevent it becoming detached whilst
travelling.
215
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
EXTERNAL BBQ POINT
Motorhomes with external
BBQ point
Models equipped with an external barbeque
point can be used to power any gas appliance
suitable for the gas used in the motorhome,
at the working pressure shown on the label in
the barbeque outlet box. Please note when
using the outlet that the fitted regulator will
allow a maximum of 1.5kg per hour of gas to
be taken from the gas bottle. Therefore the
consumption of gas from both the appliances
within the motorhome and the appliance
connected to the barbeque point cannot
exceed a total of 1.5kg per hour at any one
time. If you are in any doubt please consult
your dealer for advice. To use point proceed
as follows.
When external gas equipment is being
connected, the operating pressure of the gas
supply of 30 or 50 mbar must correspond with
the operating pressure of the equipment that is
being connected (see data plate).
The plug-in connection can only be made if the
quick-acting valve is closed. The safety locking
mechanism can be released by sliding back
the coupling sleeve.
The coupling K-valve is designed such that
the quick-acting valve can only be opened if
the connection is being made via the plug-in
connection. The connection is made by inserting
the plug-in connection into the safety coupling.
This operation can be carried out using one
hand. After uncoupling the equipment, seal off
the valve opening using the protection cap.
Note: The external gas socket is only
suitable for removing gas, not for feeding
gas into the gas system.
! WARNING: Care should be taken when
using the external barbeque point. Never
barbeque next to an awning or tent.
! WARNING: The caravan barbeque
point should only be used as an outlet point
for gas, never connect a gas bottle direct to
the outlet.
216
EXTERNAL SHOWER POINT /
COLOUR REFERENCE
Colour reference
The colour code for touch ups or resprays
for all white Fiat cabs and Swift coach built
habitational body components is Fiat White
249. For silver cabs the colour reference is
silver metallic 611 and metallic black 632.
Some Dealer special cabs may have their own
colour specified from the Fiat standard range.
For Fiat cabs other than white, contact your
Fiat dealer to obtain a colour match.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
External shower point
Please be aware that colours can fade over
time, and therefore, if the vehicle is more than
a few years old, it is suggested a colour match
be obtained.
The external shower point, if fitted, will be
supplied with a separate shower head and
hose assembly.
To connect the shower, simply align the plug
with the socket and push into position.
To remove, pull the lower trigger and pull the
plug from the socket.
217
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
FITTED EQUIPMENT
218
MAINTENANCE
Motorhome exterior ................................................................................................................ 220
Condensation.......................................................................................................................... 221
Motorhome interior care.......................................................................................................... 223
SwiftShield fabric..................................................................................................................... 224
MA INT E NA NCE
Vehicle Modifications & non-standard parts ............................................................................ 220
Hi-Macs® work surface........................................................................................................... 225
Fenix NTM® work surface....................................................................................................... 226
Bulb replacement.................................................................................................................... 229
Winterisation ........................................................................................................................... 230
Chassis & rear axle.................................................................................................................. 233
AL-KO exhaust system............................................................................................................ 233
Caring for the environment ..................................................................................................... 233
219
MA INT E NA N CE
MODIFICATIONS
Vehicle modifications
& non-standard parts
As the owner of a Swift Group Product,
you are able to make any modifications
you wish, either by yourself or through a
dealer, without affecting the Swift 3/6 Year
Warranty.
However, please be aware that any issues,
resulting directly or indirectly, from a
modification or fitment of a non-standard
part, will not be covered by The Swift Group
Warranty.
WD40 is not recommended for external
or internal use
WD40 attacks paintwork and sealants.
If a lubricant is required for Interior
hinges, Sliding door tracks, Exterior
door hinges, Plastic tracking etc. We
recommend “Ambersil 40+” this is readily available from most DIY/ Automotive
spare part retailers
Before carrying out any DIY work within the
warranty period (3/6) years please check
with your Swift Group dealer.
Motorhome exterior
Plastic Panels (GRP/ABS)
These are used for front and rear panels and
roof in some cases sheet GRP is also used on
side walls.
Cleaning
For both aluminium panels and plastic panels.
1. Wash the motorhome regularly with mild
detergent. Rinse with cold water and
leather off.
2. For better protection a similar coloured
good quality car wax may be applied.
For sealed areas a mild soap is the best way
to clean without affecting the sealant.
Acid or alkaline based cleaners or solvents
should not be used.
220
! WARNING: Under no circumstances use
any abrasive cleaning agents or solvents on
the exterior. Do not wash your motorhome
with a high pressure washer as these can
permanently damage the seals of your
motorhome.Care should be taken as the
silicon in some polishes can attack the
rubber used on the exterior for seals and
gaskets.
Acrylic Windows
Wash windows carefully, as you would with
the paintwork of your car, do not scrub
windows prior to removing surface dirt and film
with a hose pipe - trapped dirt could
cause scratching.
Wash with a solution of warm soapy water,
windows can then be dried off with a leather.
Small scratches can be removed, consult
your dealer.
Catches and stays do not require any special
attention or lubrication.
Kon-Tiki Polyvision windows
It is possible, in weather where extremes
in temperatures occur between night and
day, that customer will notice condensation
between the panes. The same phenomenon
may also occur when washing your vehicle on
a hot day.
The condensation should clear itself when
the ambient conditions return to normal and
the air between the panes dries. However, if
this is taking a longer time than required, the
breathable plug (normally located in the top
corner of the window) can be removed, with
a pin or sharp object, and replaced when the
panes are dry. Care should be taken when
doing this.
Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning
The material used to produce most caravan
and Motorhome windows is acrylic plastic.
While the acrylic used is very durable, it is
able to be scratched with relative ease and
therefore, care must be taken when clearing
your vehicle not to use aggressive clearing
products. Equally, care should be taken when
using a drying cloth that it is clean and free
from grit.
CONDENSATION
What is condensation
Condensation is the process of change of
water from its gaseous form (water vapour)
into liquid water when it comes into contact
with a surface that is cold. Condensation
generally occurs when warm air cools quickly
and looses its capacity to hold water vapour,
and as a result water vapour condenses to
form droplets.
Why condensation occurs
be externally cooled, and to use the heating
reasonably by not making the motorhome
too warm such that people perspire, as this
will only serve to generate more moist air and
therefore more condensation.
However, in particularly cold periods,
where the external ambient temperatures
are low, condensation may still form on
external walls as the insulation levels may
well not be thermally able to cope with the
difference between the internal and external
temperatures.
Condensation occurs when warm moist
air meets a cold surface. The level of
condensation will depend upon humidity
levels, how moist the air is and how cold the
surfaces are they come into contact with.
How can you prevent
condensation
If the temperature falls below the dew
point temperature, it is quite normal for
condensation to occur on any material within
the caravan that is cold, for example the
external walls, plastic windows etc.
a. Good ventilation of the vehicle when
cooking or when drying clothes, footwear
or pets is essential. Observe when windows
begin to show signs of misting and increase
ventilation by opening slightly by 1cm or
opening a roof vent, as these will help, but
keep the habitation door closed as much as
possible to retain heat.
When condensation occurs
Condensation occurs usually in winter months,
because ambient temperatures are colder
(leading to cold surfaces) and windows and
roof vents are opened less so the moist air
cannot escape.
Where condensation occurs
Condensation will occur where warm moist air
is put into the atmosphere in areas such as in
bathrooms (during showering) and in kitchen
areas (during cooking).
In the enclosed space of a motorhome, the
moist air from the kitchen or bathroom areas
will inevitably transfer to the rest of the vehicle,
which in turn condenses on cold surfaces
leading to visible water droplets. This issue
is compounded by warm moist air being
generated from normal breathing.
Condensation will also form in cold areas
where air movement and ventilation is
restricted (e.g. cupuboards, wardrobes, under
beds, etc.)
What is important
It is important to provide ventilation and air
flow, so that warm moist air can escape, or
MA INT E NA NCE
Condensation
Provide ventilation so that moist air can
escape.
b. If drying damp clothes or towels, open a
window to ventilate the area and allow the
moist air to escape.
c. Try to make sure that the caravan is partially
heated. It can take a long time for a cold
caravan to warm up, so it is better to have a
small amount of heat for a long period then
a lot of heat for a short time.
d. After showering, keep the bathroom window
or skylights open, and shut the bathroom
door long enough to dry off the room.
e. Fixed ventilation is provided in the vehicle,
specifically through the floor, it is important
not to block these.
f.Electrical heating is dryer than gas heating,
and introduces less moisture into the
atmosphere. Do not use additional portable
paraffin or flue-less gas heaters at all.
g. If left unoccupied and unheated for long
periods of time the temperatures can soak
down thermally into the entire product and
become very cold. Whenever possible, put
221
MA INT E NA N CE
CONDENSATION
the heating on at a low level before use by
pre heating in cold weather.
h. Even with reasonable ventilation it is likely
if the temperature is less than 5oC and
the humidity is high that condensation will
occur. Ideally the temperature should be
kept about 20oC when occupied.
Mould Growth
Any sign of mould growth is an indication of
the presence of moisture and if caused by
condensation gives warning that heating or
ventilation may require improving.
New vehicles
New products take a long time before they are
fully 'dried out' because of the moisture in the
materials used during manufacture. While this
is happening extra heat and ventilation will be
required.
How can you prevent condensation
Provide ventilation so that moist air
can escape.
a. G
ood ventilation of kitchens when washing,
cooking or drying damp clothes is essential.
Open the skylights or windows slightly, but
keep the door closed as much as possible.
b. After showering, keep the bathroom window
or skylights open, and shut the bathroom
door long enough to dry off the room.
c. In all other areas provide some ventilation.
Fixed ventilation is provided in accordance
with BS EN 721: 1998 this is through
skylights and ‘Heki roof lights’ in the roofs
and from ventilators through the floor under
cookers, doors and in bed boxes it is
important not to block these.
Too much ventilation in cold weather is
uncomfortable and wastes heat. All that is
needed is a very slightly opened window
or skylights. Opening a skylight or ‘Heki;
rooflights partially or windows opened to about
1cm will usually be sufficient.
222
Provide reasonable heating
a. Do not use portable paraffin or flueless gas
heaters at all.
b. If drying damp clothes or towels, open
a window enough to ventilate the area
and turn on the electric element of the
space heater but do not hang items over
the heater.
c. Try to make sure that all areas are at least
partially heated. Condensation most often
occurs in unheated areas.
d. To prevent condensation, the heat has to
keep room surfaces reasonably warm. It
can take a long time for a cold motorhome
to warm up, so it is better to have a small
amount of heat for a long period than a lot
of heat for a short time.
Motorhomes use only carefully selected
insulation materials but unlike most rooms at
home all walls are exterior walls, so they lose
heat through all walls as well as the roof and
floor.
Even in a well insulated motorhome with
reasonable ventilation, it is likely that
during cold weather (less than 10 deg
C) condensation will occur. Ideally the
temperature should be kept about 20°C
although this is not always possible.
MOTORHOME INTERIOR
Leather care
Your motorhome has been designed and
built using the corrosion resistant materials
(e.g. GRP (Glass Reinforced Plastic) panels,
stainless steel fixings, hot dip galvanised
chassis and powder coated extrusions), which
if looked after will extend the life and aesthetics
of the product in normal service. In certain
conditions, for example, if sited for extended
periods in close proximity to sea and sand
spray, you may experience premature ageing
and/or corrosion of the vehicle than under
normal conditions.
Leather furniture, in a normal contract
and domestic environment, requires little
maintenance, although obviously leather in
lighter shades will need more attention.
To help prevent this, we advise regular cleaning
and application of a good quality external car
polish. For extended periods (where the vehicle
is not in use), we recommend the use of well
fitted breathable vehicle cover as protection
from harsh coastal elements.
Changing Exterior Bulbs
Always replace like for like.
For individual replacement bulb specification,
refer to your Service Handbook.
Motorhome interior
Follow these guidelines to ensure your
investment is receiving the very best attention.
Regular care of leather does ensure its lasting
quality and some general rules for regular
cleaning and maintenance are:
MA INT E NA NCE
Corrosion
• Clean the leather with a soft damp cloth
taking care not to soak the leather.
• For a more thorough clean, use the Bridge
of Weir Leather Cleaning and Protection kite
available directly from the distribution centre.
• Do not use saddle soap, wax polishes or
spray polishes.
• Do not use any product or any method
of cleaning not recommended by the
manufacturer.
• Avoid letting any buckles, studs and zips
come into direct contact with the furniture.
• Avoid drying out the leather by taking extra
care where there is heating or an open
fireplace.
Note: The above cleaning instructions DO
NOT apply to Nubuck Suede or any other
uncoated leather.
Side Walls, Roof Lining
A simple wipe over with a damp cloth and a
very mild detergent is all that is needed.
Soft Furnishings
Should be vacuumed occasionally to
remove grit and sand and help to keep its
smart appearance over the lifetime of the
upholstery. The upholstery can be cleaned
with a mild, reputable upholstery cleaner. It is
recommended that the curtains and pelmets
are specialist cleaned only. The foam used
in cushions is manufactured to meet fire
regulations. It requires time to return to its
normal position after prolonged use.
223
MA INT E NA N CE
SWIFT SHIELD FABRIC
Swift Shield Fabric
(model specific)
The Swift Shield fabric fitted to some Swift
Group products is a luxury stain resistant
durable fabric using Aquaclean® technology.
This is a revolutionary fabric treatment that
allows you to clean stains using water only.
This provides you with simple fabric
maintenance in the minimum amount of time.
Cleaning Instructions
Aquaclean® helps to remove the majority of
household stains (wine, ink, sauce, fat, mud,
chocolate, cream, etc.) in three simple steps:
1. R
emove any excess residue
on the upholstery
2. A
pply water over the stain,
either directly or using a
damp cloth. Wait a few
seconds.
3. Press down over the stain
with a damp cloth and rub
gently over the fabric in
circular movements.
If the stain does not come
off completely, repeat the
process as required.
For further details and stain cleaning demo
videos visit the Cleaning Gallery on the
Aquaclean® web site: http://www.aquaclean.
com/ES_en/home.
Aquaclean fabrics cannot accept any
responsibility for misuse of the fabric by
allowing bleach or dissolvent substances
coming into contact with it.
224
HI-MACS® WORK SURFACE
Consumer Cleaning, Care & Repair
HI-MACS® solid surfaces are stain resistant,
easy to clean and hygienic, ideal for kitchen
countertops, vanity tops, and other surfaces
subject to the hazards of moisture and heavy
wear.
Even the most used areas won't succumb to
coffee, ink, or other stains.
No special cleaning products are needed to
keep HI-MACS® looking beautiful day in and
day out.
While HI-MACS® is extremely tough and
durable, like any other fine material it can be
damaged if abused or mistreated.
Reviewing this care and cleaning instructions
can assist you in understanding how easy it is
to care for your new HI-MACS® surface and
how you can prevent more severe damage
that may require special repairs.
A trivet should always be used under heated
appliances, such as crock pots, electric frying
pans, etc.
Although minor cuts and scratches in HIMACS® can be repaired, deep cuts will
require the services of professional Strong
acids such as those found in drain, toilet bowl,
and oven cleaners should be used cautiously
around HI-MACS®.
If these items are accidentally spilled, wipe
them up at once. Some of these items, when
left on the surface, may cause whitening,
which can be difficult to remove.
Spills and Stains
While most everyday spills can be removed
with the cleaning techniques listed, some
troublesome spills and stains such as food
dye, tea, and fruit drinks may require more
aggressive cleaning. These items can be
removed with full strength bleach followed by a
general cleanser.
With a little knowledge, you can enjoy the
elegance and beauty of HI-MACS® for years
to come.
Bleach should only come in contact with the
surface for two to five minutes. On a matte
finish, if you prefer, you can scrub with an
abrasive cleaner. Even nail polish can be
removed from HI-MACS® with nail polish
remover or an abrasive cleanser.
Normal Cleaning
Cigarettes
HI-MACS® is non-porous, so it can be wiped
clean with a damp cloth or sponge and mild
detergents or general purpose cleaners such
as Mr. Clean.
If you have a matte finish, abrasive cleaners
like Ajax or comet may also be used.
Periodically it may also be helpful to go over
the entire surface in a circular motion with an
abrasive cleaner or wet Scotch Brite pad to
maintain a uniform appearance.
Care
Do not place hot pans directly from the burner
or oven on the HI-MACS® surface.
MA INT E NA NCE
Kon-Tiki Kitchen Work Tops
Corian Solid Surface
Worktop Maintenance
While HI-MACS® will not burn, should a
lighted cigarette accidentally come in contact
with the surface, it could leave a nicotine
stain or scorch mark. Either of these can be
removed by cleaning with an abrasive cleanser
or buffing in a circular motion with a Scotch
Brite pad.
Repairing Scratches
For removing superficial scratches, rub in a
circular motion with a wet # 7448 Scotch Brite
buffing pad until the scratches are removed.
Clean thoroughly with soap and water and let
dry.
Even though HI-MACS® can withstand
sustained temperatures up to 225 °F,
prolonged or extreme heat could cause
yellowing.
225
MA INT E NA N CE
WORKTOPS
Note: Deep scratches can be removed
by carefully sanding lightly with 120 grit
sandpaper followed by 220 and 320 grit
sandpaper.
Then rub the surface with a wet # 7448
Scotch Brite pad in a circular motion to
restore the finish. For added protection,
or if any additional luster is desired, after
the surface is dry, apply a non-wax polish
cleaner or other recommended surface
dressing and wipe with a clean, dry cloth.
Wipe dry using another cloth.
Bolero worktops (FENIX NTM)®
Ordinary maintenance
FENIX NTM surface should be cleaned
regularly but does not require any special
maintenance, just a damp cloth with warm
water or mild detergents. Almost all normal
household cleaning products or disinfectants
are perfectly well tolerated. It is suggested to
use a melamine foam sponge - also known as
magic sponge - for the normal cleaning and
maintenance of the surface.
Extraordinary maintenance
In case of dirt which cannot be cleaned with
normal household detergents, due to the
irregular topography and closed surface
of FENIX NTM, the use of non-aggressive
aromatic solvents (acetone) is suggested. In
case of micro scratches, please refer to the
specific surface thermal healing instructions.
Recommendations for cleaning the surface of FENIX NTM
The table below shows the cleaning products
and methods best suited to different types of
dirt.
226
Type of dirt
Recommended
cleaning products
and met
Syrup, fruit juice,
Water with a sponge
jam, spirits, milk, tea,
coffee, wine, soap
and ink
Animal and
vegetable fats,
sauces, dry blood,
dry wine and spirits,
eggs
Cold water with
soap or household
detergent with a
sponge
Smoke, gelatine,
vegetable and vinyl
based glues, organic
waste, gum arabic
Hot water with
soap or household
detergent with a
sponge
Hair spray,
vegetable oil, biro
and felt tip, pens,
wax foundations and
greasy make-up,
residual solvent
marks
MEK, alcohol,
acetone with a
cotton cloth
Nail polish, spray
lacquer, linseed oil
Acetone with a
cotton cloth
Synthetic oil paints
Trilene nitre based
solvent with a cotton
cloth
Neoprene glues
Trichloroethane with
a cotton cloth
Traces of silicone
Wooden or plastic
scraper, taking care
not to scratch the
surface
Lime deposits
Detergents
containing low
percentages of citric
or acetic acid (10%
max.)
For best results in cleaning FENIX NTM, it is
important to remember certain precautions:
- although very durable, the surface of
FENIX NTM must still never be treated with
products containing abrasive substances,
abrasive sponges or unsuitable products,
such as sandpaper or steel wool;
Maintenance Instructions
Iron
MA INT E NA NCE
General precautions
- products with a high acid or very alkaline
content should be avoided because they can
stain the surface;
- when using solvents, the cloth used must be
perfectly clean so as not to leave marks on
the FENIX NTM surface. Any streaks can still
be removed by rinsing with hot water and
drying;
- avoid furniture polishes and wax based
cleaners in general, because they tend to
form a sticky layer on the dense FENIX NTM
surface, to which the dirt adheres.
Maintenance Instructions
Melamine foam Sponge
227
MA INT E NA N CE
WORKTOPS AND SINK BOWLS
Stainless Steel Bowl Care Instructions
Work Surfaces
After use always remove any plastic bowl or
mat, rinse down the surface and dry with a soft
cloth to prevent spotting. For more stubborn
dirt or grease a non-abrasive multi-purpose
cream cleaner, such as CIF, may be used. To
preserve the appearance of your appliance
we recommend plastic bowls or mats are not
stored in the sink during transit.
You should not stand very hot items on any
of the work surfaces, especially models with
polycarbonate moulded sinks and drainers.
The quality of water can affect your bowl's
appearance. If the water has high iron content,
a brown surface stain can form on the bowl
giving the appearance of rust. Additionally, in
areas with a high concentration of minerals,
or with over-softened water, a white film
may develop on the sink. To combat these
problems, towel dry the sink after use, and
clean at least once every week .
Surface scratching will be most noticeable on
highly polished components. These marks are
usually only superficial and can be removed
with a proprietary stainless steel cleaner/polish.
If the surface has a directional polished grain
always clean along the grain and NOT across.
Never use wire wool pads to clean the surface.
Cleaning agents containing bleach should
NOT be left in contact with stainless steel. This
includes many of the new “trigger-dispense”
products and some multi purpose cream
cleaners. Also leaving rubber mats or dishpans
in the sink can lead to surface rust or pitting,
always remove them after use.
228
Cupboard Catches
It is advisable to lubricate all cupboard
catches, sliding bolts and hinges from time to
time. We recommend “Ambersil 40+” this is
readily available from most DIY/ Automotive
spare part retailers
Kitchen Equipment
All the thermoplastic parts in these areas have
easy clean surfaces. To ensure long life and
to prevent damage you must not use any
cleaning materials at all and ensure water
temperatures do not exceed 70ºC (putting
cold water in first is suggested). After every
use it is essential that you rinse with clean
water only and wipe with a soft damp cloth.
Failure to follow these simple instructions may
result in premature failure or cracking which will
not be covered by any guarantees (including
extended warranties).
SHOWER / FURNITURE /
BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Replacement and Type
These products should be cleaned
immediately after use. Apply a warm, mild
soapy water solution with a soft cloth and
rinse with clean water immediately. Abrasive
materials must never be used. For stubborn
stains “Thetford Bathroom Cleaner” is
recommended as the use of other cleaners
may harm these products, cause premature
failure and will invalidate the warranty.
“Thetford Bathroom Cleaner is available from
most motorhome/caravan dealer shops.
Full details of the bulbs used with your Swift
Group product can be found in your Technical
Handbook. Details of how to change the
various bulbs can be found within our Practical
Guides, located on Swift Talk
(http://www.swift-talk.co.uk/forum/topics/
swift-grouppractical-manuals)/
Washroom bi-fold doors
• Panels should be cleaned with warm soapy
water and a non-abrasive cloth/sponge.
• An abrasive or aggressive cleaning agent is
never to be used
MA INT E NA NCE
Bathroom/Shower
In many applications LED lights are fitted
which contain no user serviceable parts. In
the unlikely event of failure of one of these
lamps, the entire lamp will need to be replaced
– several types of LED light are intended
for semi-permanent installations using self
adhesive mounts etc, and dealer assistance
may be required should damage or other need
for replacement occur.
• A proprietary plastic Vuplex®, can also be
used. This can be obtained from outlets
such as Amazon, ebay etc.
Furniture
A simple wipe over with a damp cloth should
be all that is required. Polishing with a
proprietary brand of wax polish enhances and
maintains furniture in showroom condition.
It must be remembered that because the
frames of the doors are made of ash, which
is a natural product, they can be affected by
temperature and humidity and may bow under
certain conditions. As conditions change they
should revert to their original positions.
Kitchen Drainer and Cutting Board
You should not stand hot items on to the
removable plastic kitchen drainer. To wash use
only warm soapy water, do not use chemicals
and bleach.
Changing interior bulbs
The majority of interior lights are LED, and in
the unlikely event of a failure, the replacement
of the whole unit is required. It is not possible
to replace the "bulb" on these units.
For non LED lights remove the lens or
lampshade to access the bulb.
Always replace like for like
229
MA INT E NA N CE
WINTERISATION
Winterisation
The Swift Group recommends the following
winterisation points for customers:
from the pump. See Fig.1 Run the pump for a
short while to expel any remaining water within
the pump.
Servicing
Pull pipe out
Arrange (in advance) the yearly service and
habitation check, if the motorhome's next
service is due while the vehicle is stored.
Plumbing
Water expands as it is frozen, and so trapped
water, when it expands, can damage the tap
/ valve /pump or pipe it is trapped within. For
this reason, (in addition to reasons of hygiene),
the water system should be fully drained when
not in use, particularly in colder weather.
• Depending on model, open the fresh water
tank drain valve to drain the tank, and leave
open or remove the tank drain bung inside
the tank, and leave open
Water filter
Pull quick
release tabs
Fig.1
|This is a good time to de-assemble and clean
the pump filter. Squeeze either side of the
filter housing to release the retaining tabs and
pull the filter cassette out of the housing. See
Fig 2
Pull out filter
• Open the drain valve (yellow handle) next to
water heater, and leave open.
• Fully open all the taps and shower mixer,
move mixer position to the middle, and leave
all taps in the open position.
• Unscrew the shower head and shower hose,
shake out remaining water and allow water
to drain. It is advised to leave the shower
head and hose disconnected.
• Run pump for a short time, until all water is
expelled.
• After a short while the majority of water will
have left the plumbing system. At this point
however it is still important to ensure that the
pump itself is 'dry'. During this part of the
winterisation, a suitable absorbent cloth or
container should be used to catch a small
amount of spilled water that will result.
230
Disconnect the pipe work from the pump by
pulling the blue quick release tabs, at either
side of the pump, at right angles to the pipe
work, then pulling the pipe and connectors
Squeeze either
side of filter
housing
Fig.2
• Fit the cowl cover to the Truma Ultrastore,
model specific.
• Open the waste tank drain valve, collecting
the waste water in a suitable container, and
leave open. Dispose of the waste water in
a designated waste water area, clean waste
pipes and tanks using a sterilising fluid. See
"Waste Tank" section under services Page 55.
If vehicle is being stored while connected to
230v Mains Hook-up:
• Ensure that the leisure battery is connected
and the 20A local fuse(s) is connected.
• The isolator switch on PSU should be in the
'ON' position, however. the control panel
should be switched 'OFF'.
• If Alde system is installed, there is a frost
protection setting, which can be used. See
Alde user instruction manual.
• Vehicles can be left in this condition
for extended periods, with the charger
operating to maintain the battery. However,
periodic maintenance and inspection is
recommended, this should include the
battery condition.
! WARNING: Your motorhome is fitted
with Swift Command Tracker (by Sargent)
which monitors battery voltage. If you plan
to disconnect or remove your leisure battery
for maintenance or external charging, then
please contact the monitoring station before
you remove or disconnect the battery.
If a leisure battery is not fitted, please also
contact the Tracker monitoring station
before removing the mains hook up.
The Swift Command Tracker monitoring
station can be contacted on 0345 6027302.
Gas system
• Ensure the gas supply is isolated at the gas
bottle, and ensure that the gas manifold taps
are off.
If vehicle is being stored not connected to
230v Mains Hook-up:
• Check the age and condition of the high
pressure gas hose and regulator, and
replace if required.
• Charge the leisure battery for 24 hours prior
to placing motorhome in storage.
Appliances
• Ensure the isolation button on PSU is in the
'OFF' position.
• Disconnect the negative terminal of the
leisure battery or baterries.
• The battery should not be adversely affected
by winter temperatures but the level of
charge should be maintained to maximise
the life span of the battery. This can be
achieved using an automotive type battery
charger as and when required.
• Disconnect the vehicle battery negative
terminal. Check the charge of the battery
every three months. (See Vehicle Inactivity
section in the Fiat handbook). Alternatively
put the ignition into the 'Isolation Mode'
MA INT E NA NCE
Electrical
Check the battery expiry date on the smoke
alarm and CO detector and replace or remove
as required.
• Ensure the fridge is turned off.
• Clean the inside of the fridge.
•Prop the fridge door open, and if possible,
the internal freezer compartment door for
ventilation.
• Fit fridge vent winter covers (if available).
• Ensure all hob / oven / microwave surfaces
are clean.
• If the motorhome is going to be left
connected to 230v supply while not in use,
ensure the microwave is unplugged.
• Clean the toilet and empty the cassette and
lubricate the seals with an acid free lubricant
such as Thetford High Grade Seal Lubricant.
See Thetford toilet Users manual
Exterior (Body / Chassis)
• Ensure that all windows, skylights and
access doors are closed and secured.
• Ensure all fixed ventilation points (high and
low) are clear from debris and obstructions.
231
MA INT E NA N CE
WINTERISATION
• Ensure the vehicle is not parked where falling
debris (i.e. leaves, tree sap) could cause
damage.
• Avoid leaving the vehicle parked in soft
ground, long grass or a potential area where
standing water may form.
• Lubricate relevant points on the chassis.
Wheels and Tyres
• Do not store in one position with partially
deflated tyres. The tyre walls will suffer
and do present a real danger of blow outs,
especially when travelling at faster speeds
than are allowed in the UK.
The wheels should be turned every couple of
weeks. If you are removing the wheels, follow
the jacking procedure for changing a wheel.
Check your tyres regularly for signs of age
and deterioration, particularly wear, cracking
and blistering. If in doubt consult a reputable
tyre fitter.
• A purpose made cover maybe used, but
please ensure the cover is a good fit,
breathable and securely fitted.
Note: A poorly fitted cover can rub and
damage the bodywork. Non-breathable
covers will encourage mould to grow.
Re-connect the water pump by positioning
the pipe connectors into the pump housing
and pushing the blue tabs into position. It is
advisable, after a period on non-use, to flush
the water system with a sterilising fluid such as
Milton 2. Fill the fresh water tank with water
and sterilising fluid (Refer to sterilising fluid
instructions for the amount to use). Turn the
pump on and open all the taps, ensuring that
the water drains away safely to the waste tank.
When the waste tank is full empty the fluid into
a designated waste water area. Re-fill the tank
with fresh water and flush through the system
as described above; repeat this until all traces
of the sterilising fluid have been flushed out.
(See "priming the Water System" and "Waste
Tank" sections on page 53/55)
Prepare the toilet system by adding water and
Thetford fluid to the toilet waste tank. See
"Preparing the Thetford Cassette Toilet for
Use" on page 183.
Appliances
Before starting motor caravanning after
storage, check all gas appliances and electrical
points.
Note: Preferably not less than once a year,
the electrical installation should be inspected
and tested by a qualified electrician.
Interior (Furniture / furnishings)
• Open all lockers and internal doors, to
ensure good circulation.
• Remove cushions and store them in a dry
location or ensure all cushions are placed in
a well ventilated area.
• Close all blinds and curtains. Customers are
reminded to check the tension on blinds after
storage if left closed for long periods.
• Thoroughly ventilate the motorhome by
opening doors or windows periodically.
• Placing water absorbent crystals in the van
during the winter months, will help reduce
moisture levels and mould growth.
• We do not recommend leaving portable
heaters in the van unattended.
Recomissioning the water system
232
After storage it is advisable to air the
Motorhome and clean throughout, especially
cooking appliances and the refrigerator.
Replace the bedding if they were removed for
storage.
! WARNING: Always follow the
manufacturers recommended procedures
after use of fitted equipment in the
Motorhome, before storing for any length
of time.
CHASSIS /
EXHAUST SYSTEM / ENVIRONMENT
Some models are built on a Fiat base vehicle,
the chassis of which has been converted
by AL-KO. This conversion provides a hot
dipped galvanised steel chassis coupled with
a wide track rear axle utilising steel torsion bar
suspension, imparting vastly improved stability
and road holding.
MA INT E NA NCE
Chassis and rear axle
AL-KO exhaust system
A standard Fiat exhaust system is fitted,
utilising an AL-KO modified tail pipe, available
through your approved dealer. A standard Fiat
exhaust system is fitted to all other models,
with the addition of a Swift Group tail pipe.
Caring for the environment
After many years of service you may decide
that your motorhome has become beyond
economic repair and should be disposed
of. Please ensure that you comply with the
end of life vehicle legislation and take it to an
authorised treatment facility where it will be
properly dealt with to minimise any negative
environmental impact. The transaction will be
logged at the DVLA, identifying that you are no
longer the owner of the vehicle.
233
MA INT E NA N CE
MAINTENANCE
234
FAULT FINDING
Gas ........................................................................................................................................ 238
Cassette Toilet ........................................................................................................................ 239
FA ULT F INDING
Water ..................................................................................................................................... 236
235
FA ULT F IND IN G
WATER FAULTS
Water
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Water not
flowing from
any tap when
operated but
pump runs
Freshwater tank empty
Check
Pump wired in reverse
Check wiring, refer to pump manufacturers
instructions
Pump not primed
Refer to pump manufacturers instructions
Pipe inlet or outlet pipe
disconnected
Check connections
Pump pipes restricted
by kinking
Check pipes run
Blockage in pump inlet or
outlet pipe
Check, starting inside freshwater tank
Blocked in-line filter of
pump filter
Dismantle and clean
Air leak in suction line
to pump
Check for bubbles & secure with clip
Pump or tap
incorrectly wired
Refer to pump/tap manufacturers instructions
Pump fuse blown
Check wiring connection and then replace with
fuse of correct rating
Battery disconnected
Check connections
Pump seized or overheated
Refer to pump manufacturers servicing
instructions
Pressure pump sensing
switch may have failed
Refer to pump manufacturers servicing
instructions
Contacts may be faulty
Check contacts in plug and socket are clean
and making contact
Wiring connections may
be faulty
Check wiring connections
Feed pipe to water heater
incorrectly connected to the
heater outlet
Refer to installation instructions
Blockage in hot pipeline
Disconnect pipes and inspect
Heater inlet or outlet pipes
kinked preventing flow
Check and re-route if necessary. Ensure that
hose is Carver recommended type
Hot tap not connected
Refer to installation manual
Hot tap failed or blocked
Disconnect and inspect
Heater non-return valve
jammed
Seek service attention
Pump does
not run
Water flows
from cold tap
but not from
hot
236
WATER FAULTS
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Water flows
from hot
tap but has
reduced flow
from cold
Cold water pipe kinked
preventing flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Blockage in cold pipe line
Disconnect pipes after 1st Y connector and
check up to tap
Cold tap not connected
Refer to installation instructions
Cold tap failed or blocked
Disconnect and inspect
If a water filter is fitted, the
cartridge is exhausted
Replace cartridge
Battery condition low
causing pump to
run slowly
Check battery state of charge,
refer to electrical supply note
If new taps have been fitted
they may be restricting flow
Disconnect and check that they have at least
1/4” (6.3mm) bore
Pump needs servicing
Refer to pump servicing instructions
Partially blocked pump filter
or in-line filter, if fitted
Dismantle and clean if necessary
Pump outlet pipe kinked
restricting flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Water leak
Check all water connections
Y’ connector(s) fitted
incorrectly
Refer to installation instructions
Pipe kinking restricting flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Bore size difference in taps
Use taps of equal bore size
Battery voltage may be
too low (below 10.5 volts)
Check that there is water in the container
Adjust switch and/or re-charge battery
Check all connections in pipework
Reduced flow
from both hot
and cold taps
Reduced flow
from either tap
If pump motor
runs steadily
and will not
stop
FA ULT F INDING
Water
237
FA ULT F IND IN G
GAS FAULTS
Gas
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Hob does
not light
No gas
Check level of gas in bottle
Check gas bottle valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to hob manufacturers instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in bottle
Check gas bottle valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to oven manufacturers instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in bottle
Check gas bottle valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Check exhaust outlet is clear
Over gassed
Air in pipe
Turn off appliance, wait 2 minutes and try again
Purge system
Refer to space heater or boiler manufacturers
instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in bottle
Check gas bottle valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to fridge manufacturers instructions
Oven does
not light
Combi Boiler
Fridge does
not light
238
CASSETTE TOILET FAULTS
Fault
Remedy
Bowl does
not drain
when toilet is
flushed.
DO NOT REMOVE CASSETTE. While inside the motorhome turn flush knob
anti-clockwise to open valve blade and leave it in the open position. Open
access door on side of motorhome. Rotate pour-out spout outward. Place
appropriate size container under spout cap. Remove cap carefully. Allow bowl
contents to drain into container. This will lower the water level in the bowl.
Replace cap and return pour-out spout to stored position. DO NOT REMOVE
CASSETTE. Go inside the motorhome and turn the flush knob clockwise to
close valve blade. Now, the cassette may be removed following the normal
removal and emptying procedure.
Cassette is
overfilled
Odours
Use proper amount of holding tank deodorant specified on bottle.
Toilet tissue
does not
fit into
compartment.
Since some tissues are supplied on larger rolls, it may be necessary to use
some tissue before storing
into compartment.
Soiled bowl
after flushing
Partially fill bowl to cover soiled portion of bowl. Next flush will dissolve waste.
Tip: Leave valve blade open during use.
No power to
add water to
toilet bowl
Check cassette safety sensor switch and fuse-holder for proper engagement
and operation.
Note: Cassette has to be removed to reach switch and fuse.
Insert cassette and try adding water to toilet bowl.
Toilet can be flushed manually. Add water. Add water to bowl from a separate
container. Turn flush knob anti-clockwise to open valve blade. Turn clockwise
to close valve blade.
Cassette
cannot be
removed
Check for obstacles under retaining clip. Depress retaining clip several times
to check operation. Remove cassette. Flush knob and valve blade in partial
open position. Close valve blade by moving knob clockwise.
FA ULT F INDING
Cassette toilet
CAUTION: If valve blade is open during cassette removal, severe
damage to system can occur. Never force insertion or removal of the
cassette tank.
Valve blade
mechanism
sticks or is
hard to open
Spray light film of silicone on blade.
Major unit
malfunction
Contact your original Motorhome Dealer.
239
240
USEFUL INFORMATION
Spares and after sales Supercare .......................................................................................... 242
Repair facilities ....................................................................................................................... 242
Caravan Clubs ....................................................................................................................... 243
Motoring Associations ........................................................................................................... 243
Trade Association .................................................................................................................. 243
Change of ownership ............................................................................................................ 244
Index ..................................................................................................................................... 248
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
Owners Club ......................................................................................................................... 242
241
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
USEFUL INFORMATION
Owners club
The Owners Club is a completely independent
organisation run for the benefit of the
motorhome owners. They have numerous
rallies during the year in various parts of
the country. Apart from the friendliness and
companionship the Club generates it is also
actively engaged in charity work for those less
fortunate than ourselves. The address of the
Secretary of the Owners Club can be obtained
from the Swift Group website.
Spares and after sales
customer service
A catalogue of spare parts are available
through our Swift Group Dealer Network, from
door catches through to spare wheels. Please
note, all parts enquiries must be directed
through your dealer, as the Swift Group does
not operate a direct retail service.
We endeavour to supply parts for vehicles up
to 8 years old. If the original part is no longer
available your dealer should be able to source
a suitable alternative.
Note: Please remember to quote chassis
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) when
ordering any items from your dealer. This
can be found at the bottom of the front
windscreen, on the plate on the front cross
member within the engine compartment and
on the Swift manufacturers plate situated on
the bulkhead directly behind the front driver/
passenger seat.
Repair facilities
Should you be unfortunate to encounter
damage to your vehicle, we have a number
of approved workshops and dealerships with
workshop facilities to undertake such repairs.
Details of which can be found via our website:
www.swiftgroup.co.uk/find-a-dealer
242
CLUBS AND TRADE BODIES
Caravan Clubs
The Caravan Club,
East Grinstead House,
East Grinstead
West Sussex, RH19 IUA
Tel: 01342 326944
www.caravanclub.co.uk
The Camping and Caravanning Club,
Greenfields House,
Westwood Way,
Coventry,
West Midlands.
Tel: 0845 130 7631 or 024 7647 5448
www.campingandcaravanningclub.co.uk
The Society of Motor Manufacturers
and Traders Limited (SMT)
Forbes House,
Halkin Street,
London SW1X 7DS
Tel: 020 7235 7000
www.smmt.co.uk
Green Flag
Tel: 0845 246 1557
www.greenflag.com
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
The enjoyment of motorhoming can be greatly
enhanced by membership of one or more of
the various motorhome/caravanning, motoring
and holiday clubs. Here are some useful
addresses:
RBS Insurance
Churchill Court
Westmoreland Road
Bromley
Kent
BR1 1DP
0800 158 2493
Trade Association
Motoring Associations
NCC
Catherine House,
Victoria Road,
Aldershot,
Hampshire, GU11 1SS
Automobile Association (AA)
Fanum House,
Basingstoke,
Hants. RG1 2EA
Tel: 01252 318251
www.thencc.org.uk
www.motorhomeinfo.co.uk
e-mail: [email protected]
Tel: 08705 448866
www.theaa.co.uk
e-mail: [email protected]
RAC Motoring Services
RAC Motoring Services
8 Surrey St
Norwich
Norfolk
NR1 3NG
Tel: 01922 437000
www.rac.co.uk
© 2016 SWIFT GROUP LTD
243
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
Change of ownership
Notification of change of ownership
As the new second hand owner, please notify
the Swift Group of the change of ownership by
completing this page and sending it to:
Customer Services
Swift Group Limited,
Dunswell Road,
Cottingham,
East Yorkshire HU16 4JX.
Note: Warranties are only transferable
providing the terms and conditions of the
warranty have been met by the previous
owner(s). Please see warranty information
at the beginning of this handbook for full
details. The 'Extended Body shell warranty'
is a non-transferable warranty
244
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP
Model:
Chassis No:
New
owner:
Name:
Address:
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
Details of
motorhome:
Email:
Telephone:
Mobile:
Date of purchase:
Previous
owner:
Name:
Address:
Email:
Telephone:
Mobile:
Date of purchase:
245
246
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
247
IND E X
INDEX
248
Symbols
Code of conduct...................................... 16
230V mains electrical equipment power
consumption............................................ 68
Colour reference..................................... 217
A
Connecting cable wiring........................... 69
Accessory harnessing............................... 95
Country code........................................... 18
Acrylic windows...................................... 220
Cruise control........................................... 28
Airbag....................................................... 24
Cycle racks............................................. 206
Alde 3020 control panel.......................... 123
D
ALDE boiler troubleshooting................... 141
Dometic absorption refrigerator.............. 142
Alde Compact 3020............................... 134
Dometic C600 oven................................ 169
Alde heat exchanger............................... 133
Dometic refrigerator operating controls... 152
Alde heating troubleshooting.................. 131
Dometic refrigerator troubleshooting....... 160
AL-KO exhaust system........................... 233
Driving...................................................... 17
Assistance.................................................. 9
Driving licence.......................................... 24
Awning................................................... 202
Drop down bed...................................... 209
Awnings and Tents................................... 48
E
B
Electrical overseas connection.................. 67
Bathroom/shower care........................... 229
Electrical system....................................... 67
Blown air outlets..................................... 122
Electrics fault finding................................. 97
Bulb Replacement.................................. 229
En-route heating....................................... 63
Bunk and luton bed safety...................... 208
Environment............................................. 18
C
Escape paths........................................... 36
Cab radio............................................... 100
European touring...................................... 26
Caravan clubs........................................ 243
External 12v fill socket.............................. 52
Caravan exterior..................................... 220
External barbeque point............................ 61
Carbon monoxide..................................... 39
External BBQ point................................. 216
Cassette toilet faults............................... 239
External shower point............................. 217
Central Locking........................................ 20
Extractor hood........................................ 181
Change of ownership......................... 9, 244
F
Chassis and rear axle............................. 233
Fault finding............................................ 235
Children.................................................... 36
FENIX NTM work surface........................ 226
Child seats............................................... 23
Fire........................................................... 34
Cleaning water system............................. 53
Fire extinguisher....................................... 36
CO alarm.................................................. 39
Fix & Go Repair Kit................................... 30
Coastal code............................................ 18
Fresh water system.................................. 51
Condensation......................................... 221
Positioning................................................ 48
Gas.......................................................... 61
Pressure switch........................................ 55
Gas bottles............................................... 61
Pressure switch adjustment...................... 55
Gas cylinder changing.............................. 63
Pressure switch troubleshooting............... 56
Gas cylinder compartment........................ 62
Priming the water system......................... 53
Gas faults......................................... 66, 238
R
Gas safety advice..................................... 64
Repair facilities........................................ 242
Gas schematic................................... 60, 62
Reverse camera system......................... 206
Gas types................................................. 62
Reverse sensor system........................... 206
Generator usage....................................... 96
Roof light blind and flyscreen.................. 199
H
Roof lights.............................................. 198
Habitation relay......................................... 96
Roof loading............................................. 22
Heki midi rooflight................................... 200
S
Heki mini rooflight................................... 198
Seat belts........................................... 23, 24
HI-MACS work surface........................... 225
Seat swivel............................................. 208
K
Security.................................................... 37
Kitchen care........................................... 228
Service inspection.................................... 11
L
Shower................................................... 215
Large storage areas.................................. 22
Levelling the motorhome.......................... 48
Loading of vehicle..................................... 21
M
IN D E X
G
Side lockers............................................ 208
Skyview operating instructions................ 197
Smoke alarm............................................ 34
Solar panel connection point.................... 94
Solar panel use....................................... 208
Microwave oven..................................... 179
Spares and after sales customer care..... 242
Modifications.......................................... 220
Spare wheel on ALKO conversion............ 28
Motorhome battery................................... 92
Spare wheel removal Fiat chassis............. 29
Motorhome interior................................. 223
Supplier contacts..................................... 10
Motorhome terms..................................... 20
Swift Command power control system..... 72
Motoring associations............................. 243
Swift Command remote access & control. 89
Moving off................................................ 20
Swift Command technical information....... 77
O
Swift Command Tracker by Sargent......... 37
Omnistep single step.............................. 202
Swift Connect Direct................................... 9
Owners club........................................... 242
SwiftShield fabric.................................... 224
P
Swift Talk.................................................... 2
Parking..................................................... 17
Passenger seating.................................... 23
249
IND E X
INDEX
T
W
Tables.................................................... 211
Warranty..................................................... 6
Tank heaters............................................ 52
Waste water system................................. 55
Thermal insulation heating........................ 65
Water faults...................................... 58, 236
Thetford C260CS & C260S
cassette toilet......................................... 182
Water level sensor & cleaning................... 57
Thetford C260CS & C260S
cassette toilet fault finding...................... 186
Thetford C400 cassette toilet.................. 187
Thetford C400 cassette toilet fault finding. 193
Thetford cookers.................................... 164
Tow bar connection.................................. 95
Towing..................................................... 25
Trade association................................... 243
Truma combi 4E/6E boiler...................... 116
Truma Combi 4E/6E boiler
troubleshooting...................................... 121
Truma Combi boiler roubleshooting........ 115
Truma combination boiler....................... 102
Truma CP Plus digital timer control......... 103
TV antenna............................................. 213
TV Brackets............................................ 215
TV inlet................................................... 212
Typical appliance consumption figures..... 70
Typical gas schematic drawing................. 60
Tyre pressures.......................................... 23
Tyres........................................................ 22
V
Vehicle identification number.................... 37
Ventilation................................................. 37
250
Water system........................................... 50
Water tanks.............................................. 51
Wild camping........................................... 17
Window blinds........................................ 196
Windows................................................ 194
Winterisation........................................... 230
Wiring of connecting cable
and motorhome mains inlet...................... 69
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
All Swift Group models have been certified
by the NCC for compliance with stringent
European Standards, British Legislation and
industry SET Codes of Practice specifically
relating to health and safety issues.
The approval process covers the testing and
inspection of critical areas of the product from
fire safety, weights and dimensions, to gas,
electrics and ventilation. Every motorhome
carries the “NCC Approved Motorhome”
badge.
The NCC also conduct unannounced
inspections at the Swift factory to ensure
continued compliance. NCC Approval gives
you peace of mind that your motorhome is
legal and safe.
All Swift Group motorhomes are European
Whole Vehicle Type Approved.
This is your assurance that these motorhomes
meet all European regulations, and have been
constructed and conform to approved safety,
environmental and manufacturing control
standards.
251
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement